Spec - HVAC

MACTAN CEBU INTERNATIONAL
AIRPORT – TERMINAL 1
Cebu City, Philippines
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
Prepared by : MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC.

25/F, Chatham House
116 Valero corner V.A. Rufino Sts.,
Salcedo Village, Makati City
October 2018
OSCAR V. RELUCIO
Professional Mechanical Engineer
Reg. No. : 2886

PTR No. : 6619159
Date Issued : 05 January 2018
Issued at : Makati City
TIN No : 112-191-886
100% DESIGN DEVELOPMENT

DIVISION 15 –MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Section 01815 - ACMV Commissioning Requirements
2. Section 07841 - Through Penetration Firestopping Systems
3. Section 15007 - Alternative Equipment and Suppliers
4. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions
5. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
6. Section 15055 - Motors, Starters, Control Centers & Wiring
7. Section 15071 - Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
8. Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation
9. Section 15181 - Hydronic Piping
10. Section 15725 - Air Handling Units
11. Section 15734 - Computer Room Air Conditioning Units
12. Section 15815 - Metal Ducts and Accessories
13. Section 15836 - Fans & Ventilations
14. Section 15840 - Air Terminal Units
15. Section 15861 - Air Filters
16. Section 15900 - HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
17. Section 15950 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC.

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL ACMV Commissioning Requirements
SECTION 01815
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 WORK INCLUDED ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 COORDINATION ........................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 RELATED WORK ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE.................................................................................................................. 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 2
2.1 SCHEDULES AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS ...................................................... 2
2.2 RECORD DOCUMENTATION .......................................................................................................... 3
2.3 STARTUP .................................................................................................................................... 4
2.4 TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................................... 4
2.5 OPERATION AND TESTING ........................................................................................................... 4
2.6 DEMONSTRATION ........................................................................................................................ 5
2.7 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ................................................................................... 5
2.8 RECORD DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................... 5
2.9 COMPLETION .............................................................................................................................. 5
2.10 SPARE PARTS............................................................................................................................. 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................... 5
3.1 COMMISSIONING TESTS............................................................................................................... 5
3.2 ACMV SYSTEM .......................................................................................................................... 5
3.3 OTHER SERVICES ....................................................................................................................... 6
3.4 POST SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE VISITS .................................................................................. 7

S:\admin\mpi\MP1747_Mactan T1 Renovation Project (NTP 2018 - Feb)\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-08-10_100% Design
Development\Mechanical\01815-ACMV Commissioning Requirement.doc
SECTION 01815
SECTION 01815
ACMV COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Comply with the Agreement between the Construction Manager and Trade Sub-
Contractor and all other documents referred to therein.
B. Provide all services, materials and labour required to fully commission the mechanical
systems in accordance with this Section of the Specification.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Meet the requirements of the General Instructions.
B. Coordinate the work of this Section with all other Divisions to ensure complete and
operational mechanical systems at completion of this work.
C. Appoint a single person as Commissioning Coordinator who shall be responsible for

progressing the commissioning activities of each Division 15 trade. The
Commissioning Coordinator shall report to the Commissioning Manager.
D. Review the design intent of the project and the intended operation of systems with the
Consultant before proceeding with commissioning.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 – Mechanical General Provisions.
B. Section 15950 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with CIBSE CODES (Chartered Institution For Building Services Engineers).
Refer to Section 15950 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for more detailed
requirements on testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. The “Employers Representative” may elect to source start-up and handover by a

specialist commissioning company. This commissioning specialists is to be employed
by the Contractor. Supply to the Commissioning Manager, the following details
regarding the proposed firm:
1. Principle representative and qualifications
2. Proposed personnel and relevant project experience
3. Previous similar assignments and references
4. Scope of work to be undertaken
5. Company resources and equipment
MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 1 of 7

SECTION 01815
C. Use of a commissioning specialist shall not relieve Division 15 of the obligation to

name one of his own employees as the person responsible for progressing
commissioning, i.e. the Commissioning Coordinator.
Note: All works to be undertaken by the Contractor.
D. Supply the name, qualifications and experience of the proposed Commissioning

Coordinator upon Project Managers request. Selection shall be subject to review and
the approval of the Consultant. Supply alternative person(s) when requested by
Consultant.
E. The Consultant may, at his discretion, attend and advise in the commissioning
process. Meet Consultant requirements.
F. Hold and attend regular meetings during the commissioning process. Prepare
detailed progress reports to coincide with regular commissioning meetings.
Coordinate with the Commissioning Manager, the preparation and issue of minutes for
each meeting to be circulated to each involved trade, the Consultant and the
Construction Manager representative(s). Minutes shall highlight action items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULES AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS
A. Submit to the Consultant, 60 days prior to the scheduled Substantial Performance, a

detailed and comprehensive installation completion/startup/testing schedule,
identifying all trades and suppliers to be involved. Update the schedule and resubmit
for review, on a biweekly basis, during the course of commissioning. If found to be
unacceptable, revise the schedule and the construction forces to suit the reviewed
schedule. This schedule shall include, but is not limited to the following items:
1. Installation and testing of Refrigerant Piping systems. Very strict compliance

to manufacturer’s recommendations is required with regards to quality of
workmanship and testing procedures for refrigerant piping works such as pipe
covering, flushing, air-tightness of soldered, flared and flanged joints, vacuum
drying and nitrogen replacement. This is to ensure that no moisture and dirt is
left inside the pipe and guarantee no refrigerant leaks.
2. Installation, leak testing and cleaning of duct systems.
3. Control system wiring
4. Air balancing
5. Electrical service connections
6. Equipment suppliers pre-start checkout of the equipment installations,

including controls.
7. Start up of various pieces of equipment and systems.
8. Operational testing of system components.
9. Performance testing of equipment and systems.

SECTION 01815
10. Acceptance testing of equipment installations and system, by authorities

having jurisdiction and Contractor's insurance company
11. Troubleshooting
12. Calibration of controls and point checkout
13. Control software set-up and checkout including seasonal and response
checkout of operating sequences, PID optimization
14. Emergency system checkout
15. Fire alarm and control system interfacing
16. Submittal of completed equipment and system checkout sheets
17. Demonstration of systems and equipment
18. Maintenance manual preparation and submittal
19. Operator training program
20. Record documentation submittal
2.2 RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A. Prepare record documentation for each equipment installation covering:
1. Equipment identification and supplier
2. Shop Drawing submittal, review, production release, and delivery dates
3. Dates for completion of all work required to prepare for equipment installation
4. Dates for equipment installation, supplier pre-start checkout and system

availability for start-up
5. Dates for equipment start-up, performance testing, proposal for temporary

use, acceptance testing, demonstration, turnover and warranty start/finish
B. Submit proposed record sheets and procedures to Consultant for review, when
requested by the Contractor.
C. List all specialist personnel and equipment required for the test and ensure that these
are available by the test date.
D. Provide documentation of the commissioning process for inclusion into the

maintenance manuals. These are to include checkout sheets, equipment data sheets,
start-up certificates from suppliers involved in start-up, documentation concerning
demonstration to the Contractor. Include all record and result sheets form
commissioning tests.
E. Maintain a log of key operating parameters, problems encountered, solutions

employed and verification of effectiveness of solutions. Include log in maintenance
manuals.
F. Refer to example documentation available from Construction manager's

representative. Meet or exceed this level of reporting.

SECTION 01815
2.3 STARTUP
A. Coordinate and supervise the start-up of the various pieces of equipment and
systems. Utilize the start-up services of the manufacturer's representative. Ensure
that the equipment is operating in a satisfactory manner. Including, but not necessary
limited to the following:
1. Direction of rotation
2. Grease and lubricants
3. Noise, if deemed to be a problem
4. Seals
5. Alignment of fan drives by a millwright
6. Piping connections and safeties
7. Electrical amp draw, starting inrush current and trip/heater settings
B. Refer to Section 15010 – Mechanical General Provision requirements for Temporary

Services and Temporary and Trial Use.
2.4 TROUBLESHOOTING
A. Resolve inter Division coordination problems.
B. Where problems become apparent during the commissioning process, identify and
resolve these problems. The basic functions in troubleshooting are:
1. What - identification and definition of the problem
2. Why - determination and evaluation of the causes
3. When - determine the time available to resolve the problem
4. Involve the designing authority in the review of the problem and proposed
resolution
5. Coordinate remedial action with the appropriate parties
6. Evaluate the effectiveness of the remedial action
7. Record the problem, cause, remedial action and result
2.5 OPERATION AND TESTING
A. Refer to Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provision for Inspection, Testing and
Certificates.
B. Test the operation of the individual components and systems. Go through each step
of the sequence of operation and verify that each component operates correctly.
Direct and ensure that all trades involved make the required changes and adjustments
to effect the proper operation of all components and systems. Meet commissioning
test requirements.
C. Document operation and testing.

SECTION 01815
D. Carry out operational tests for the current season and simulate operation of summer,
winter and intermediate seasons.
2.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate to the Contractor the proper operation of all equipment and systems
supplied under this Division. Demonstrations shall occur only after the operation and
testing has been successfully completed. Ensure that Trade Sub-Contractor and
equipment suppliers participate in the demonstration as required.
B. Refer to Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provision for Instruction to Contractors.
2.7 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Refer to Section - 15010 Mechanical General Provision.
B. Coordinate the manual provision with Consultant prepared Operation and

Maintenance Manual, if available.
2.8 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Refer to Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provision.
2.9 COMPLETION
A. Refer to Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provision.
2.10 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide a list of spare parts, special tools, lubricants, etc. for each item of equipment
which has been purchased as part of the Contract.
B. Provide a listing of recommended spare parts for all equipment installed under
Division 15, to cover a period from Substantial Completion to Warranty end.
C. Provide at minimum, the following information for recommended spare parts:
1. Manufacturer's name, address, phone and fax numbers

2. Manufacturer's part name, part number, unit price, lead time, shelf life
3. Quantity recommended for 1 year
4. Alternative suppliers of compatible parts, including local supplier name,
address, phone and fax numbers
D. Submit preliminary list of spare parts and tools to Contractor at least 30 days prior to
intended system handover to Contractor. The Contractor reserves the right to add to,
reduce or omit entirely, the recommendations contained on these lists.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMISSIONING TESTS
3.1.1 Refer to Section 15950 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
3.2 ACMV SYSTEM
A. Verify readings, calibration and set-up of sensors and equipment, including, but not
necessary limited to checking the following:

SECTION 01815
1. Temperature sensors
2. Air flow switches
3. Status switches
4. Pressure gauges and gauge connection utilization
5. Control damper positioning, including tightness when closed and full
open/balance position
6. Alarm contacts
B. Verify correct sensors are reporting accurately to the distributed field panels and
operator workstation.
C. Operate each major equipment. Verify and correct the following if required:
1. Start/stop from the terminal
2. Correct open/close and modulation procedures with valves and dampers
3. Stable operation of controls under normal conditions and with changes in

air/refrigerant/on/off conditions
4. Trend logs operation indication
5. Piping, sensor and unit installation
6. Filters for return air.
7. Drain pan operation and trap priming
D. Verify duct cleaning, air balancing and air pattern adjustments.
E. Verify access to each fire damper.
F. Verify that all cooling coil drain pans and condensate piping operate.
3.3 OTHER SERVICES
A. Demonstrate access to all valves, equipment and components for servicing.
B. Coordinate with Division 16, a power failure test with emergency generator start-up.
1. Miscellaneous equipment on emergency power, with Division 16.
2. Stability of control equipment with start-up power surge
3. Controls system recovery

C. Verify the operation of all other equipment provided by Division 15.
E. Verify that interfacing to the work of other Divisions results in complete and
operational systems.

SECTION 01815
3.4 POST SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE VISITS
A. Visit the site and the Contractor's representative each month after Substantial
Performance for a minimum period of two days until the end of the project warranty
period.
B. Review the operation of the system.
C. Correct any operating problems, if problem is related to warranty issues.
D. Prepare a report for the Consultant and Construction Manager for inclusion in the
Operating Manuals of the problems and issues that have arisen and the corrective
action(s) recommended and implement.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Through Penetration Firestopping Systems
SECTION 07841
PART 1- GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS............................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE .......................................................................................................... 1
1.4 GUARANTEE............................................................................................................................. 1
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................... 1
1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS ....................................................................................................... 1
PART 2 – PRODUCTS......................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................. 2
2.2 SMOKE STOPPING IN SMOKE PARTITIONS ................................................................................... 3
PART 3 – EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................ 3
3.1 EXAMINATION ........................................................................................................................... 3
3.2 PREPARATION .......................................................................................................................... 3
3.3 INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................................... 3
3.4 CLEAN-UP AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK ..................................................................................... 4

Development\Mechanical\07841-Through Penetration and Firestopping System.doc
SECTION 07841
SECTION 07841
THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Closures of openings in walls, floors, and roof decks against penetration of flame,
heat, and smoke or gases in fire resistant rated construction.
B. Closure of openings in walls against penetration of gases or smoke in smoke

partitions.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be certified and approved by the manufacturer’s representative

prior to submission to the Consultant.
B. Manufacturer’s literature, data, and installation instructions for types of firestopping

and smoke stopping used.
C. List of FM, UL, or WH classification number of systems installed.
D. Certified laboratory test reports for ASTM E 814 tests for systems not listed by FM,
UL, or WH proposed for use.
E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Refer to Section 15007
F. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be included in

the submittal and bill of lading before delivery to site.
1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials in their original unopened containers with manufacturer’s name and
product identification.
B. Store in a location providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements.
1.4 GUARANTEE
Firestopping work subject to the terms of the Article GUARANTY except extend the guaranty
period to five years.
FM. UL, or WH or other approved laboratory tested products will be acceptable.
1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
The Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
ASTM E84- Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

SECTION 07841
ASTM E814- Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
B. Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM):
Annual Issue Approval Guide Building Materials
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
Annual Issue Building Materials Directory
Annual Issue Fire Resistance Directory
D. Warnock Hersey (WH):
Annual Issue Certification Listings
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. Use either factory built (Firestop Devices) or field erected through-Penetration

(Firestop Systems) to form a specific building system maintaining required integrity of
the fire barrier and stop the passage of gases of smoke.
B. Through-Penetration firestop systems and firestop devices tested in accordance with

ASTM E814 or UL 1479 using the “F” or “T” rating to maintain the same rating and
integrity as the fire barrier being sealed. “T” ratings are not required for penetrations
smaller than or equal to 100 mm (4 in) nominal pipe or 0.01 m² (16 sq.in) in overall
cross sectional area.
C. Products requiring heat activation to seal an opening by its intumescences shall

exhibit a demonstrated ability to function as designed to maintain the fire barrier.
D. Firestop sealants used for firestopping or smoke sealing shall have following
properties:
1. Contain no flammable or toxic solvents.
2. Have no dangerous or flammable outgassing during the drying or curing of

products.
3. Water-resistant after drying or curing and unaffected by high humidity,

condensation or transient water exposure.
4. When used in exposed areas, shall be capable of being sanded and finished
with similar surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor
surface.
E. Firestopping system or devices used for penetrations by glass pipe, plastic pipe or
conduits, unenclosed cables, or other non-metallic materials shall have following
properties:
1. Classified for used with the particular type of penetrating material used.

SECTION 07841
2. Penetrations containing loose electrical cables, computer data cables and

communications cables protected using firestopping systems that allow
unrestricted cable changes without damage to the seal.
3. Intumescent products which would expand to seal the opening and act as
fire, smoke, toxic fumes, and, water sealant.
F. Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke development of 50 when tested in

accordance with ASTM E84.
G. FM, UL, or WH rated or tested by an approved laboratory in accordance with ASTM

E814.
H. Materials to be asbestos free.
2.2 SMOKE STOPPING IN SMOKE PARTITIONS
A. Use silicone sealant in smoke partitions as specified in Section 3 Part 9, Adhesives,

Caulking , Sealants and Fasteners.
B. Use mineral fiber filler and bond breaker behind sealant.
C. Sealants shall have a maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50 when
tested in accordance with E84.
D. When used in exposed areas capable of being sanded and finished with similar
surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Submit product data and installation instructions, as required by article, submittals, after an on
site examination of areas to receive firestopping.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, or other substances that prevent adherence
and bonding or application of the firestopping or smoke stopping materials.
B. Remove insulation on insulated pipe for a distance of 150 mm (six inches) on either
side of the fire rated assembly prior to applying the firestopping materials unless the
firestopping materials are tested and approved for use on insulated pipes.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Do not begin work until the specified material data and installation instructions of the
proposed firestopping systems have been submitted and approved.
B. Install firestopping systems with smoke stopping in accordance with FM, UL, WH, or
other approved system details and installation instructions.
C. Install smoke stopping seals in smoke partitions.

SECTION 07841
3.4 CLEAN-UP AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK
A. As work on each floor is completed, remove materials, litter, and debris.
B. Do not move materials and equipment to the next-scheduled work area until
completed work is inspected and accepted by the Resident Engineer.
C. Clean up spills of liquid type materials.
D. Contractor’s Installation of all firestopping materials and products shall be closely

supervised by manufacturer’s representative.
E. Regular inspection shall be done by the manufacturer’s representative to ascertain

that the works are being done according to the design intent. A copy of the inspection
report with all its findings and recommendations including the corrective works
implemented shall be forwarded to the Consultant on regular basis.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Alternative Equipment and Suppliers
SECTION 15007
SECTION 15007
ALTERNATIVE EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIERS
PART 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 Where a choice of equipment is given, indicate selection by submitting this Section.
1.2 Where modifications to the work of Other Trades are required as a result or part of the
alternative offered, include the cost of said modifications in the alternative price offered.
1.3 Submit the following list of base bid and alternative suppliers in accordance with Bid
requirements.
Spec. Equipment Reference Bid Alternative “A” Alternative “B”
Reference Manufacturer Mfg. or Supplier
Section or Supplier Name
15050 Hangers & Grinnell Caddy-Erico Locally fabricated
Supports Gripple Diamond Walraven of equivalent
Hilti Eristrutt quality
Myatt Hokki
Unitstrut Superstrutt
15055 Motors G.E.
TECO
U.S N/A
Westinghouse
WEG
Starters, ABB
Contactors & Eton
Motor Control GE N/A
Centre Schneider
Siemens
Conductors Columbia
and Cables Phelps Dodge N/A
Philflex
Non-Metallic Atlanta
Conduit and Emerald N/A
Tubing Moldex
Neltex
Metallic Allied
Conduit and Matsushita/Panasonic
Tubing Mcgill N/A
Smart Tube
Sumitomo
Control AMP Netconnect/Tyco
Communication Electronics/Krone/
Cables Commscope
Anixter
Belden/Nordx/CDT
Clipsal N/A
LS Cables
Leviton
Panduit
Schneider/Actassi
Siemon
15071 Vibration & Mason Kinetic Noise Control
Seismic Metraflex Vibration Isolated
Controls VCS System (VIS) N/A
Vibration Eliminator
VMCI

Development\Mechanical\15007-Alternative Equipment and Suppliers.docx
SECTION 15007

15071 Vibration & Mason Kinetic Noise Control
Seismic Metraflex Vibration Isolated
Controls VCS System (VIS) N/A
Vibration Eliminator
VMCI
15075 Variable Speed Danfoss ABB
Drives Siemens Honeywell N/A
Yaskawa Schneider
Toshiba
15080 Duct Insulation
1. Flexible Aeroflex Class “O” Armaflex Class “1”
Elastomeric Armaflex Class “O” Aeroflex Class “1” N/A
K-Flex ST Class “O” K-Flex EC Class “1”
2. Polyolefin Thermobreak Aerofoam
Genshield
Thermalink N/A
Xcellon
3. Rockwool Roxul
(Kitchen & N/A
Genset Exhaust)
Pipe Insulation
1. Flexible Armaflex Class “O” Armaflex Class “1”
Elastomeric Aeroflex Class “O” Aeroflex Class “1” N/A
K-Flex ST Class “O” K-Flex EC Class “1”
2. Polyolefin Thermobreak “Tube” Aerofoam
Genshield N/A
Thermalink
Xcellon
15181 Valves (Gate, Crane Gala Weilong
Ball, ICV (AVK) Honeywell (bronze
Globe, Check Nibco only)
and Y- Oventrop Kitz (Japan)
Strainers) Victaulic Maple
OKI
Showa (Japan)
Tozen (Japan)
Nenutec
15181 Butterfly Valves ICV (AVK) Belimo (Enye)
(Manual and Keystone Gala
Motorized) Oventrop Honeywell
Tomoe Kennedy N/A
Victaulic Maple
OKI
Tozen (Japan)
15181 Pressure Honeywell Maple
Gauges Weksler, Wika
Thermometers, Winters, Trerice N/A
Test Kits
15181 Flexible Pipe Mason Gala Belman
Connectors, Metraflex Honeywell E-Flex
Expansion VCS Maple Senior Flexonics
Joints/Guides Victaulic
VMCI

SECTION 15007

15181 Air Separator, Amtrol
Expansion Bell & Gossett Jaco (Korea) N/A
Tank Oventrop
TACO
15181 PVC Pipes and Atlanta Moldex
Fittings Emerald N/A
Neltex
15181 B. I. Flanges Mayer
and Screwed Pacific Pipes
Fittings RNW Pacific N/A
Supreme
Superior
Southern Pipes
15181 Groove Fittings Victaulic Firn Lock
Green-lock
Grinell N/A
LEDE
MGCH
15181 B. I. Welded Supreme (Raw Mayer Mayer
Pipes and material from Japan & Superior (Raw material RNW Pacific (Raw
Spiral Korea) from Taiwan & Thailand) material from China)
15181 B. I. Seamless Sumitomo
Pipes
15181/ Copper Tubes/ Bookwang Smartco Guangdong
15183 Refrigerant Daejin Huahong
Piping Totaline
15181 Combination Frese (Enye) B&G
Isolating, Hattersley Belimo (Enye)
Balancing and ICV (AVK) Gala N/A
Measuring Oventrop Honeywell
Valve TA
15181 Suction Bell & Gossett
Diffuser, Triple Gala N/A
Duty Valves Victaulic
15181 HDPE Pipes Geberit
George Fisher N/A
Hydrauvar
REHAU
15181 Air Purger, Air Honeywell N/A
Vents Oventrop
15185 Hydronic Armstrong Ajax Industrial Pumps:
Pumps Aurora Ingersoll-Rand KSB
Bell & Gossett (Flowserve)
PACO Worthington
Peerless (Flowserve)
15189 Chemical Advance Newtech
Water Industrial Corp.
Treatment Balticare
Specialist Bauer
Bestchem N/A
Chemperts
Eco-System Tech.
Firstchem Tech., Inc.
Wise and Comp.
World Chem.

SECTION 15007

15191 Fuel Oil Pumps Roper, Tuthill, Viking N/A N/A
15191 Main Fuel Balmoral
Storage Tank Fiberglass Tank &
(Fiberglass) Pipe
STP N/A N/A
Xerxes Corporation
ZCL Composites Inc.
15191 Main Fuel Follosco Local fabricator with
Storage Tank accreditation from N/A
(Steel) major oil companies.
15191 Fuel Oil Scully
System Seismic N/A N/A
Controls Tracetek
15625 Centrifugal Carrier Climaveneta
Chillers Trane Dunham-Bush N/A
York Ebara
McQuay
15625 Screw Chillers Carrier Climaveneta
Dunham-Bush Leading
Trane Kuenling N/A
York Midea
Super-Aire
15630 Magnetic Arctic Cool Climaveneta
Bearing Oil-free Multistack Daikin
Centrifugal Smardt Dunham-Bush N/A
Chiller Nouvac
York
15635 Absorption Broad Climaveneta
Chillers Ebara N/A
LG
Sanyo
15641 Induced-Draft (CTI, FM) (CTI, Non-FM) (Non-CTI, Non-
Cooling Tower BAC BAC FM)
Evapco Evapco BAC
Marley Jinling Grad-DB
King-Sun (selected Evapco
models only) King-Sun
Liang-chi Marley
Marley Nihon Spindle (JS
Nihon Spindle Series)
(KG Series) Ocean
Truwater
15650 Helical Rotary Trane Model N/A N/A
Liquid Chillers RTUB / RTCA
15725 Air Handling Carrier Aeris Leading
Units Dunham – Bush Frimec Kuenling
Mc-Quay Saiver (Malaysia) Midea
Multistack Super-Aire
Saiver (Italy)
Sinko (Japan or Taiwan)
Trane
York

SECTION 15007

15725 Primary AHUs Carrier Aeris
Dunham – Bush Frimec
Mc-Quay Saiver (Malaysia)
Multistack
Saiver (Italy) N/A
Sinko (Japan or
Taiwan)
Trane
York
15725 Primary AHU’s Carrier
with Heat Flex-Air (Bry-Air) N/A N/A
Recovery Trane
Wheel York
15730 Window Type Carrier Condura Everest
AC Hitachi Gree LG
National Kolin
Panasonic Koppel
Samsung Midea
15734 Computer Airedale Climaveneta Airsys
Room Air Citec DB-Aire Remax
Conditioning Hiross Frimec
Units (CRAC) Liebert Montair
Schneider
Stulz
15736 DX Split Type Carrier Koppel
Air Daikin LG
Conditioners Hitachi Midea
Mitsubishi (IEEI)
Mitsubishi (MHI) N/A
National
Panasonic
Samsung
Trane
15740 Hot Water Barcol-Air
Reheat Coil Indeeco N/A N/A
15784 Heat Pipes Bry-Air
Heat Pipe Technology N/A N/A
Inviro Tech
15785 Heat Recovery Flakt-Woods
Wheel Flex-Air (Bry-Air) N/A N/A
15786 Heat Pumps AO Smith
Quantum N/A N/A
Carrier
15800 Variable Daikin DB-Aire Everest
Refrigerant Mitsubishi (IEEI) Hitachi LG
Flow (VRF) Mitsubishi (MHI) Koppel
System Samsung Midea
Toshiba
15815 Galvanized Iron Apo “Galfan” N/A
Sheets Sonic “Ultrabond”
Union

SECTION 15007

15815 Sound Aldes
Attenuating Units ASLI (Malaysia)
Connols-Air (OLS)
IAC
Mecomb N/A N/A
Metalaire (USA)
NAP
Phoenix
Ruskin (Australia)
Trox
15815 Volume Dampers Aerotech
ASLI (Malaysia)
Connols-Air (OLS) N/A N/A
Metalaire (USA)
Prudentaire
Ruskin (Australia)
Trox
15815 Grilles and Aerotech Ruskin (Australia)
Diffusers ASLI (Malaysia) Sam-Kwang
Connols-Air Tech-Aire
LGA
Metalaire (USA) N/A
Prudentaire
Smart Air / Price
Titus
Trox
Tuttle and Bailey
15815 Duct Sealant, Aluflex
Aluminum Duct Duro-Dyne
Tape, Flexible Foster
Duct Ideal N/A N/A
Connector, Duct Idenden
Pins MEI
15815 Fire/Smoke Anemostat Prudentaire
Dampers ASLI Ruskin (Malaysia)
Connols-Air (OLS)
Greenheck N/A
Metalaire (USA)
Prefco
Ruskin (USA)
Titus
Trox
15815 Flexible Air Ducts Aeroduct
Aluflex
Bradlex N/A N/A
Flexiduct
Piflex
15825 Textile Air Ductsox (Trox)
Dispersion System Prihoda N/A N/A
15836 Centrifugal Roof, Chicago Jin Dun (DB Int’l) ACRE
Wall Fan, SISW/ Greenheck Fil-Chin
DIDW Fans Krueger (Systemair)
National
Niagara
Nicotra
NYB

SECTION 15007

15836 Vaneaxial Fans Greenheck Jin Dun (DB Int’l) ACRE
with Integral Krueger Fil-Chin
Sound Trap Niagara (Systemair)
Nicotra
15836 Propeller Broan Jin Dun (DB Int’l) ACRE
Greenheck Fil-Chin
Indola (Systemair)
KDK
Kruger
National
Niagara
Nicotra
NYB
15836 Centrifugal Aldes ACRE
Ceiling and In- Broan Fil-Chin (Systemair)
Line Fans Greenheck
(Domestic) Indola N/A
KDK
National
Nicotra
3D
15836 Jet Fans / Barcol-Air
Induction Fans Flakt-Woods
Hamma Turbovent
Krueger N/A N/A
Sewon Eng. Co. Ltd.
Vantech
Ventopia
15836 Shaft Fans Ventopia Krueger
Niagara N/A
15836 Airflow Limiter Aldes
Trox N/A N/A
15836 Air Curtains KDK Fil-Chin (Systemair)
Mars N/A
National
15840 VAV Terminal Anemostat
Units ASLI (Malaysia)
Barcol-Air
Carnes N/A N/A
Connols Air
Potorff
Trox
Tuttle and Bailey
15840 Fan Coil Units Carrier Saiver (Malaysia)
Climaveneta Sinko (Malaysia)
Dunham-Bush
Frimec
Multistack N/A
Saiver (Italy)
Sinko (Japan or
Taiwan)
Trane
York

SECTION 15007

15861 Air Filters AAF
Camfil N/A N/A
Purafil
Volkes
15862 Ultra Violet Aspiro
Germicidal Fresh Aire N/A N/A
Irradiation UV Sterile Aire
(UVGI) Light Fabri-Technic
15865 Oxygen/Ion Bio-Climatic Ionair H-lon Cluster
Cluster Bio-Oxygen
Generator
15900 Controls and ACI (Enye)
Instrumentation Alerton
Components Automated Logic
Belimo (Enye)
Dwyer (Enye)
Dynasonics
Honeywell N/A N/A
Innotech (Enye)
Johnsons
Micronet
Siemens
TAC
Vector (Enye)
15900 Pressure – Dynasonics Enye-Sontex
Independent Flowcon SM
Dynamic Frese N/A
Control Hattersley
Valve
15900 BTU Meters (Ultrasonic) (Turbine)
Dynasonics Enye-Sontex
Honeywell Flowline
Qalcosonic Oventrop N/A
Sontex
15950 Air Flow Alnor
Balancing Shortridge N/A N/A
Instruments
15985 Carbon Enmet
Monoxide Garage Guard N/A N/A
Detection & MSA
Control
07841 Firestopping Metacaulk Hilti
Materials Rectorseal
Specseal N/A
Tremco
3M
07842 Fire Cladding Promat
(Ductwork) Winduct N/A N/A
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Mechanical General Provisions
SECTION 15010
PART 1 – GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 1

1.1 WORK INCLUDED ................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................. 2
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS .......................................................................................... 3
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS ....................................................................................................... 4
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................ 4
1.6 COORDINATION ...................................................................................................................... 4
1.7 CHANGES TO CONTRACT WORK ............................................................................................. 4
1.8 PRE-PURCHASED EQUIPMENT................................................................................................. 5
1.9 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD .................................................................................................... 5
1.10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS .................................................................................................... 5
1.11 SEPARATE PRICES ................................................................................................................. 6
1.12 ALTERNATIVE MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIERS ...................................................................... 6
1.13 SAMPLES ............................................................................................................................... 6
1.14 EQUIPMENT SELECTION.......................................................................................................... 7
1.15 PACKING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION .................................................................................... 8
1.16 DRAWINGS AND APPROVAL..................................................................................................... 9
1.17 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ............................................................................ 15
1.19 PROPOSED SEPARATION OF WORK BETWEEN THE TRADES .................................................... 16
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................... 23
2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ................................................................................................ 23
PART 3 – EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................ 24
3.1 PROGRAMME ....................................................................................................................... 24
3.2 PROGRESS REPORT............................................................................................................. 24
3.3 INSPECTION, TESTING AND CERTIFICATES ............................................................................. 25
3.4 RESULTS OF TESTS.............................................................................................................. 28
3.5 TEMPORARY SERVICES ........................................................................................................ 28
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING ...................................................................................................... 28
3.7 PROTECTION ....................................................................................................................... 28
3.8 PAINTING, LABELLING AND FINISHING .................................................................................... 29
3.9 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USE ................................................................................................ 32
3.10 COMPLETION ....................................................................................................................... 32
3.11 INSTRUCTIONS TO EMPLOYER ............................................................................................... 33
3.12 PROTECTION OF EMPLOYER’S PREMISES .............................................................................. 33

Development\Mechanical\15010-Mechanical General Provisions.doc
SECTION 15010
SECTION 15010
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. These Specifications are an integral part of the Contract Documents. Tendering,

Contract Requirements and General Requirements apply to all Division 15
Specification Sections.
B. Work in the Specifications is divided into descriptive Sections which are not intended
to delegate functions or work to any specific SubMain Contractor or identify absolute
contractual limits between SubMain Contractor, nor between the Main Contractor and
his SubMain Contractor. The requirements of any one Section apply to all other
Sections, for example: the motor service factor requirement. Refer to other Divisions
and Sections to ensure a completed operational product and fully coordinated
standard of work.
C. The direction to 'provide' equipment, materials, products, Labor and services shall be
interpreted to 'supply, install and test' the Division 15 work indicated on the Drawings
and specified in the Specifications.
D. Provide and include in the Contract Price Division 15 work including mechanical
components and normal system accessories not shown on the Drawings or stipulated
in the Specifications, and required to ensure completed operational systems and a
fully coordinated standard of Work acceptable to the MEEPF Consultant and all
authorities having jurisdiction.
E. The work essentially shall include, but shall not be limited to the following items:
1. Submission of technical specifications and samples of all supply items for

approval by the MEEPF Consultant.
2. Submission of shop drawings of all items for fabrication for approval by the
MEEPF Consultant prior to fabrication.
3. Application and securing of required permits and licenses including

facilitating inspection by governing agencies and payment of all fees levied
therewith.
4. Provide labor and materials required to install, test and place into operation
the MEEPF systems as called for in the Contract Documents, and in
accordance with applicable codes and regulations.
5. Provide labor, materials, and accessories required to provide complete,

operating MEEPF systems, including dismantling and/or relocation of existing
utilities when required. Labor, materials or accessories not specifically called
for in the Contract Documents, but required to provide complete, operating
MEEPF systems shall be provided without additional cost to the Employer.
6. Termination of motors/equipment including provision of necessary

connectors and insulators.
7. Roughing-ins and wiring from Motor Control Center to motor controllers.
8. Provision for interfacing with others.

SECTION 15010
9. Fire stopping of all vertical and/or horizontal pipe penetration to fire rated
areas.
10. Miscellaneous Works:-
a. Hacking of non-structural wall and partitions to provide opening for

pipes and sealing of opening around sleeves and pipes including
provision of escutcheon plates.
b. Grouting of opening in walls after such pipes are in place and sealing
of all such openings if not used.
c. Flushing of newly installed plumbing system.
d. Restoration/repair of existing structures damaged during installation.
e. Miscellaneous items and other provisions required to maintain

cleanliness level of adjacent areas during the entire duration of
construction.
f. Full instruction after completing the job to the Maintenance Personnel

regarding operation and maintenance operation of the entire
installation. Provide complete printed/type instruction booklets
(hardbound) covering maintenance operation and adjustment of each
piece of equipment and list of each spare parts.
11. Testing and commissioning.
12. Submission of five (05) sets of operations and maintenance manuals and as-
built plans.
13. Training of Employer’s plant operators on the system’s maintenance and

operation.
14. Coordination with other trades for special requirements for this package. (i.e.
concrete pads, block-outs, relays, etc.)
15. Provision of guarantee as specified in the Specifications.
A. Comply with the current applicable codes, ordinances, and regulations of the
authority or authorities having jurisdiction, the rules, regulations and requirements of
the utility companies serving the project and the Employer’s insurance underwriter.
B. Drawings, specifications, codes and standards are minimum requirements. Where

requirements differ, the more stringent apply.
C. Should any change in drawings or specifications be required to comply with the

governing regulations, notify the Employer’s Representative prior to submitting bid.
D. All equipment and installations shall meet or exceed minimum requirements of the
Standards and Codes listed under item 1.3.
E. Execute work in strict accordance with the best practices of the trades in a thorough,
substantial, workmanlike manner by competent workmen. Provide a competent,
experienced, full-time MEEPF Project Manager who is authorized to make decisions
on behalf of the Main Contractor.

SECTION 15010
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
A. Abbreviations:
1. PS Philippines Standard
2. PEC Philippine Electrical Code (Part 1:1992, Part 2:1988)
3. ANSI American National Standards Institute
4. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
5. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories
6. IEC International Electro-technical Committee
7. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
8. IES Illuminating Engineering Society
9. NEC National Electrical Code
10. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association
11. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
12. UL Underwriters Laboratory
13. AMCA Air Moving & Conditioning Association
14. ADC Air Diffusion Council
15. ARI Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
16. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning Engineers
17. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
18. AWWA American Water Works Association
19. PSME Philippine Society of Mechanical Engineering Code
20. NPCP National Plumbing Code of the Philippines
21. NBCP National Building Code of the Philippines
22. FCP Fire Code of the Philippines
23. IPC International Plumbing Code
24. IMC International Mechanical Code
25. FM Factory Mutual
26. NBS National Bureau of Standards
27. ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers (Handbook)
28. ANSI American National Standard Institute
29. ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
30. AWWA American Water Works Association
B. Definitions
1. Where it is stated in these specifications to submit to Engineer for review,

refer to Architectural General and Special Conditions for proper procedures.
2. FURNISH means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus,

controls, tests, accessories, and all other items customarily required for the
proper and complete application.
3. INSTALL means to join, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect

together before testing and turning over to Employer, complete and ready for
regular operation.
4. PROVIDE means to FURNISH, INSTALL and TEST.
5. AS DIRECTED means as directed by the Employer’s Representative, or his

representative.
6. CONCEALED means embedded in masonry or other construction, installed

behind wall furring or within drywall partitions, furniture wiring management or
installed within hung ceilings.

SECTION 15010
7. SUBMIT means submit to Employer’s Representative for review.
8. “Architect”, “Employer’s Representative”, “MEEPF Consultant”, “Structural

Consultant”, “Commissioning Authority”, the Party or Parties responsible for
interpreting, accepting and otherwise ruling on the performance under “this
Contract”.
9. “General Contractor”, the party responsible of the installation.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Provide new materials and equipment of proven design and quality. Provide current
models of equipment with published ratings certified by recognized local and
international testing and standards agencies.
B. Workmanship and installation methods shall conform to the best modern practice.
Employ skilled tradesmen to perform work under the direct supervision of fully
qualified personnel.
C. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturers written recommendations.
D. Meet ASTM, ANSI, AWWA and other industry standards in the selection and
provision of equipment, materials, pipe and system components.
E. Meet ASTM, ANSI, AWWA Standards for the supply and installation of all equipment.
F. Meet the additional selection, sizing and performance criteria specified in this
Specification.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Meet the requirements and recommendations of local Municipal Ordinances.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate and schedule Division 15 work with all other work in the same area or
with work which is dependent upon Division 15 work so as to facilitate mutual
progress.
B. Identify and resolve interference problems prior to prefabrication and installation of

equipment. Submit interference drawings for review upon MEEPF Consultant
Request.
C. Examine the site and all Contract Documents prior to bid submission. No allowance
will be made for any difficulties encountered due to any features of the building,
methods of construction, site or surrounding public and private property which existed
up to the bid close.
1.7 CHANGES TO CONTRACT WORK
A. Do not proceed with any changes to the Work without written authority from the
Employer.
B. Follow procedures outlined in Tendering and Contract Requirements for

administration and execution of Contract revisions.
C. Quotations for changes to Division 15 work shall be based on:

SECTION 15010
1. Methods either approved or directed by the MEEPF Consultant.
1.8 PRE-PURCHASED EQUIPMENT
A. Where equipment has been pre-purchased by the Employer for installation by

Division 15, assume complete responsibility for acceptance, delivery schedule, off
loading, storage, rigging, installation, protection, start-up and warranty of this
equipment, all as if the equipment were provided by Division 15.
B. The responsibilities of the equipment supplier are delineated in the pre-purchase

documents which are available for Main Contractor review during the bid period.
C. The following equipment has been pre-tendered in order to ensure equipment

delivery in time to meet the building construction schedule.
D. Include in Contract Price, the cost of the following pre-purchased equipment.
E. The Employer’s Representative shall bear the equipment and FOB job site shipping
costs directly.
F. Request from the Employer’s Representative, full details of the equipment and the
manufacturer's Shop Drawings. Include related information in the Operating and
Maintenance Manual.
G. Assume extensions of warranties to meet specified times.
1.9 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
A. The Defects Liability Period for the purposes of this General Contract shall be a
period of twelve months from the ‘Date of Practical Completion’, providing that during
such period the General Contractor shall have remedied and made good all faults or
defects as described below, to the Employer’s Representative satisfaction.
B. During the Defects Liability Period, the General Contract shall at his own cost remedy
and make good with all possible speed any faults or defects in the Plant or Works
due, in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative, to faulty materials,
workmanship or design and, shall indemnify the Employer and/or the Main Building
Contractor against any damage or injury to the Building contents and/or occupants
arising as a result of such faults or defects.
C. If the General Contract fails to remedy such faults or defects within a reasonable time
the Employer may proceed to do so at the risk and expense of the General Contract
and without prejudice to such other rights as the Employer may have under the
General- Contract.
D. Other requirements shall be as described in the relevant section of the Specification.
1.10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
A. Submit Supplementary Mechanical Bid Form. Failure to comply with the stated
requirements of the Bid Form may nullify the bid.
B. The Bidder is invited to submit additional alternative prices not specifically requested
with the Bid.
C. Alternative prices may be used to establish the lowest Contract Price.
D. The lowest or any Bid will not necessarily be accepted.

SECTION 15010
1.11 SEPARATE PRICES
A. Submit separate prices on the Bid Form and express as a credit or an extra to the
Stipulated Bid Sum.
B. Calculation of the Contract Price will include separate prices consistent with their
acceptance or rejection by the Employer.
1.12 ALTERNATIVE MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIERS
A. Equipment and materials are specifically described for the purpose of indicating
standards of quality and workmanship. Base Bid on the items specified and shown
on Drawings.
B. In general, only the specified brands under base bid will be accepted. If only allowed
(during pre-bid or thru RFIs), alternatives for equipment or materials considered equal
in quality and performance may be submitted with the Bid Form. Supply with each
alternative, following bid submission, upon request by MEPF Consultant, the
following information:
1. Details of manufacture/Country of Origin
2. Dimensions including required clearance
3. Performance data
4. The cost saving for piping and electrical changes imposed by the alternative
5. The effect upon and cost to other trades
C. Where alternatives are accepted, there will be no further cost allowances for
subsequent changes in Division 15 work or other Contracts to make the alternative
complete and equal to the specified equipment and materials.
D. If alternative equipment, differing from that which is shown on Drawings is accepted,

prepare when requested, equipment layouts at no extra cost. Show clearly in plan,
elevations and sections, all equipment details including dimensional changes. Show
location changes to pipes and wiring and the effect of these changes on the building.
Drawings shall be 1:50 scale.
E. The right is reserved to accept or reject any alternative.
F. After Contract is awarded, alternative equipment and materials will only be allowed
on a limited scale and upon submission of justification letter explaining the benefits to
the Client of such equipment or substitution.
1.13 SAMPLES
A. Within one month following the award of the Contract, the General Contractor shall
submit for review one set of labeled samples (where applicable) as follows:
1. PVC pipes and fittings

2. Valves, strainers vents and drains
3. Pipes supports
4. Galvanized steel pipes and fittings
5. Black steel pipes and fittings
6. Volume/fine/smoke dampers
7. Grilles, diffusers, registers, plenum box

SECTION 15010
8. Pressure gages thermometers and other instrumentations

9. Cables and wiring
10. Cable supports
11. Thermal and acoustic insulation materials
12. Vibration isolators
13. Seismic hangers both for horizontal and risers
14. For other samples required, refer to specific Sections and as requested by
the Owner and/or Consultant.
B. The Employers Representative reserves the right to require samples which show the
fabrication techniques and workmanship of component parts, and the design of
accessories and other auxiliary items, before any installation work process.
C. The General Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative for

endorsement, manufacturer’s specification and installation instructions for trade
products.
1.14 EQUIPMENT SELECTION
A. All equipment supplied shall be in accordance with this Specification and the relevant
drawings and to the approval of the Employer’s Representative.
B. The capacities of all plant and equipment described in the General- Contract are
minimum capacities and the General Contractor shall check them with the Employers
Representative, taking into account any variations which may be made to the
systems during the progress of the General- Contract Works.
C. The General Contractor shall be required to demonstrate at site that the duties
required of the equipment are obtainable.
D. Physical sizes of all plant and equipment are to be suitable for the space allocated for
the accommodation of such plant and equipment, taking into account the requirement
of access for maintenance purposes.
E. In selecting makes and types of equipment, the General Contractor shall ascertain
that facilities for proper maintenance, repair and replacement are provided.
F. Where the General Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that
specified or detailed in the drawing, which requires any redesign of the system,
drawings showing the layout of the equipment and such redesign as required
therefore shall be prepared by the General Contractor at his own expenses. Where
such approved deviation necessitates a different quantity and arrangement of
materials and equipment’s from that originally specified or indicated in the drawings,
the General Contractor shall furnish and install any such additional materials and
equipment’s required by the system at no additional cost.
G. Equipment catalogue and manufacturer's specifications must be submitted for

examination and details shall be submitted for the approval of the Employer’s
Representative before any equipment is to be ordered.
This shall include all information necessary for the Employer’s Representative to
ascertain the equipment comply with this Specification and drawings. Data and sales
catalogue of a general nature will not be accepted.
H. Before ordering equipment, the General Contractor shall provide the Employers
Representative with full details of the weights and characteristics of the equipment for
purposes of determining floor loading, power consumption etc.

SECTION 15010
1.15 PACKING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. All materials, equipment, components and accessories shall be delivered to the Site
in a new condition, properly packed and protected against damage or contamination
or distortion, breakage or structural weakening due to handling, adverse weather or
other circumstances and, as far as practicable, they shall be kept in the packing
cases or under approved protective coverings until required for use.
B. Any items suffering from damage during manufacture, or in transit, or on site whilst in
storage or during erection shall be rejected and replaced without extra cost to either
the Employer or the General Contractor unless either of them, or their respective
representatives, cause such damages.
C. In the case of such materials, equipment, components and accessories which

originate overseas:
1. The said items shall be adequately and securely packed for safe
transportation with due regard to the climatic conditions encountered in
transit and on arrival.
2. British Standard 1133 and supplements, or other comparable and acceptable

code, shall be used as a guide for the standard of packing and package
required. All bright polished or plated parts shall be treated with suitable
corrosion preventative.
3. At the time of shipping, each consignment shall be documented with packing

lists and bills of lading which shall contain full statements of the packages
consigned with particulars of the dimensions, weights, contents, shipping
marks and approximate value of each package shall be provided in duplicate
to the General Contractor.
D. Where it is stipulated in the Specification or elsewhere in the General Contract that

packages, pallets, casks or other packaging or handling materials are returnable,
then the General Contractor shall forthwith upon receiving written notice to that effect
from the Contractor, remove the same from the site as any other place where the
materials, equipment, components and accessories have been unpacked.
E. Neither the Employer’s Representative nor the General Contractor shall be liable for
loss or damage to or return of any packages, pallets, casks or other packaging or
handling materials where the General Contractor fails to collect as notified by the
General Contractor.
F. After delivery to site and prior to installation the General Contractor shall ensure that
all materials and equipment are properly stored on site to avoid mechanical damage
and the adverse affects of heat, humidity etc. The General Contractor shall provide
proper shelving and racking to support and protect the equipment and materials. All
electrical equipment shall be stored covered in its original packaging or by plastic
sheeting.
G. The General Contractor shall apply an approved protective crating or fix some other
protective material to the materials, equipment, components and accessories so as to
protect them after installation. In the event that the General Contractor fails to do, the
General Contractor shall repair to the satisfaction of the Employers Representative or
supply free of all charge any replacement required to substitute for any part of the
materials, equipment, components and accessories which may have been damaged
in whole or in part as a result of such failure as directed by the Employers
Representative and shall without prejudice to such other liabilities under this General-
Contract, pay for all expenses and outgoing of the Employer or the Contractor

SECTION 15010
incurred in respect of the removal and disposal of the damaged parts and the
installation of the substitute parts.
H. The General Contractor shall be responsible for the off loading and handling of
cables on site and shall ensure that cables are new and delivered to site on new
drums and properly protected against mechanical damage and loss with
manufacturer's seals still intact. Partly used drums of cables which have already
been used elsewhere shall not be acceptable unless special approval is given by the
Employers Representative in writing.
I. Waterproof protection shall be applied to all electrical busbar and switchgears,

thermal insulation, and other materials susceptible to moisture damage during and
after installation until handover to the Employer.
J. The General Contractor shall be responsible for unpacking and removal from site all
temporary protective covers prior to the handover of the Installation to the Employer.
K. The General Contractor shall accept at job site the sanitary fittings from the Sanitary
Fitting Supplier and store on Site. The sanitary fittings shall be well protected by the
Sanitary General Contractor from damage of any kind. After installation, each fixture
shall be well protected from damage and spoilage by effects of weather and
subsequent construction and the finishing activities of other trades.
L. All fixtures or fittings damaged due to improper installation, storage or handling will be
rejected by the Employers Representative and shall be replaced with new,
undamaged items as specified. Any costs shall be borne by the General Contractor.
1.16 DRAWINGS AND APPROVAL
A. Interpretation of Drawings
1. The Specification and any drawings or other documents attached thereto and
issued by the Employers Representative shall be deemed to include, whether
or not specifically mentioned or shown, any materials, accessories or work as
may be necessary for the satisfactory completion of the Works. The General
Contractor shall make due allowance in his Tender for such materials or
work.
2. Where a discrepancy exists between the drawings and Specification, or

where the interpretation of either is in doubt, the General Contractor shall
obtain written clarification on such matters before submitting his Tender. Any
such clarification from the Employer’s Representative to the General
Contractor or vice versa dated prior to the submission of the Tender, shall
form part of the General-Contract Documents. If no clarification is requested
and obtained by the General Contractor the Employer’s Representative
reserves the right to select either option irrespective of the allowances the
General Contractor has made in his tender.
B. Tender Drawings
1. Tender Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of work to be

installed. Run and arrangement of piping and the positioning of apparatus
shall be approximately as indicated.
2. The Tender Drawings are primarily intended to enable the Tender to prepare
his estimate and submit Tender. Where runs of piping, cables, conduits, etc.
are shown to small scale these do not necessarily indicate exact positions,
and all offsets fittings and accessories that may be required are not

SECTION 15010
necessarily shown. The Tender Drawings are based on agreement with the
Employer taking into account co-ordination with other services and no
alteration in principle will be allowed without approval.
3. If directed by the Employer’s Representative, the General Contractor shall,

without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed
to execute properly the work and prevent conflicts with the works of other
trades.
4. After the award of the General-Contract, the Employer’s Representative will,

without charge, furnish two copies of the drawings and Specifications and will
within a reasonable time also furnish such further drawings as are reasonably
necessary to enable all the Employers Representative's Instructions to be
carried out. The Employer’s Representative will also provide all details
which in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative are necessary for the
execution of any part of the work.
5. Additional copies of the drawings and the Specification can be provided to

the General Contractor upon written request to the Employer’s
Representative, but the Employer’s Representative will charge for such
additional copies at current commercial rates.
C. General Contractors Drawings
1. The General Contractor shall prepare, or be responsible for obtaining, the

following drawings:
a. Installation Drawings.
b. Manufacturer's Shop Drawings.
c. Builders Work Drawings.
d. Progress Drawings
e. Record Drawings and Charts.
2. The symbol notation on all drawings shall be the same as the Tender
Drawings. New symbols, not previously used on the Tender Drawings shall
be agreed with the Employer’s Representative. All drawings shall have a
stenciled title block and stenciled notes.
3. The General Contractor shall be responsible for verifying the accuracy of all
dimensions abstracted from Tender Drawings and used in the preparation of
his drawings.
D. Installation Drawings
1. The General Contractor shall, before the relevant work proceeds, prepare
and submit for approval by the Employer’s Representative, all Installation
Drawings showing details of his proposals for the execution of the General-
Contract Works. The Installation Drawings shall be based on the Tender and
/ or IFC Drawings, and shall take into account any modifications, either to the
building or to the installation which may have taken place, and incorporate
details of the actual items of plant and equipment to be installed.
2. They shall be in such detail and with all necessary dimensions as to enable
the General- Contract Works to be installed, and shall indicate all piping and

SECTION 15010
fittings necessary for installation, and also particular installation methods to

be applied in certain instances.
3. The General Contractor shall similarly prepare all necessary Schedules of

equipment, and necessary schematic diagrams, including internal diagrams
for items of electrical equipment and diagrams showing the inter-connections
between different items.
4. The General Contractor’s Installation Drawings shall be prepared to a scale

of 1:100 for all services in the building and 1:50 or 1:20 for all plant rooms
and similar spaces, unless otherwise approved by the Employer’s
Representative.
5. The General Contractor shall produce and submit for approval drawings
detailing and dimensioning the following:
a. Site distribution, piping and ducting routes.
b. General layout drawings of all plant and equipment included in the

Contract.
c. Schematic distribution for main and sub-main distribution.
6. The Consultant exercises best effort to ensure there are no conflicts or

inconsistencies in their design. However in cases where such conflicts occur,
these can be captured in Contractor’s shop or installation drawing to avoid
costly abortive works. Hence, the preparation and submission of Contractor’s
shop drawings becomes the more important. Because of this, failure of the
Contractor to submit shop drawings will make him fully accountable to
any abortive works and all associated costs even if design – related or
not.
E. Manufacturer's Shop Drawings
1. The General Contractor shall submit for review shop drawings of any item of
plant or equipment produced by a manufacturer or equipment supplier
indicating principle dimensions, fixings, connections and all other relevant
details. These shall include drawings of all control, and instrumentation
panels, pumps and other equipment as requested by the Employer’s
Representative.
2. The General Contractor shall provide engineering drawings showing the

construction, external and internal layout of panels and wiring diagrams
comprising internal wiring, schematics of interlocking and external wiring
diagrams, for the complete system in the panels. The drawings shall also
show all electrical, pipework and capillary connections from the panels to
external equipment.
F. General Contractor’s Approval of Manufacturer's Shop Drawings
1. All drawings, schedules or other information provided by Manufacturers,

Nominated Suppliers, Nominated Sub- Main Contractors or Specialist Main
Contractors shall be approved by the General Contractor and such approval
shall ensure that all requirements of the General- Contract documentation
have been incorporated.
2. When this procedure has been completed, the General Contractor shall
forward paper prints of the approved drawings, or copies of the approved

SECTION 15010
schedules or their information to the Employer’s Representative in a similar manner

to that described for the Installation drawings.
3. No order to a Manufacturer, Nominated Supplier, Nominated Main Contractor

or Specialist Main Contractor, to commence manufacture/installation shall be
given until written approval has been given by the Employer’s
Representative.
4. Any costs arising from failure to meet the above conditions shall be borne by
the General Contractor at no cost to the General- Contract.
G. Builders Work Information & Drawings
1. The General Contractor shall provide fully detailed Builders Work drawings to
show requirements for architectural or structural provisions necessary to
facilitate the execution of the General- Contract Works, and allow their
integration into the project. These drawings shall show dead and live loads
of all plant, and fully dimensioned details of all plant bases, wall chases, and
penetrations.
2. This information shall be prepared in sufficient time for incorporation in the

Main Building Contractors programme.
3. In cases where preliminary builders' work and structural information has

already been given by the Employer’s Representative, such information shall
be confirmed by the General Contractor (including confirmation of weights of
items of equipment, sizes of access ways, etc.) and incorporated on his
drawings.
4. The General Contractor shall provide templates for, and supervise all
builders' work required, including drilling and plugging of walls, floors and
ceilings for securing of brackets, and other builders work as is considered
normal to the trade.
5. The details required by the Main Building Contractor are to be provided as

directed, which may require advance information to be provided by the
General Contractor before the Works defined in this Specification are to
commence. The General Contractor shall be responsible for checking any
details that may have been given before commencement of the Works to
ascertain that the said advance details are correct.
6. The General Contractor shall be liable for all costs associated with the late
submission or omission of builders work information.
H. Progress Drawings
1. The General Contractor shall arrange for a full set of white prints of
Installation Drawings to be kept on the Site showing the progress of all work
in connection with the General- Contract. Such prints shall be kept up-to-
date before each site progress meeting, and all conduit, cable, pipe and
trunking runs, positions of equipment and apparatus shall be recorded on the
drawings as they are installed.
2. The Progress Drawings shall be available for inspection at any time by the
Employer’s Representative and Main Building Main Contractor.
3. The General Contractor shall include for his representative to keep a diary
recording the progress of the works and details of all instructions received.

SECTION 15010
The diary shall be at the disposal of the Employer’s Representative as and when
required.
I. Record Drawings and Charts
1. The General Contractor shall issue draft copies of Record Drawings, showing
the whole of the services as installed, to the Employers Representative one
month prior to the start of commissioning.
2. Within one month of the Practical Completion of the installations, the General
Contractor shall provide to the satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative
one durable plastic negative and one copy diskette (Autocad) and four
complete final sets of white prints showing the whole of the services installed.
Prior to this formal issue, the General Contractor shall submit two copies of
his proposed finalized Record Drawings to the Employer’s Representative for
approval.
3. Two sets of drawings for symbols shall be submitted, one of the same size as
the tender drawings, the other set shall be of A4 size suitable for eventual
inclusion in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
4. The complete symbol notation used for all Record Drawings shall be
computer generated.
5. The preparation of the Record Drawings shall proceed during the installation
of the Works as each section is completed. The Employer’s Representative
shall be allowed to inspect the drawings on request during their preparation.
6. In addition to the foregoing Record Drawings, the following charts and

drawings shall be laminated in plastic and hung in the plant rooms and
switchgear rooms:
a. Plant room key Drawings: showing all plant item numbers, locations
and duties.
b. Control Schematics
c. Electrical system schematic diagrams
J. Submission of Drawings and Equipment for Review
1. Information for review must be submitted in accordance with the agreed

programme of work and in packages relating to complete buildings or
previously agreed parts of the building.
The packages must include:
a. Installation drawings.
b. Builders work drawings.
c. Associated Manufacturer's shop drawings.
d. Technical information of proposed equipment and materials.
e. Any other relevant information required by the Employer’s

Representative.

SECTION 15010
Each submission must be accompanied by a letter which:
a. Identifies the contents of the submission in detail.
b. Refer to previous submissions of the information and any relevant

correspondence.
c. Refers to the purpose of the submission and any other requirements

of the General Contractor.
K. Employer’s Representative's Approval
1. The General Contractor shall obtain the Employer’s Representatives review

of his information before it is used for ordering, fabrication or installation. The
form of review will be an examination of the drawings and/or samples by the
Employer’s Representative to ensure that the design criteria and engineering
principles described in the Tender documents have been correctly interpreted
and applied by the General Contractor.
2. The review will not entail any checking of working dimensions on the
drawings.
3. The General Contractor must carry out his own checking procedure before
submitting information for review, this checking must cover not only his own
work, but that of Manufacturers and Specialists for whom he is responsible.
4. The review of information by the Employer’s Representative will in no way

relieve the General Contractor of his responsibility for error in his work or of
his other contractual responsibilities and obligations.
5. The General Contractor shall allow a period of 2 weeks in his programme for
the Employers Representative to review and return the General Contractor
submission with comment. The General Contractor shall also indicate in his
programme time allowed for resubmission of drawings not allowed to be used
for installation by the Employer’s Representative.
L. Review Procedure for General Contractor Submission
1. Five (5) copies of all information and drawings shall be submitted to the
Employer’s Representative. One copy will be retained by the Employer’s
Representative and the other copy will be returned to the General Contractor.
The information will be returned and marked either:
Stamp Interpretation
Approved/Unaltered Fabrication, manufacture, or construction
may proceed providing submittal complies
with the Contract Documents.
Approved with corrections Fabrication, manufacture, or construction
/comments as noted prior to may proceed providing submittal complies
general issue with the Contract Documents and the
Engineer’s notation are complied with.
For Re-submission The submittal does not comply with the
Contract Documents; do not proceed with
fabrication, manufacture, or construction
.The work and shop drawings are not
permitted at the job site. Re-submit
appropriate shop drawings.

SECTION 15010
2. Modifications and variations found to be necessary after the initial review has
been given must be re-submitted for further approval in the above manner.
3. Revision marks must be included on all revised drawings, and the revisions
must be fully and clearly described.
4. Six copies of all reviewed drawings and noted as “Approved/Unaltered” shall

be submitted to the Employers Representative for general distribution to the
Main Building Main Contractor and other interested parties.
M. Coordination
1. The Installation Drawings shall illustrate that the General Contractor design
has been coordinated and integrated with that of other General Contractors,
the structure, and building elements, before work commences. In addition to
the Works for which he is responsible, the drawings must show the structure,
adjacent building elements and the zone required by other General
Contractor to install, operate and maintain their equipment.
2. If the General Contractor deviates from the design intent of the Tender
drawings, he shall ensure that this deviation either does not involve a change
in any of the other General Contractor installations or that any change
necessary in the other General Contractor installations does not incur an
additional cost to their General- Contract.
3. The General Contractor shall be fully liable for any cost incurred through his
lack of co-ordination.
1.17 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Before the handover of the installation, the General Contractor shall prepare
complete Operation and Maintenance Manuals which are to be printed in English for
all the installations. When these manuals have been agreed in details, the General
Contractor shall submit to the Employers Representative three copies thereof suitable
bound. The Operating and Maintenance Manuals must be handed over before the
Date of Completion.
B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals should comprise the following:
1. A hard cover giving:

the name of the development
the title of the document
the name and address of the installation Main Contractor
2. Inside page giving similar information to the cover but including contact
telephone numbers for normal and emergency use.
3. Contents page.
4. Description of the installation.
5. Scheduled details of all equipment and plant.
6. Operating instructions including details of any automatic control system.
7. Maintenance and fault finding instructions including composite schedule of

routine maintenance.

SECTION 15010
8. Test reports and commissioning records.
9. Recommended spare parts and lubricants.
10. List of equipment and plant with manufacturer’s name and address and local
agent, if applicable.
11. Manufacturer’s literature suitably indexed to include shop drawings, wiring

diagrams, performance curves, etc.
12. List of as-installed drawings.
13. A complete valve schedule.
C. The manual should be produced on A4 size paper, all sections should be suitably
separated and readily identifiable or pages should be numbered consecutively and
page numbers included in the contents page.
D. The General Contractor shall provide a copy diskette of the complete text of the
operation and maintenance manuals.
1.19 PROPOSED SEPARATION OF WORK BETWEEN THE TRADES
A. The specifications describe in detail the proposed work included for each trade when
the General Contractor divides the work among their Sub-Contractors. The following
summary is an outline of the work to be “Provided”, “Furnished” or “Installed” by each
of the trades included in the contract, i.e., Plumbing & Sprinkler, (Div. 15) ACMV (Div.
15), Electrical & Electronics (Div. 16) and other Divisions 1-14.
B. In the absence of more detailed information, consider the list as specific instructions
to include such work in the named contract.
C. Abbreviations are as follows:
1. “OD” - Other Division of the Contract (not Electrical or Mechanical)
2. “Plb” - Plumbing – Division 15
3. “Spr” - Sprinkler – Division 15
4. “Mech” - Mechanical – Division 15
5. “Elec” - Electrical – Division 16
6. “F” - Furnished
7. “I” - Installed
8. “P” - Provided (Furnished and Installed)

SECTION 15010
ITEM OD Plb. Spr. Mech. Elec. Remarks
Motors for Mechl.,

Plumbing, Fire
Protection Equip’t
_ P P P _
Feeder Cables from Cables to be terminated in

Electrical Panels to the Motor Controls by each
Motor Controls _ _ _ _ P trade.
Motors for Mechl., Specification and drawings

Plumbing, Fire delineate detailed
Protection exceptions.
Equipment _ P P P _
Wiring for Mechl.,

Plumbing, Fire
Protection Equip’t
Motors including the
feeder cables from
motor controller _ P P P _
Wiring for Mech’l Specifications and

Equipment Motor drawings delineate in
Controls and Alarms _ P P P _ detail the work to be
performed by each trade.
Temporary Light As per Contract

and Power _ _ _ _ _ Documents.
Temporary Water _ _ _ _ _ As per Contract

Document
s.
Toilets _ _ _ _ _ As per Contract

Document
s.
Temporary Fire As per Contract

Protection _ _ _ _ _ Documents.
Hoisting P P P P P
Rigging P P P P P
Bracing of Building
for Safe Rigging P _ _ _ _

SECTION 15010
ITEM OD Plb Spr. Mech. Elec. Remarks
Cutting, Chasing & Cost where due to late

Patching P _ _ _ _ installation or improper
coordination of work is the
responsibility of the
delinquent trade.
Framed Slots and Includes drilling of holes

Openings in Walls, when required. Cost
Decks and Slabs P _ _ _ _ where due to late
installation or improper
delinquent trade.
Sleeves P _ _ _ _
Waterproof Sealing
of Sleeves through
Waterproof
Slabs, Decks and

Walls _ P P P P
Fireproof Sealing of
Excess Openings
in Slabs, Decks _ P P P P
and Fire Rated
Walls
Excavation and
Backfill Inside _ P P P P
Buildings
Excavation and Coordination with the

Backfill Outside trades. Cost where due to
Buildings P _ _ _ _ late installation or improper
delinquent trade.

SECTION 15010
Keep Site and

Excavation Free
From Surface
Water During
Construction P _ _ _ _
Fastenings _ P P P P
Supports P P P P P
Concrete
Encasement of
Conduits _ _ _ _ P
Below Grade
Drainage Inside
Building _ P _ _ _
Base Flashing of Cap flashing by Trade.

Electric Conduits
Through Roof
(Pitch Pockets) P _ _ _ _
Electrical
Handholes, and _ _ _ _ P
Covers
Finish Painting
(does not include
I.D. marks or color
coding specified
and provided by
each trade) P P P P P
Finished Walls and Supplying list of location of

Ceiling Access all items requiring access
Doors, Panels and doors included in the
Supporting Frames P _ _ _ _ Division requiring same.

SECTION 15010
Plaster Rings and Plaster rings and frame

Frames I _ _ _ F furnished in electric only for
lighting fittings which are so
equipped.
Rubbish Removal P P P P P Where one trade furnishes

and another installs, the
installing trade removes the
shipping and packing
materials which
accumulate.
Special Tools for
Equipment
Maintenance F F F F F
Electric Power
Consuming Items
and Controls for
Other than
Mechanical
Equipment, e.g.
Motorized Doors P _ _ _ _
Concrete Furnishing exact

Foundations, Pads, dimensions of anchors,
Pits, Curbs, and vibration mounts and
Bases Inside templates included in each
Buildings P _ _ _ _ trade providing the
associated equipment.
Concrete Furnishing exact

Foundations Pads dimensions of anchors,
and Bases Outside vibration mounts and
Buildings P _ _ _ _ templates included in each
trade providing the
associated equipment.
Masonry Pits P _ _ _ _ Furnishings of covers and

associated frames included
in each trade.

SECTION 15010
ITEMS OD Plb Spr Mech. Elec. Remarks
Sump Pits P _ _ _ _ Furnishing of covers and

associated frames included
in each trade.
Concrete Lined
Trenches inside
Building
Foundations P _ _ _ _
Prime Coat
Painting _ P P P P
Fiel Touch-up
Painting of
Damaged Shop
Coats _ P P P P
Rustproofing Field
Cut and Assembled
Iron Supporting
Frames and Racks _ P P P P
Grating and
Exterior Wall
Louvers P _ _ _ _
Duct Connections
to Louvers _ _ _ P _
Equipment Except Mechanical and

Delivered and Set Electrical Equipment by
in Place P _ _ _ _ Divisions 15, & 16.
Vinyl Tape or
Painted Color-
Coding, Banding
Arrows and Similar
Identification for
Mechanical and
Electrical Work P P P P P
Underfloor and Responsibility for

Header Duct _ _ _ _ P coordination is included in
this Section.

SECTION 15010
Lighting Fixtures _ _ _ _ P See Drawings.
Elevators, Power connections to

Escalators and disconnect switch included
Dumbwaiters P _ _ _ _ in Electrical Section.
Catwalks and
Ladders to
Electrical
Equipment P _ _ _ _
Food Service Line connections included

Equipment P _ _ _ _ in each trade.
Services to Food
Service Equipment _ P P P P
Laundry Line connections
Equipment P _ _ _ _ Included in each trade.
Services to
Laundry Equipment
_ P P P P
Roughing to
Equipment
Furnished by
Others _ P P P P
D. Each Division is required to supply all necessary supervision and coordination

information to any other Division supplying work to accommodate that Division.
E. For items which are to be installed but not furnished as part of this Division, the electrical
work includes:
1. Coordination of their delivery.
2. Unloading from delivery trucks driven into any point on the property line at grade
level.
3. Safe handling and field storage up to the time of permanent placement in the
project.
4. Correction of any damage, defacement or corrosion to which they may have

been subjected.
5. Field make-up and internal wiring as indicated for their proper operation.
6. Mounting in place.
7. Connection to building wiring, including the purchase and installation of all

termination junction boxes necessary to adapt and connect them to this wiring.

SECTION 15010
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects, and free of
damage and corrosion.
B. Products and materials shall not contain asbestos, PCB, CFCs, Halons, or any other
material which is installed considered hazardous by the authority having jurisdiction.
C. Replace materials of less than specified quality and relocate work incorrectly installed
as directed by the Engineer or its authorized representative.
D. Provide name/data plates on major components of equipment with manufacturer's

name. Model number, capacity data and electrical characteristics attached in a
conspicuous place.
E. Install materials and equipment with qualified trade’s people.
F. Maintain uniformity of manufacturer for equipment used in similar application and

sizes.
G. Fully lubricate equipment where required.
H. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for installing, connecting, and adjusting equipment.

Provide a copy of such instructions at the equipment during installation.
I. Where factory testing of equipment is required to ascertain performance, and

attendance by the Employer’s representative is required to witness such tests,
associated travel costs and subsistence shall be paid for by the Main Contractor.
J. Equipment capacities, ratings, etc., are scheduled or specified for job site opening
conditions. Equipment sensitive to altitude shall be derated with the method of
derating identified on the submittals.
K. Enclosures for electrical equipment installed in mechanical equipment rooms shall be

NEMA type 1 gasketed. Enclosures for electrical equipment installed outdoors shall
be NEMA type 3R.
L. Energy consuming equipment shall meet local energy ordinances.
M. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be included in


SECTION 15010
3.1 PROGRAMME
A. Within 2 weeks of the letter of intent or award, the General Contractor shall submit a
programme showing the details of delivery and required installation period for each
system.
These details shall also be forwarded to the General Contractor, and the Sub
Contractor shall work with the Main Contractor to produce an overall coordinated
programme for the works.
B. The General Contractor shall make such labor available at all stages of the works to
permit the programme to be achieved and to carry out his work in accordance with
the requirements of the Main Contractor and Main Construction programme.
C. The General Contractor shall include all key dates into his programmes including the
dates required of all Utility submissions and also the dates that permanent power,
permanent water etc. will be made available for the project.
D. The General Contractor shall be responsible for informing the General Contractor of
his detailed requirements in respect of fuel, water, drainage and electrical supplies,
for the testing and commissioning of the plant and equipment.
The General Contractor shall immediately inform the Employer’s Representative of

any delays caused by labor shortages, later delivery of materials and equipment, or
the failure to meet programme by any other Contractor on site, which may affect his
own programme.
E. The programme shall be updated monthly.
3.2 PROGRESS REPORT
A. The General Contractor shall submit two copies of the monthly report to the
Employer’s Representative containing:
1. Percentage of work completed including a BOQ comparison between and

actual and contracted work.
2. Description of executed work.
3. Problems or delay (if any) and how to solve these.
4. Special occurrences, accidents, etc.
5. List of drawings, also indicating revisions.
6. List of memos and instructions ordered by the MEEPF Consultant.
7. List of equipment and workers at the site.
8. Color photographs of the site showing necessary views of the work at not
less than 10 locations.

SECTION 15010
3.3 INSPECTION, TESTING AND CERTIFICATES
A. Periodic inspections of the work in progress will be made to check general conformity
of the work to the Contract Documents. Observed deficiencies will be reported.
Correct deficiencies immediately.
B. Meet the requirements of all laws, bylaws, codes, regulations and authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Where the Contract Documents, instructions or the governing authorities require

Division 15 work to be tested, inspected or approved, give sufficient notice of its
readiness for inspection and schedule the date and time for such inspection.
D. Uncover Division 15 work that is covered up without consent, upon MEEPF

Consultant request, for examination and restore at no extra cost to the Employer.
E. Furnish certificates and evidence that Division 15 work meets the requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Correct deficiencies immediately upon notification.
G. Cleaning and Flushing
1. The General Contractor shall clean the entire installation including all sanitary
fittings and pipework, etc. after installation and keep them in a new condition.
2. All pipes, etc. shall be flushed through with water, rodded when necessary to
ensure clearance of debris.
3. Cleaning and flushing shall be carried out in sections as the installation

becomes completed.
H. Hydraulic Testing of Pipework
1. The General Contractor shall carry out hydraulic test on the complete
plumbing systems and the drainage system to show that it is functioning
satisfactorily within the requirements of this Specification and local
regulations.
2. The General Contractor shall provide suitable test pumps and arrange for a
supply of water required in connection with testing of pipework. The test
pump shall be fitted with pressure gauges which shall be of suitable range for
the pressure being applied.
3. Hydraulic tests shall be carried out as the pipework is installed and shall be
completed before chases in walls and ducts are closed. Also test shall be
carried out prior to false ceilings and other finishes are installed.
4. All cold water and fire fighting pipework shall be hydraulically tested for a
period of not less than 6 hours to a pressure of not less than one and half
times the working pressure, but in any case the testing pressure shall not be
less than 150 PSI for cold water and 250 PSI for fire fighting. The General
Contractor must record all test figures together with schedules of pipe lengths
and should note that testing shall be witnessed by the Employers
Representative. No pressure drop shall be allowed during the tests.
5. Testing apparatus shall be provided by the General Contractor. Where any

section of pipework or equipment is unable to withstand the maximum

SECTION 15010
pipework test pressure, it shall be isolated during the pipework test then that
section of pipework or equipment shall be re-tested at the appropriate test
pressure.
6. The Sanitary General Contractor must carry out any additional tests required
by the local authorities.
7. Drainage pipe shall be test by filling the water higher than testing point 3 m.
waiting 15 min, then checking leakage at every joints.
8. Testing of drainage systems shall be carried out in sections by dividing the

system horizontally. Each section shall comprise pipework and fitting for
three floors/storeys required for testing.
9. Drainage pressure pipe shall be hydraulic test at minimum pressure 50 PSI.
10. On completion of the section of drainage pipework to be tested blank off all
open ends of pipes and ensure that all access covers are securely tightened
so that they are airtight.
a. At the base of each stack, a drain bag or drain plug is inserted and a
small quantity of water allowed to settle above it so as to form a seal
that can easily be inspected if it leaks.
b. A drain plug should be inserted at the top of the stack and in the case
of rainwater pipes at every intermittent outlet with a small quantity of
water above it.
c. Remove the blank cap from one of the drain plugs (at the top of the
stack if possible) and connect the tube from a manometer gauge to it
or by passing the tube through one of the trap seals.
d. Blow air through the tube and reconnect at the manometer gauge to
obtain a reading of 38mm w.g. the level should remain for a period of
not less than five minutes without falling and without further air being
added.
I. Operation Tests
1. The General Contractor shall ensure to the approval of the Employers

Representative that the installation or portion thereof has been set to work
and complies with all requirements including the following:
a. That the plant and apparatus is of robust construction and of capacity

for the duty specified.
b. That all valves, switches, controls, etc, are properly regulated and
capable of proper operation and in the case of valves that are capable
of tight shut-off.
c. That all apparatus is silent.
d. That all instruments are correctly calibrated and read accurately.
e. That all services are tested in accordance with the details of the relevant
clauses of this Specification.
f. That the alignments for all pumps are proper.

SECTION 15010
2. Should the results of these tests show that the pumps, etc. or any other items
of equipment fail to perform to the efficiencies or other performance figures
as given in this Specification, and as accepted in the General Contractor
tender, then the General Contractor shall adjust, modify and if necessary
replace the equipment without additional cost to the General- Contract in
order that the required performance is obtained. Should it be necessary for
the General Contractor to attend to items of plant as described he will be
responsible for cost for any damage or deterioration to the building or any
other services consequent on such attendance.
3. The General Contractor shall perform all tests and demonstrations as called
for by the local authorities.
4. Testing procedures shall be submitted two months after the approval of major
equipment to the Employers Representative for approval.
J. Supply of Testing Equipment
1. The General Contractor shall provide all tools, pressure pumps, instruments
and recorders required to carry out the tests given in this Section.
2. All water and electricity required for testing purposes will be supplied by the
General Contractor.
K. Pretreatment
1. Prior to start-up and after satisfactory hydraulic testing, all piping systems
shall be flushed and drained at least once through to rid off contaminating
materials.
2. All strainers shall be inspected and cleaned out or replaced.
L. Disinfection
1. For Pipe Installation
a. The pipe system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until dirty
water does not appear at the points of outlet.
b. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine

solution containing or least 50 parts per million (50 mg/L) of chlorine,
and the system or part thereof shall be valved off and allowed to
stand for 24 hours; or the system or part thereof shall be filled with a
water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million (200
mg/L) of chlorine and allowed to stand for 3 hours.
c. Following the required standing time, the system shall be flushed

with clean potable water until the chlorine is purged from the system.
d. The procedure shall be repeated where shown by a bacteriological

examination that contamination remains present in the system.
2. For Water Tank:
The entire interior of the tank shall be swabbed or sprayed with solution
containing 200 ppm of available chlorine and the solution allowed to stand for
3 hours before flushing and returning to service.

SECTION 15010
3.4 RESULTS OF TESTS
A. If the test results show that the plant and equipment is not functioning in a
satisfactory manner nor providing the requirements of this Specification, the
Employer’s Representative shall decide whether this is due to incorrectness of faulty
work by the General Contractor and if this be the case, the General Contractor shall,
when called upon, carry out at his own expense such alterations, replacements and
adjustments as may be required to the Employer’s Representative’s complete
satisfaction. The Employer’s Representative decision as to what constitutes a
satisfactory test shall be final.
3.5 TEMPORARY SERVICES
A. Provide temporary mechanical services in accordance with the requirements of

Section 01500.
B. Make connections to temporary power source provided and provide extensions for
use by Division 15.
C. Install and maintain temporary fire protection services as required by the authorities
having jurisdiction.
D. When the permanent water service is installed, it shall be used to supply water for
the use of Other Main Contractors.
E. Perform operations necessary for checking, testing and balancing after written
approval is given to start up systems. Ensure that care is taken to protect equipment
from damage and to prevent distribution of dust through duct systems.
F. Do not use permanent plumbing, heating or air conditioning systems for temporary
services during construction, except with written permission from MEEPF Consultant.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Give notification in time to Other Main Contractors of openings required for Division
15 Work. Supply accurate details of location and size. When this requirement is not
met, bear the cost of cutting and patching.
B. In existing work, cutting, patching and restoration of finished work to original condition
will be carried out by Other Main Contractors at the expense of Division 15.
C. Obtain written MEEPF Consultant approval before cutting openings through structure.
D. Where new work connects with existing and where existing work is altered, cut, patch
and restore to match existing work.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect all Division 15 work from damage. Keep all equipment dry and clean at all
times.
B. Cover openings in equipment, pipes with caps or heavy gauge plastic sheeting until
final connections are made.
C. Repair any damage caused by improper storage, handling or installation of

equipment and materials.

SECTION 15010
D. Protect equipment, pipes and temporary services installed by Division 15 from

weather damage.
3.8 PAINTING, LABELLING AND FINISHING
A. Materials
1. All parts of the work installed under this Specification shall be painted with
approved high quality enamel paints, except those items specified as being
painted by others or otherwise exempted from painting in this section of the
Specification.
2. Paint shall be selected to withstand the temperature on the surface which it is

applied, and shall be suitable in all respects for the environmental conditions
in which it shall be located.
3. All paint used shall be of one approved manufacture, and finishes shall be full
gloss unless otherwise specified.
4. Before ordering any primer, undercoat and finishing paint, the General
Contractor shall submit the color scheme to the Employers Representative
for approval.
5. Before ordering any painting materials, the General Contractor shall submit
the type and manufacturer of all materials for approval.
6. The General Contractor shall select all finishing and painting materials from
types suitable for the surfaces to which they are applied and for the
environmental conditions in each area.
7. The fire services equipment shall be painted in red color with two coatings of
red lead primer.
B. Plant, Machinery & Equipment
1. All items of plant, machinery and equipment supplied painted ex-factory shall
be given one finishing coat of full gloss enamel, except where the
manufacturer's standard finish is approved.
C. Exposed Metalwork
1. All exposed metalwork shall be wire-brushed and cleaned from rust, scale,
dirt and grease, and shall then be given one priming coat, one undercoat and
one approved color finishing coat of full gloss enamel.
2. The priming coat for exposed galvanized iron shall be an approved

galvanized iron primer.
3. The priming coat for exposed non-ferrous metalwork shall be approved as

suitable for the metal to which it will be applied.
D. Concealed Metalwork
1. All galvanized iron surface concealed in roof spaces, false ceilings, building
ducts etc. shall not be painted. All black iron and steel surfaces shall be wire
bushed and given one coat of zinc chromate or red lead.

SECTION 15010
E. Pipework & Metal Sheathing
1. Pipework and metal sheathing shall be painted as for exposed or concealed

metalwork as applicable.
2. Turned parts of valves, controls etc., shall be cleaned and polished to

approval.
F. Pipework Identification
1. All pipes etc. shall be identified in accordance with British Standards

1710:1984 or other comparable and acceptable code.
2. Circumferential bands of standard colors shall be not less than 100mm wide
on pipes up to 50mm nominal diameter, and not less than 150mm wide on
pipes greater than 50mm nominal diameter.
3. Supplementary colors shall be displayed as bands not less than 25mm wide
in the center of the ground color bands.
4. Where lettering is required it shall be painted in contrasting colors in

accordance with the standard, in block letters not less than 15mm high for
pipes up to 50mm nominal diameter, and in block letter not less than 40mm
high for larger pipes.
5. Identification bands shall be located where they are clearly visible in each
room or compartment through which the pipe runs, and shall be placed at
centers not exceeding 6m.
6. Direction of flow shall be indicated by an arrow painted on the pipe adjacent

to each color band. Arrows shall be 75mm long on pipes up to 50mm
nominal diameter, and 150mm long on larger pipes.
G. Colour Schemes
1. The whole of the piping installation shall be painted in accordance with the
existing piping colors schemes wherever applicable and color coded as
follows:
Condensate water pipe - Orange

Chilled water pipe - White
Potable water pipe - Blue
Non-Potable water pipe - Green
Waste pipe - Brown
Soil pipe - Black
Vent pipe - Gray
Fire pipe - Red
Equipment shall be paint and color coded to BS 381C:1980 or the PSME Code as
follows:

SECTION 15010
Equipment Color No.
Switchboard and Control Electric Orange-White Interior

Panel
Electric Motors Primrose 310
Electric Conduits Light Orange 557
Pumps and tanks As for respective piping service -
All other equipment As directed -
H. Labelling
1. All plant and equipment provided under this Specification is to be labeled in

English as to duty or services, all such Labelling to correspond to schedules,
diagrams, etc. to be provided as part of the Record Drawings. Labels are of
white Traffolyte with black engraved lettering not less than 20mm high or as
otherwise required and approved.
2. Manufacturers' name plate shall generally be provided for all plant and
equipment and shall show serial and model numbers and date of
manufacture.
3. All valves, motor starters, fans, distribution boards, gauges, contactors, cable
terminals in switchboards, circuit breakers shall have labels.
4. Labels should be attached to valves (or pipe adjacent thereto) with a light
gauge metal band or alternatively to be screwed to the insulated valve box
where provided. These labels shall state the valve number.
5. Distribution boards, starters etc. shall be labeled to indicate the circuit

number, phase and item controlled.
6. Labels shall be screwed or riveted to sheet metal. Adhesive fixing is not

acceptable.
7. Details of exact lettering shall be agreed with the Employers Representative

prior to manufacture.
8. A complete valve schedule shall be incorporated in the as-built drawings and

this schedule shall clearly indicate the valve numbers, duty, function, size,
flow rate and any other relevant information necessary to allow the
Employer's plant operators to safely operate each valve and to subsequently
maintain or replace the valve as required.
9. The valve schedule shall clearly relate to the various system schematics to
enable the entire operating sequence and circuitry to be followed.
I. Application of Painting
1. All paints shall be prepared and applied in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations.
2. All galvanized metal surfaces shall be properly etch-primed to ensure correct

adhesion of the paint to the surface. Materials for etch-priming shall be as

SECTION 15010
recommended by the paint manufacturers. Subsequent painting of

galvanized surfaces shall comply with this Specification.
3. Prior to painting, all metallic surfaces except galvanized surfaces shall be

thoroughly scraped and wire brushed as necessary to remove scale, rust and
swarf. Surfaces shall then be solvent cleaned to remove all oil, grease and
dirt.
4. When the surfaces to be painted are clean and dry, one coat of an approved
primer shall be evenly applied over the entire area. After surfaces have been
primed, the Sanitary General Contractor shall notify the engineers so that an
inspection of the primed surfaces can be made prior to the application of the
undercoat and the finishing coats.
5. When the priming coat has been approved, one coat of an approved paint flat
undercoat shall be applied. Before applying the finishing coats, the General
Contractor shall ensure that the undercoated surface is rubbed flat and
smooth. Finally, two coats of an approved high gloss finishing paint shall be
applied when all dust has been removed.
6. Each successive coating shall be completely dry prior to the application of

the next coat. The minimum thickness of each layer to be 50u.
3.9 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USE
A. Obtain written permission from MEEPF Consultant to use and test permanent
equipment and systems prior to Substantial Performance acceptance by MEEPF
Consultant.
B. MEEPF Consultant may use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to
acceptance. Provide labor, fuel, material and instruments required for testing. Rectify
incomplete work immediately to the satisfaction of MEEPF Consultant.
C. Protect equipment and system openings from dirt, dust and other foreign materials
during temporary usage.
D. Clean and renew equipment and systems used prior to acceptance.
E. Warranty, including duration and commencement date, shall not to be affected by

start-up date of equipment.
3.10 COMPLETION
A. Remove all debris from inside Division 15 systems and equipment.
B. Rectify deficiencies and complete work before submitting request for Substantial
Performance inspection.
C. Follow manufacturer's written instructions regarding bearing lubrication. Remove

grease from pillowblock type bearings and install new grease before equipment is put
into operation.
D. Check and align all drives to manufacturer's acceptable tolerances.
E. Check and align all pumps to manufacturer's acceptable tolerances.
F. Remove all temporary protection and covers.

SECTION 15010
G. Remove oil and grease from equipment and bases.
H. Clean all fixtures and equipment. Polish all plated surfaces.
I. Change air and water filters.
J. Remove, clean and reinstall pipeline strainer screens.
K. Leave Division 15 work in as new working order.
3.11 INSTRUCTIONS TO EMPLOYER
A. Submit to Employer, check lists for each system or piece of equipment, indicating that
all components have been checked and are complete prior to instruction period.
B. Thoroughly instruct the Employer in the safe and efficient operation of the systems
and equipment.
C. Arrange and pay for the services of qualified manufacturer's representatives to

instruct Employer on specialized portions of the installation, such as refrigeration
machines, boilers, automatic and water treatment.
D. Submit a complete record of instructions given to the Employer. For each instruction
period, supply the following data:
1. Date
2. Duration
3. System or equipment involved
4. Names of persons giving instructions
5. Names of persons being instructed
6. Other persons present
E. Submit receipted verification of completed training to MEEPF Consultant prior to final

release of retentions.
F. Carry out instructional period during a period of 5 days scheduled at Employer's

convenience.
G. Video tape all instructional sessions and turn over copy of tape to Employer upon
completion of training period.
3.12 PROTECTION OF EMPLOYER’S PREMISES
A. Adhere strictly to the Employer's requirements.
B. Confer with the Employer concerning schedule, dust and noise control prior to
commencing work in or adjacent to existing facilities where such work might affect
either those facilities or their occupants.
C. Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to occupants, public and
normal use of premises.
D. Provide temporary means to maintain security when security has been reduced by
Division 15.

SECTION 15010
E. Only elevators, dumbwaiters, conveyors or escalators assigned for Main Contractor's

use may be used for moving men and material within building. Protect walls of
passenger elevators, to approval of Employer prior to use. Accept liability for
damage, safety of equipment and overloading of existing equipment.
F. Provide temporary dust screens, barriers, warning signs in locations where

renovations and alteration work is adjacent to areas which will be operative during
work.
G. Drawings indicate approximate locations of known existing underground and above

ground facilities. Avoid damage to existing services. Bear cost of repairs and
replacements.
H. Immediately advise MEEPF Consultant when unknown services are encountered and
await instructions.
I. Accept liability for costs incurred by the Employer in repairing and cleaning
equipment, etc., resulting from failure to comply with the above requirements.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
SECTION 15050
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 WORK INCLUDED ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 RELATED WORK ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL SERVICES ................................................................................. 1
1.4 PIPE AND DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................................... 1
1.5 VALVE TAGS ............................................................................................................................... 2
1.6 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES ........................................................................................................... 2
1.7 CONTROLS IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................................................... 2
1.8 FLOW DIAGRAMS ........................................................................................................................ 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 3
2.1 INSERTS ..................................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS...................................................................... 3
2.3 PIPING ISOLATION ..................................................................................................................... 11
2.4 EQUIPMENT RIGGING SUPPORTS ............................................................................................... 11
2.5 SLEEVES, WALL AND FLOOR PLATES ......................................................................................... 11
2.6 PROVISION FOR PIPE EXPANSION, CONTRACTION AND BUILDING SHRINKAGE............................... 12
2.7 DRAINS .................................................................................................................................... 13
2.8 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS .................................................................................................... 13
2.9 FLASHING ................................................................................................................................ 13
2.10 CURBS ..................................................................................................................................... 13
2.11 CONCRETE ............................................................................................................................... 14
2.12 COVERS (BY OTHER DIVISIONS).................................................................................................. 14
2.13 STEEL ...................................................................................................................................... 14
2.14 BELT DRIVES ............................................................................................................................ 14
2.15 DRIVE GUARDS ......................................................................................................................... 16
2. 16 FIRESTOPPING .......................................................................................................................... 16
2.17 TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ........................................................................................................... 16
PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 16
3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL ....................................................................................................... 16
3.2 PIPE, DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION ............................................................................... 17
3.3 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT................................................................................................... 18
3.4 INSERTS ................................................................................................................................... 18
3.5 HANGERS ................................................................................................................................. 19
3.6 SLEEVES, WALL PLATES, FLOOR PLATES ................................................................................... 21
3.7 PROVISION FOR PIPE EXPANSION, CONTRACTION AND BUILDING SHRINKAGE............................... 22
3.8 PIPE GUIDES AND ANCHORS...................................................................................................... 22
3.9 PAINTING.................................................................................................................................. 23
3.10 MOTOR AND DRIVE ALIGNMENT ................................................................................................. 23
3.11 LUBRICATION ............................................................................................................................ 23
3.12 START-UP AND TEMPORARY OPERATION .................................................................................... 23
3.13 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS ..................................................................................... 23

Development\Mechanical\15050-Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.DOC
SECTION 15050
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein.
B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply and install
the basic mechanical materials indicated on the Drawings and specified in Division 15
of these Specifications.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 – Mechanical General Provisions.
B. Section 07841 – Through Penetration Firestopping Systems.
C. Section 15071 – Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls.
D. Section 15080 – Mechanical Insulation.
E. Section 15900 – HVAC Instrumentation and Controls.
1.3 IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL SERVICES
A. Identify all mechanical services after finish painting is complete.
B. Use terminology consistent - with the Drawings and Specifications
C. Identify lay-in type acoustic ceilings used for access to equipment and components by
a method acceptable to Consultant.
D. Mark valve and equipment identification on Record Drawings.
E. Provide typewritten master lists for each Equipment Room. Frame under glass.
Insert copies in Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manuals.
1.4 PIPE AND DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide SMS Wrap-Mark on all pipe coverings, using Wrap-Mark pipe markers with
flow arrow and alternating wording. For outside diameters up to 150 mm, allow
marker to completely wrap pipe. For larger outside diameters, secure markers with
stainless steel springs. Secure markers on vertical piping and elsewhere where
markers could be inadvertently moved.
B. Use stencils and stencil paint on ductwork or ductwork insulation. Apply solid black
capitalized lettering 50 mm high and solid black flow arrows 150 mm long x 50 mm
wide.
C. Locate identification and flow arrows so they can be seen clearly from floor and
service platforms:
1. at least once in each room
2. at each piece of equipment

SECTION 15050
3. at each branch close to connection point to main piping and ductwork
4. at not greater than intervals of 15 metres on straight runs of exposed piping

and ductwork
5. at entry and leaving point to pipe and duct chases, or other concealed spaces
6. both sides where piping and ductwork passes through walls, partitions and
floors
7. on vertical pipes and ducts approximately 1800 mm above floor
8. behind each access door and panel
9. at valves, identify piping upstream of valves and identify branch, equipment,

building part or building serviced downstream of valve
D. Colour code pipes meeting code International Standards and Owner’s requirements.
At minimum, colour code pipes with 50 mm wide bands in accordance with the detail
shown on the drawings. The Contractor is to submit the proposed colour coding of
pipes for approval.
1.5 VALVE TAGS
A. Provide 40 mm dia., 1 mm thick brass tags with 10mm high die-stamped black letters.
B. Attach to valves with 100 mm long brass chains.
C. Tag all valves except for small valves isolating a single piece of equipment such as a
air handling units, fan coil unit, primary air units and VRV/split ac units.
1.6 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES
A. Identify equipment, starters, and, remote control devices in a manner consistent with
the Drawings.
B. Use solid black capitalized lettering 100 mm high.
C. Where equipment size does not permit stencil identification, use lamacoid labels,
engraved white on black, mechanically fastened to the equipment. Minimum lettering
size 10 mm.
1.7 CONTROLS IDENTIFICATION
A. Meet Section 15900 requirements.
1.8 FLOW DIAGRAMS
A. Prepare neat diagrams 1200 mm x 900 mm of piping systems to identify equipment

and valves.
B. Insert legible page size copies into each Operating and Maintenance Manual.
C. Install diagrams, framed under glass, on Equipment Room walls where directed by
Owner.

SECTION 15050
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSERTS
A. Submit proposed materials and methods for cast-in-place inserts.
B. Where inserts must be placed after concrete is poured, use Phillips Red Head Multiset
II Anchor system or equivalent Hilti System.
2.2 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS
A. Vibration Isolators: Refer to Section 15071.
B. In lieu of the paragraph which follow, suspended equipment support and restraints
may be designed and installed in accordance with the National Uniform Seismic
Installation Guidelines (NUSIG), most current edition. Submittals based on either the
NUSIG guidelines or the following paragraphs of this Section shall be stamped and
signed by a professional. Support of suspended equipment over 227kg (500 pounds)
shall be submitted for approval of the Consultant in all cases. See paragraph 2.2.M for
lateral force design requirements.
C. Supports for Roof Mounted Items:
1. Equipment: Equipment rails shall be hot dipped galvanized steel, minimum

1.3 mm (18 gauge), with integral baseplate, continuous welded corner seams,
factory installed 50 mm by 100 mm (2 by 4) treated wood nailer, 1.3 mm (18
gauge) galvanized steel counter flashing cap with screws, built-in cant strip,
(except for gypsum or tectum deck), minimum height 280 mm (11 inches). For
surface insulated roof deck, provide raised cant strip to start at the upper
surface of the insulation.
2. Pipe/duct pedestals: Provide a hot dipped galvanized unistrut channel welded

to U-shaped mounting brackets which are secured to side of rail with
galvanized lag bolts.
D. Type Numbers Specified: MSS SP-58. For selection and application refer to MSS
SP-69. Refer to Section 19 Part 4, for miscellaneous metal support materials and
prime coat painting.
E. For Attachment to Concrete Construction:
1. Concrete insert: Type 18, MSS SP-58.
2. Self-drilling expansion shields and machine bolt expansion anchors: Fed.

Spec. FF-S-325, permitted in concrete not less than 102 mm (four inches)
thick. Applied load shall not exceed one-fourth the proof test load listed in
Fed. Spec. FF-S-325.
3. Power-driven fasteners: Permitted in existing concrete or masonry not less

than 102 mm (four inches) thick when approved by the Consultant for each
job condition. Applied load shall not exceed one-fourth the proof test load
listed in Fed. Spec. FF-S-325.
F. For Attachment to Steel Construction: MSS SP-58.
1. Welded attachment: Type 22.
2. Beam clamps: Types 20, 21, 28 or 29. Type 23 C-clamp may be used for
individual copper tubing up to 23mm (7/8-inch) outside diameter.

SECTION 15050
G. Attachment to Metal Pan or Deck: As required for materials specified in Section 19

Part 2 and Section 19 Part 3.
H. For Attachment to Wood Construction: Wood screws or lag bolts.
I. Hanger Rods: Hot-rolled steel, ASTM A36 or A575 for allowable load listed in MSS
SP-58. For piping, provide adjustment means for controlling level or slope. Types 13
or 15 turn-buckles shall provide 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) minimum of adjustment and
incorporate locknuts. All-thread rods are acceptable.
J. Multiple (Trapeze) Hangers: Galvanized, cold formed, lipped steel channel horizontal
member, not less than 41mm by 41mm (1-5/8 inches by 1-5/8 inches), 2.7 mm (No.
12 gage), designed to accept special spring held, hardened steel nuts. Not permitted
for steam supply and condensate piping.
1. Allowable hanger load: Manufacturers rating less 91kg (200 pounds).
2. Guide individual pipes on the horizontal member of every other trapeze

hanger with 6 mm (1/4-inch) U-bolt fabricated from steel rod. Provide Type 40
insulation shield, secured by two 13mm (1/2-inch) galvanized steel bands, or
pre-insulated calcium silicate shield for insulated piping at each hanger.
K. Pipe Hangers and Supports: (MSS SP-58), use hangers sized to encircle insulation on
insulated piping. Refer to Section 15080, for insulation thickness. To protect
insulation, provide Type 39 saddles for roller type supports or pre-insulated
elastomeric rubber shields similar to “Armafix-T” insulated pipe support or approved
equal. Provide Type 40 insulation shield or pre-insulated elastomeric rubber shield at
all other types of supports and hangers including those for pre-insulated piping.
1. General Types (MSS SP-58):
a. Standard clevis hanger: Type 1; provide locknut.
b. Riser clamps: Type 8.
c. Wall brackets: Types 31, 32 or 33.
d. Roller supports: Type 41, 43, 44 and 46.
e. Saddle support: Type 36, 37 or 38.
f. Turnbuckle: Types 13 or 15. Pre-insulate
g. U-bolt clamp: Type 24.
h. Copper Tube:
1) Hangers, clamps and other support material in contact with

tubing shall be painted with copper colored epoxy paint,
plastic coated or taped with non-adhesive isolation tape to
prevent electrolysis.
2) For vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser

clamps.
3) For supporting tube to strut: Provide epoxy painted pipe

straps for copper tube or plastic inserted vibration isolation
clamps.
4) Insulated Lines: Provide pre-insulated calcium silicate shields

sized for copper tube.

SECTION 15050
i. Supports for plastic or glass piping: As recommended by the pipe

manufacturer with black rubber tape extending (25 mm) one inch
beyond steel support or clamp.
2. HVAC Piping (Other Than General Types):
a. Medium and high pressure steam: (Not Applicable)
Spring Supports (Expansion and contraction of vertical piping):
1) Movement up to 20 mm (3/4-inch): Type 51 or 52 variable

spring unit with integral turn buckle and load indicator.
2) Movement more than 20 mm (3/4-inch): Type 54 or 55

constant support unit with integral adjusting nut, turn buckle
and travel position indicator.
3. Convertor and Expansion Tank Hangers (Where required): May be Type 1

sized for the shell diameter. Insulation where required will cover the hangers.
4. Plumbing Piping (Other Than General Types):
a. Horizontal piping: Type 1, 5, 7, 9, and 10.
b. Chrome plated piping: Chrome plated supports.
c. Hangers and supports in pipe chase: Prefabricated system ABS

self-extinguishing material, not subject to electrolytic action, to hold
piping, prevent vibration and compensate for all static and operational
conditions.
d. Blocking, stays and bracing: Angle iron or preformed metal channel

shapes, 1.3 mm (18 gage) minimum.
L. Alternative Pipe and Equipment Hanger and Supports
1. General
a. This specification sets out the general standards, materials methods

and processes to be adopted for the supply and installation of
building services using wire suspensions as a means of support.
b. Reference has been made to “Wire Rope Suspension Systems – A

Code of Practice for Installers” published by BSRIA, DW/144
published by B&ES (HVCA) and to the Best Practice Guide published
by Gripple Ltd.
c. The following describes the preferred method for installation of

Mechanical, Electrical and HVAC services to reduce the environment
impact of the installation, improve Health & Safety on site and to
reduce costs.
d. Wire hangers shall be used where possible to suspend all static

mechanical, electrical and HVAC services.

SECTION 15050
2. Definitions
a. Hanger – Wire rope suspension.
b. Wire rope – formed from strands of wire twisted together.
c. End fixing – Manufacturer applied ferruled termination to enable

connection of the hanger to the soffit, or other structural member.
d. Housing – Main component or body of the locking device.
e. Locking device – single channel or twin channel assembly which acts

as a non-return mechanism for wire rope.
f. Securing components – Critical parts of the locking device which form

the non-return mechanism.
g. Catenary system – A system of horizontal or slightly inclined wires

from which services are suspended via vertical attachment wires.
3. Minimum Requirements for Materials and Suspension System Manufacturer
a. In order to ensure that products are produced to the highest

standards the manufacturer must hold the following – BS EN ISO
9001:2008 Quality Management Standard and BS EN ISO 14001
Environmental Standard.
b. All parts (including the wire) shall be supplied, warranted and proof
tested by the same manufacturer.
3.1 Standard Covering Component Parts of the Suspension System
a. Wire rope shall be manufactured to BS EN 12385: 2002 and the

galvanized coating on the wire rope should be in accordance with BS
EN 10244: 2001.
b. Ferruled terminations shall be in accordance with BS EN 13411-

3:2004.
c. Where stainless steel wire rope is called for then the wire rope shall
be manufactured in accordance with BS MA 29:1982 and will be
grade AISI 316.
d. Zinc alloy housings must comply with BS EN 12844:1998.
e. Securing components must comply with (ISO 5755:2001, ISO

2738:1999, ISO 3923-1, ISO 4490).
f. End fixings
1. Mild steel parts – forming BS EN 10263:2001

2. Mild steel parts – finish BS EN 12329:2000
3. Stainless Steel parts – AISI 316
g. Ceramic components shall be manufactured from Sintox FA or

equivalent 95% A12,O3 content material.

SECTION 15050
3.2 Design
a. The wire rope system shall have a ferruled loop, stud, hook of other
manufacturer applied and fitting at one end and be fuse cut at the
other end to prevent wire fraying and potential injury.
b. All hangers must be supplied in kit form to prevent the possibility of

cross-contamination of wire and locking devices. The use of spooled
wire and separate locks if not permitted.
c. All wire hangers and locking devices must carry a certified minimum
5:1 safety factor or approval and shall each be proof tested by the
manufacturer to two times its published safe working load.
d. To eliminate the risk of accidental release, the locking device must be

tamperproof, i.e. be operated by means of a release key that is
separate to the locking mechanism, by a release key that can be
removed once the installation is complete or by a releasing device
that can be locked in position.
e. Locking devices with release pins that cannot be removed or locked

in position are not acceptable.
f. All locking mechanisms with two channels shall incorporate a locking

mechanism in each channel. Locking mechanisms with one “free
channel” and one locking channel are not permitted.
3.3 Testing
a. All hangers must have been independently proof tested and passed
by Lloyds Register, comply with the requirements of DW/144 and
where markets demand, approved by APAVE, TUV, UL, CSA and
SMACNA.
b. Each hanger must undergo a non-destructive test to twice their rated

safe working load in order to ensure their suitability for use.
4. Minimum Requirements for Installation
a. The correct specification of wire hanger required is determined using

the following formula:
Mass per metre of Distance between Mass per hanger

suspended service x suspension points = suspension point
(kg/m) (m) (kg)
b. The distance between suspension brackets shall be determined by

the regulations governing the type of service being suspended e.g.
DW/144 or by the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.
c. The Contractor shall select the correct specification of wire hanger to

use for supporting each service from Table 1 below.

SECTION 15050
Table 1
Wire Hanger Safe Working Loads (as supplied by Gripple Ltd.)
Size Working Load Limit
No. 1 10 kg
No. 2 45 kg
No. 3 90 kg
No. 4 225 kg
No. 5 325 kg
d. Where the installed wire rope is not vertical then the working load limit
shall be reduced in accordance with the following guidelines.
Size Maximum Load (kg) at Angle from Vertical
0o 15o 30o 45o 60o
No. 1 10 9.6 8.6 7 5
No. 2 45 43 39 32 22
No. 3 90 87 78 64 45
No. 4 225 217 195 159 113
No. 5 325 314 281 230 136
Load % 100 96 86 70 50
e. Using locking devices to join two lengths of wire together (in-line joint)
is not permitted.
f. In order to improve the aesthetic look of the finished installation and

to reduce the risk of eye injury, all tail wires must be terminated with a
purpose made splice or end cap. The tapping of tail wires is not
permitted.
g. The wire rope must not be damaged, twisted or deformed in any way
prior to, or during, installation. Any such ropes must be discarded and
replaced.
h. Lubricants, paint or any other coating should not be applied to the

wire hanger and/or locking device prior to installation as it may impair
performance.

SECTION 15050
5. Fixing to the Building Structure
a. Anchors must have an adequate load rating for the service to be

suspended.
b. Wires may be wrapped around purlins or other structural members

which provide sufficient holding strength.
c. Suitable concrete anchors and composite metal decking fixings may

also be used.
d. Services should not be suspended from other services, without the

express authorisation of the responsible Engineer.
6. Use of Catenary Systems
a. Where it is particularly possible and subject to the necessary approval

of the structural engineer, the use of steel channel to span purlins
should be avoided and wire catenary systems should be used as an
alternative in order to minimise embodied carbon, reduce Health &
Safety risks and improve the aesthetics of the installation.
b. When attracting suspension wires to catenary wires, purpose made

quarter turn, cam operated fixings should be used. Bolt or screw
actuated attachments are not permitted as these can affect the
integrity of the catenary wire and/or the safety of the system.
c. Catenary wires must be secured to elements of the building structure

which possess sufficient strength to withstand potentially high cable
tensions. These tensions are usually significantly higher than the
vertical loads imposed. Calculations of catenary cable tensions
should be submitted by the catenary manufacturer to the installer who
should gain approval from a structural engineer prior to installation.
7. Special Circumstances
a. Certain situations demand higher levels of material performance.
7.1 Swimming Pool Environments
a. Special consideration should be given to wire suspensions in

swimming pool and other corrosive environments.
b. 316 Stainless steel wire is only suitable for use in swimming pool
environments where the concentrations of hazardous chemicals and
humidity are such that accelerated corrosion cannot occur. Often the
distinction is made between ‘wet’ and ‘dry’ areas of the pool facility
and it is for the latter that the 316 family of stainless steels may be
considered. For example, adequately ventilated plant rooms,
gymnasiums, canteen areas, offices and changing areas alongside
but environmentally separated from the pool hall.
c. 316 Grade stainless steel rope is not suitable for use in highly
stressed situations where high concentrations of corrosive chemicals
could promote stress corrosion cracking, such as directly above the
pool water.

SECTION 15050
d. In all cases, regardless of suspension type or location, regular

inspections should be part of the building maintenance schedule to
guard against the onset of corrosion.
e. If in doubt over the suitability of any product to meet the requirements

of a given situation it is recommend that the installer seeks advice
from a suitability qualified corrosion consultant.
All installations shall be completed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
M. Pre-insulated Elastomeric Rubber Shields (Insulated Piping Pipe Support):
1. Saddles shall be insulated on all insulated lines at clamps, hangers or

locations where insulation may be compressed.
2. All hanging and clipping of pipes shall be made with Armafix pipe hangers
and pipe supports or with pipe supports made from the same materials as the
pipe insulation with the inclusion of a PUR/PIR bearing segments to support
the pipe weight. The hangers and supports will be constructed from a suitanle
material to prevent compression. The pipe supports and hangers must be
glued to the adjacent insulation to provide a vapour seal and the completed
assembly of suitable construction to prevent thermal bridging. The seams
shall be sealed with Armaflex 520 or 820 contact adhesive.
3. Hangers clamped directly to the pipe shall be insulated over the hanger;
insulation shall be fully adhered to the hanger. In addition, hangers with
double rods shall be insulated between the rods. All seams of the insulation
shall be sealed with adhesive.
N. Seismic Restraint of Piping:
1. Design criteria is as follows:
a. Piping resiliently supported: 120 percent of the weight of the systems

and components and contents.
b. Piping not resiliently supported: 60 percent of the weight of the

system components and contents.
c. Except as noted above, meet the more severe requirements of the

Local Code and the latest Uniform Building Code for determining
seismic force Fp.
2. Provide one of the following options:
a. Design and installation to meet the criteria listed above, and meet
requirements of the latest Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors National Association (SMACNA), Seismic Restraint
Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems for the prescribed
Seismic Hazard Level (SHL).
b. Design and installation to meet the criteria listed above, and meet the
most current requirements of the National Uniform Seismic
Installation Guidelines (NUSIG). Contractor shall submit all design
tables and information for the design force levels, stamped and
signed by a professional engineer registered in the place where
project is located.

SECTION 15050
c. Where SMACNA or NUSIG requirements are not met completely,

submit proposed alternate details and calculations to completely
address seismic bracing requirements. Such designs shall use more
severe of the Local Code and the Uniform Building Code
requirements for determining seismic forces, and be performed,
stamped and signed by a professional engineer. Revise if necessary
any details shown on the contract drawings for vertical support and
lateral bracing, and submit for the approval of the Consultant to meet
the design criteria listed above.
2.3 PIPING ISOLATION
A. General:
1. All chilled water, condenser water, flue gas, and other piping within
mechanical rooms or within 50 feet total pipe length (whichever is longer) of
connected vibration-isolated equipment (chillers, pumps, air handling units,
etc.) and all of the above piping that is 12 inches or larger shall be isolated
from the building structure by means of vibration-isolation mounts, resilient
pipe guides, and resilient penetration sleeve/seals.
2. Spring isolators shall be selected for a static deflection, under load of not less
than I inch Unit SLRS or 30N isolators (whichever is applicable to the
mounting condition) shall be used.
3. Where lateral support of pipe risers is required within the specified limits, this
shall be accomplished by use of resilient lateral supports.
4. Pipes within the specified limits that penetrate the building construction shall
be isolated from the building structure by use of resilient penetrating
sleeve/seals.
5. Drain piping connected to vibration-isolated equipment shall not contact the

building structure or other non-isolated system unless it is resiliently mounted
as described above.
2.4 EQUIPMENT RIGGING SUPPORTS
A. Provide eyebolts suitable for block and tackle connection, adequately supported by
the structure above for:
1. Pumps
2. Large Fans
3. Motors
4. Fan Coil Units
5. Air Handlers
6. Cooling Towers
6. Other equipment which will require block and tackle handling
2.5 SLEEVES, WALL AND FLOOR PLATES
A. Use machine cut and reamed standard weight steel piping. Pipe sleeves 200 mm and
larger shall have minimum 6 mm wall thickness.
B. Concealed perimeter risers and runouts may have sleeves of 1.31 mm galvanized
steel set around section of insulation to provide freedom of movement of piping.
Extend 50 mm above finished floor level.

SECTION 15050
C. For piping through exterior walls, cooperate with the waterproofing trade at all times,
and do not break any waterproofing seal without consent of the waterproofing trade.
Provide waterproof link seals as detailed on Drawings.
D. Provide leak plates where pipe sleeves pass through exterior building walls. Each
leak plate shall be a 3.42 mm steel plate, welded to the sleeve, 100 mm diameter
greater than sleeve outside diameter.
E. Provide 1.31 mm galvanized steel duct sleeves. Provide adequate bracing for support
of sleeves during concrete and masonry work. For fire rated floors and walls, build fire
damper assemblies into structure to attain fire rated construction, in a manner
acceptable to the governing authorities.
F. Cover pipe sleeves in walls and ceilings of finished areas, other than Equipment
Rooms, with satin finish stainless steel, or satin finish chrome or nickel plated brass
escutcheons, with non-ferrous set screws. Do not use stamped steel split plates.
Split cast plates with screw locks, however, may be used.
G. Cover exposed duct sleeves in finished areas with 1.31 mm galvanized steel plates in
the form of duct collars. Fix in position with non-ferrous metal screws.
2.6 PROVISION FOR PIPE EXPANSION, CONTRACTION AND BUILDING SHRINKAGE
A. Where space limitations do not permit the use of expansion loops or offsets, provide
expansion joint equal Mason or Honeywell Expansion Joints properly selected for
system operating pressures according to the following:
1. For piping up to and including 65 mm, select ends to suit specified pipe
fittings. Pressure shall be external to the bellows. Pressure ratings for Model
H and HB expansion compensated as 1400 kPa and 1050 kPa.
2. Steel Piping – Honeywell expansion compensator with two ply stainless steel
bellows.
3. Copper Piping – Honeywell expansion compensator with two ply below, all
bronze construction.
4. For piping 75 mm and above, use flanged ends.
5. Steel Piping - Honeywell controlled, flexing expansion joint with stainless steel
pressure carrier, flanged ends.
6. Copper Piping - Honeywell controlled, flexing expansion joint with monel

pressure carrier, and brass flanged ends.
B. Submit for Consultant review prior to installation, drawings showing the location of
expansion joints, anchors and guides. Show details of proposed connection to
structure and loads to be imposed.
C. Recognize that the concrete structure will shrink. Design risers with sufficient
flexibility. Consult with structural engineer to determine the degree of flexibility.

SECTION 15050
2.7 DRAINS
A. Provide minimum 20 mm ball valve with hose end adapter, metal cap and chain at all
low points of all systems. Locate to allow easy connection of hose.
B. Provide 40 mm minimum size drains from ductwork connected to intake hoods and
wall louvers. Equip drains with deep seal traps. Locate traps in heated areas.
C. Provide 20 mm valves with metal caps and chains at the base of all pipe risers. Install
hose end ball valve in conjunction with 450 mm minimum length full line size dirt leg.
2.8 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A. Provide access to concealed mechanical equipment and components which require

inspection, adjustment, repair and preventive maintenance. Install systems and
components to result in a minimum number of access doors and panels. Install
equipment and components in locations readily accessible through doors and panels.
B. Supply for installation by other Contractors, doors, panels and frames. Ensure that
access doors and panels are properly located.
C. Coordinate requirements for all access doors and panels to suit Architectural finishes
and large enough to provide adequate access to equipment and components.
D. Check and coordinate Architect’s provision of access doors and panels with a fire
rating required by the code governing the fire rating of the structure.
E. In tile walls, and washroom walls, supply minimum 2.78 mm Type 304 stainless steel
with #4 finish, with recessed frame secured with stainless steel countersunk flush
head screws.
F. For all other surfaces, supply minimum 2.66 mm welded steel, flush type with
concealed hinges, lock and anchor strap, and factory prime coat finish.
2.9 FLASHING
A. Flashing will be carried out under each trade for roof curbs shown on their drawings.
B. Provide flashing for pipe openings or pre-manufactured roof curbs.
C. Carry out all counterflashing for roof mounted mechanical equipment and for pipes
and ducts passing through roof. Fit counterflashing over flashing or curb. Pitch
pockets are not acceptable.
2.10 CURBS
A. Curbs required for Division 15 work will be carried out under each trade.
B. Arrange and pay for Division 3 or Division 5 to provide other curbs and reinforcing
steel required for Division 15.
C. Pre-manufactured curbs for mechanical equipment mounted on roof will be supplied

by equipment manufacturer and they are specified under other Sections of this
Division.
D. Curbs are required for roof mounted equipment, around ducts passing through roof
and surrounding holes where groups of pipes and/or ducts pass through Equipment
Room floors, Kitchens and similar areas where water dams are required.

SECTION 15050
E. Provide roof curbs at least 300 mm above finished roof, unless exceeded by
Architectural considerations.
F. Provide concrete curbs around holes in Equipment Room floors, extending at least
150 mm above finished floor. Make watertight connection between curb and floor.
G. Fill spaces between curbs and pipes and ducts with firestopping material similar to
“Rectorseal” or equal. Caulk watertight with manufacturer’s recommended fire
resistant waterproof compound.
2.11 CONCRETE
A. Coordinate with Division 3 provision of 100 mm concrete housekeeping pads under all
floor mounted mechanical equipment and supports. Extend pads over the full
equipment base and isolator area.
B. Concrete work, including housekeeping pads, required for Division 15 work and
shown on the Structural or Architectural Drawings will be provided by Division 3.
2.12 COVERS (BY OTHER DIVISIONS)
A. Supply frames for installation by Division 3.
B. Provide covers for pits and sumps.
C. Provide gas tight gaskets for sewage pits.
D. Trench gratings will be provided by Division 5.
2.13 STEEL
A. Provide steel required for Division 15 work including supports, framing of openings
and lintels over openings that is not shown on Structural or Architectural Drawings.
B. Provide steel of adequate strength to support equipment and materials during all
operating and test conditions.
C. Support suspended equipment from the bottom or from manufacturer's designated

suspension points. Support tanks and similar equipment with adequate beam
strength by saddles with curvature to match the equipment. Continuously support
other equipment.
D. Provide base supports for all pipe risers. Design to distribute operating and static
loads to meet Consultant requirements.
E. Fabricate steel supports in contact with water or humidity conditions from materials
having approved corrosion resistance or galvanize after fabrication or brush welds
clean and apply a prime coat of rust inhibiting paint.
2.14 BELT DRIVES
A. Type: ANSI/RMA standard V-belts with proper motor pulley and driven sheave. Belts
shall be constructed of reinforced cord and rubber.
B. Dimensions, rating and selection standards: ANSI/RMA IP-20 and IP-21.

SECTION 15050
C. Minimum Horsepower Rating: Motor horsepower plus recommended ANSI/RMA

service factor (not less than 20 percent) in addition to the ANSI/RMA allowances for
pitch diameter, center distance, and arc of contact.
D. Maximum Speed: 25 m/s (5000 feet per minute).
E. Adjustment Provisions: For alignment and ANSI/RMA standard allowances for

installation and take-up.
F. Drives may utilize a single V-Belt (any cross section) when it is the manufacturer's
standard.
G. Multiple Belts: Matched to ANSI/RMA specified limits by measurement on a belt

measuring fixture. Seal matched sets together to prevent mixing or partial loss of sets.
Replacement, when necessary, shall be an entire set of new matched belts.
H. Sheaves and Pulleys:
1. Material: Pressed steel, or close grained cast iron.
2. Bore: Fixed or bushing type for securing to shaft with keys.
3. Balanced: Statically and dynamically.
4. Groove spacing for driving and driven pulleys shall be the same.
5. Minimum Diameter of V-Belt Sheaves (ANSI/RMA recommendations) in

millimeters and inches:
Fractional Horsepower Standard High Capacity
Cross Min. od Cross Min. od Cross Min. od

Section mm (in) Section mm (in) Section mm (in)
2L 20 (0.8) A 83 (3.25) 3V 67 (2.65)
3L 38 (1.5) B 146 (5.75) 4V 180 (7.10)
4L 64 (2.5) C 239 (9.40) 5V 318 (12.50)
5L 89 (3.5) D 345 (13.60)
E 554 (21.80)
I. Drive Types, Based on ARI 435:
1. Provide adjustable-pitch or fixed-pitch drive as follows:
a. Fan speeds up to 1800 RPM: 7.5 kW (10 horsepower) and smaller.
b. Fan speeds over 1800 RPM: 2.2 kW (3 horsepower) and smaller.
2. Provide fixed-pitch drives for drives larger than those listed above.
3. The final fan speeds required to just meet the system CFM and pressure
requirements, without throttling, shall be determined by adjustment of a
temporary adjustable-pitch motor sheave or by fan law calculation if a
fixed-pitch drive is used initially.

SECTION 15050
2.15 DRIVE GUARDS
A. For machinery and equipment, provide guards as shown in AMCA 410 for belts,
chains, couplings, pulleys, sheaves, shafts, gears and other moving parts regardless
of height above the floor. Drive guards may be excluded where motors and drives are
inside factory fabricated air handling unit casings.
B. Materials: Sheet steel, cast iron, expanded metal or wire mesh rigidly secured so as to
be removable without disassembling pipe, duct, or electrical connections to
equipment.
C. Access for Speed Measurement: 25 mm (one inch) diameter hole at each shaft
center.
2. 16 FIRESTOPPING
Section 07841 specifies an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases where
penetrations occur for piping and ductwork. Refer to Section 15080, for firestop pipe and duct
insulation.
2.17 TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
A. Furnish, and turn over to the Consultant, special tools not readily available
commercially, that are required for disassembly or adjustment of equipment and
machinery furnished.
B. Grease Guns with Attachments for Applicable Fittings: One for each type of grease
required for each motor or other equipment.
C. Tool Containers: Hardwood or metal, permanently identified for intended service and
mounted, or located, where directed by the Consultant.
D. Lubricants: A minimum of 0.95 L (one quart) of oil, and 0.45 kg (one pound) of grease,
of equipment manufacturer's recommended grade and type, in unopened containers
and properly identified as to use for each different application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Conform to the requirements of Division 2.
B. Read subsurface information data.
C. Excavation and backfill required for Division 15 work inside the building and to a point
1.5 m outside building shall be carried out by the Division listed in the following
schedule:
1. Excavation:
Initial excavation to 150 mm above pipe inverts Division 2
2. Final excavation to pipe inverts Division 15
3. Backfill
Initial backfill with sand to 300 mm above top of pipes Division 15
4. Final backfill Division 2

SECTION 15050
D. Ensure that excavation work is executed to attain required inverts and grades.
E. Remove material excavated by Division 15 and not to be reused, from the site.
F. Carefully prepare the bottom of pipe trench. Use one of the following bedding
methods:
1. In firm undisturbed soil, lay pipe directly on the soil and shape soil to fit the
lower 1/3 segment of pipe and fittings.
2. In rock, shale and where noted, excavate to 150 mm below and minimum 200
mm on each side of pipe. Form a 150 mm thick bedding using 10 mm
crushed stone. Provide continuous support over at least the lower 1/3
segment of pipe.
3. In unstable soil, in fill and where soil has been disturbed during previous
excavation work, excavate to at least 150 mm below bottom of pipe and form
a reinforced concrete cradle supporting full length between firm support, or
install piers down to undisturbed solid soil. Piers shall be at a maximum
spacing of 2400 mm. Provide at least one pier for each pipe length. Support
over at least the lower 1/3 segment of pipe.
G. Where excavation is necessary close to and below the level of any footing, backfill
with 14,000 kPa concrete to the level of the highest adjacent footing. Do not proceed
with the work prior to receiving written approval from Consultant.
H. Obtain approval from governing authorities and Consultant before backfilling.
I. Provide backfilling materials as specified in Division 2. Lay and compact as specified

in Division 2.
3.2 PIPE, DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Locate distribution systems, equipment and materials for maximum usable space,
optimum service clearances and to accommodate current requirements and identified
future expansion.
B. Coordinate Division 15 services installation above typical floor modular ceilings to

allow installation and future relocation of lights and air troffers without interfering with
or requiring relocation of mechanical, electrical or other services, or removal of ceiling
grid.
C. Include all pipe and duct offsets required to eliminate interference with the work of
other Divisions.
D. Install equipment and materials to present a neat appearance. Run piping, ducts and
conduit parallel to or perpendicular to building planes. Conceal piping, ducts and
conduit in finished areas. Install so as to require a minimum amount of furring.
E. Install pipe, duct and conduit straight, parallel and close to walls and slab or deck
underside, with specified pitch.
F. Use standard fittings for all direction changes. Do not use drilled tees and other field
fabricated fittings.
G. Install eccentric reducers in horizontal piping to permit drainage and eliminate air
pockets.

SECTION 15050
H. Where pipe sizes differ from connection sizes of equipment, provide reducing fittings
between inline components such as valves, strainers and fittings, and equipment.
Reducing bushings are not permitted.
I. Cap open ends of piping during installation.
J. Lay copper tubing so that it is not in contact with dissimilar metal and will not kink or
collapse.
K. Use non-corrosive lubricant or teflon tape equal to Dow Corning and apply on male
thread.
L. Provide brass adaptors or dielectric couplings wherever dissimilar metals are joined.
M. No pipe to be laid in water or when, in opinion of Consultant conditions are unsuitable.
N. Ensure that pipe installation does not transmit vibration to the walls and floors through
which they pass.
O. Make provisions for neat insulation finish around equipment and materials. Do not
mount equipment within insulation depth.
P. Provide, in electrical rooms and elevator machine rooms, drip trays under the entire
length of pipe within the confines of the room. Pipe drip tray to nearest floor drain.
Q. Perform welding to meet ANSI B31.9.
3.3 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
A. Provide unions or flanges at all connections to equipment. Ensure that piping

adjacent to equipment is readily removable for servicing and/or removal of equipment
without shutting down entire system.
B. Install unions in piping up to and including 50 mm pipe size. Install flanges in piping
65 mm pipe size and larger.
C. Prevent galvanic corrosion by isolating copper and steel. Use red brass adapters, or
completely isolate flanges using full face gaskets with bolts installed through phenolic
sleeves with insulating fibre washers. Where the Plumbing Code prohibits the use of
red brass adapters, use insulating couplings. Where system valves are required, solid
brass isolating valves may be used in lieu of adapters or couplings.
D. Provide metallic code rated continuity link between flanges or unions, where pipe
mains carry flammable fluids or gases.
E. Make all plumbing and sheet metal connections to equipment provided by the Owner.
3.4 INSERTS
A. Size and space for the loads to be supported.
B. Properly locate and firmly secure inserts to forms before concrete is poured.
C. Place inserts only within main structure and not in any finishing materials.
D. When inserts are required in precast concrete, supply inserts and location drawings to
the precast concrete supplier for casting into material. Otherwise, include the cost of
having the precast concrete supplier install inserts at the site.

SECTION 15050
E. Do not use powder actuated tools.
3.5 HANGERS
A. Suspend piping, ductwork and equipment with all necessary hangers and supports
required for a safe and neat installation. Ensure that pipes are free to expand and
contract and are graded properly. Adjust each hanger to take its full share of the
weight.
B. Suspend hanger rods directly from the structure. Do not suspend pipes, ducts or
equipment from other pipes, ducts, equipment, metal work or ceilings.
C. Provide auxiliary structural steel angles, channels and beams where ductwork, piping
and equipment must be suspended between joists or beams.
D. Use galvanized rods, steel support angles, channels and beams where exposed to
direct contact with water or to possible high humidity conditions where condensation
can occur.
E. Space hangers to ensure that structural steel members are not over stressed. In no
case shall pipe hangers be further apart than indicated in the tables. When
requested, submit detailed drawings showing locations and magnitude of ductwork,
piping and equipment loads on the structure. Provide calculations when requested by
Consultant.
F. Do not use trapeze type hangers for support of piping, without prior review by
Consultant. Where permitted, fabricate from angle or channel frames, and space
hangers to suit the smallest pipe size.
H. Except for specified Wire Rope Suspension Systems, do not use hooks, chains or
straps to support equipment and materials.
H. For precast concrete work, if inserts cannot be cast into members, pass hanger rods
between the members and weld to steel plates resting on the upper surface of the
precast material. To prevent raising of the hanger rod, apply a lock nut and 50 mm
minimum dia. flat washer tight against the under surface of the precast material.
I. Ensure that copper materials are completely isolated from ferrous materials. Use
plastic or epoxy coated hangers and clamps, or use lead inserts between copper
piping and ferrous materials, and between copper piping and copper coated ferrous
materials.
J. Provide round steel threaded rods meeting ASTM A-36.
K. The following table establishes minimum standards of rod sizes and hanger spacing
for steel and copper piping.

SECTION 15050
Maximum Horizontal
Spacing of Supports
Pipe Size Rod Size Steel Copper

mm mm m m
12 10 1.5 1.5
20 10 1.8 1.8
25 10 1.8 1.8
32 10 2.4 2.1
40 10 2.7 2.4
50 10 2.7 2.7
65 12 3.0 3.0
75 12 3.0 3.0
90 12 3.0 3.3
100 16 3.0 3.7
125 16 3.7 3.7
150 20 3.7 3.7
200 22 3.7
250 22 3.7
300 22 3.7
350 25 3.7
400 25 3.7
450 29 3.7
500 32 3.7
600 32 3.7
L. In addition to these basic requirements, provide hangers in the following location:
1. to eliminate vibration
2. at points of vertical and horizontal change of direction of pipe
3. at inline centrifugal pumps
4. at valves and strainers
5. on mains at branch takeoffs
6. to avoid stress on equipment connections
7. as required for seismic restraint
M. Install spring hangers or other special supports specified in Section 15071.
N. Support horizontal cast iron soil pipe at each hub. Where groups of fittings occur, not
more than three joints shall be between hangers.
O. Refer to applicable articles of the Specification regarding thermal insulation

requirements. Unless shown specifically on Drawings, provide the following support
methods.
1. For insulated condensate piping up to 65 mm diameter, support with hangers

directly on piping.

SECTION 15050
P. Generally, support ducts with 2.7 mm by 25 mm wide galvanized hangers or with 12

mm dia. rods and 40 mm rolled angle saddles to meet SMACNA or ASHRAE
Standards.
Q. Support vertical duct risers at each floor with rolled angle collars bearing on building
structure.
3.6 SLEEVES, WALL PLATES, FLOOR PLATES
A. Set sleeves for piping and ductwork in conjunction with erection of floors and walls.
Locate sleeves accurately in accordance with submittal drawings, and as follows:
1. Through interior walls, set sleeves flush with finished surfaces on both sides.
2. Through exterior walls above grade, set sleeves flush with finished surfaces
on inside and to suit flashing on outside.
3. For floors in Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Janitors Closets, Kitchens and

similar areas where a water dam is required, set sleeves flush to underside of
structure and extending 50 mm above finished floor.
4. For other floors, set sleeves flush to both finished surfaces.
B. Size sleeves to provide 25 mm clearance around insulated piping and ductwork.
C. Ensure that fire ratings of floors and walls are maintained.
D. Provide continuous insulation runs through fire separations. Ensure that piping and
ductwork do not touch sleeves.
E. Pack clearance spaces with Rectorseal Metacaulk Firestopping materials strictly as

recommended by the manufacturer.
F. Install leak tight seals to meet the manufacturer's requirements. Select the inside
diameter of each wall sleeve opening to fit the pipe and leak tight seal, all to ensure
watertight joint.
G. Additional sleeving requirements:
1. Provide sleeves for systems not part of Contract, but identified to be required
on Drawings.
2. Provide sleeves to accommodate compressed air piping and wiring conduits
required for Division 15 work.
3. Utilize, insofar as possible, sleeves provided in other Contracts.
4. Provide additional sleeves as required by Drawings to accommodate service

requirements. Include for the cost of drilling and setting sleeves.
5. Fill unused sleeves with lime plaster.

SECTION 15050
3.7 PROVISION FOR PIPE EXPANSION, CONTRACTION AND BUILDING SHRINKAGE
A. Make provision for pipe expansion, contraction and building shrinkage with suitable
anchors and offsets or expansion loops.
B. Install piping to allow freedom of movement in all planes without imposing undue
stress on any section of main piping, branch piping, equipment and structure.
C. Use offsets at take-offs to fans, fan coil units, pipe risers and other branch lines.
D. Select expansion joints for the calculated movement according to the following
temperature ranges.
1. For cold pipes, from minimum operating temperature to 38 deg C, plus 25%
safety factor.
2. For warm and hot pipes, from minimum ambient, but not lower than -5 deg C,
to maximum operating temperature plus 25% safety factor.
E. When ambient temperature during installation is higher than operating temperature,

use precompressed expansion joints.
F. Select expansion joints to withstand system test pressure, as well as operating

pressures and temperatures.
G. Install expansion joints in accordance with manufacturers published installation

instructions.
H. During the construction and warranty periods, regularly review provisions for building
shrinkage and make necessary adjustments to piping to ensure freedom from binding
and stress.
3.8 PIPE GUIDES AND ANCHORS
A. Install pipe guides for expansion joints according to expansion joint manufacturer's
published recommendations. Use at least two guides on each side of expansion joint.
B. Install manufactured or field fabricated alignment guides to allow movement in axial

direction only.
C. Install vertical risers properly anchored and guided to maintain accurate vertical
position of piping. At time of start-up, clean and lubricate guides, and adjust to allow
free sliding at operating conditions.
D. For piping up to and including 75 mm, guide pipes at every floor or every 3900 mm.
Guide larger pipes at every second floor or every 7500 mm.
E. Fabricate anchors from structural steel channels, plates or angles.
F. Secure anchors to the structure. Avoid introduction of excessive reactive forces and
operating weights into the structure and onto equipment and piping.
G. Where guides are provided on cold piping, provide thermal break to prevent sweating.

SECTION 15050
3.9 PAINTING
A. Supply ferrous metal work except piping and galvanized and stainless steel ductwork,
with at least one factory prime coat, or paint one prime coat on job.
B. Clean and steel brush surfaces with welds. Then prime coat all steel supports and
brackets.
C. On uninsulated piping, steel brush and prime coat welds.
D. Touch-up or repaint all surfaces damaged during shipment or installation and leave
ready for finish painting.
E. Prime coat material shall conform to, Approved Standards.
F. Finish painting will be provided under Section 09910.
3.10 MOTOR AND DRIVE ALIGNMENT
A. Belt Drive: Set driving and driven shafts parallel and align so that the corresponding
grooves are in the same plane.
B. Direct-connect Drive: Securely mount motor in accurate alignment so that shafts are
free from both angular and parallel misalignment when both motor and driven machine
are operating at normal temperatures.
3.11 LUBRICATION
Field check and lubricate equipment requiring lubrication prior to initial operation.
3.12 START-UP AND TEMPORARY OPERATION
Start-up equipment as described in equipment specifications. Verify that vibration is within

specified tolerance prior to extended operation. Temporary use of equipment is specified in
Section 15010, Article, Temporary use of Mechanical and Electrical Equipment.
3.13 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Prior to the final inspection, perform required tests as specified in Section 15010,
Article, Tests and submit the test reports and records to the Consultant.
B. Should evidence of malfunction in any tested system, or piece of equipment or

component part thereof, occur during or as a result of tests, make proper corrections,
repairs or replacements, and repeat tests at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. When completion of certain work or system occurs at a time when final control
settings and adjustments cannot be properly made to make performance tests, then
make performance tests for heating systems and for cooling systems respectively
during first actual seasonal use of respective systems following completion of work.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Motors, Starters, Control Centers and Wiring
SECTION 15055
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 WORK INCLUDED ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 RELATED WORK.......................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS ......................................................................................................... 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................. 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 2
2.1 MOTORS ..................................................................................................................................... 2
2.2 STARTERS, CONTACTORS AND MOTOR CONTROL ......................................................................... 3
2.3 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS ........................................................................................................ 4
2.4 CONTROLLER OVER CURRENT PROTECTION AND DISCONNECTION MEANS FOR COMBINATION
STARTER .................................................................................................................................... 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................... 7
3.1 INSTALLATION AND WIRING .......................................................................................................... 7
3.2 WARNING NOTICES ..................................................................................................................... 8

Development\Mechanical\15055-Motors, Starters, Control Centers and Wiring.doc
SECTION 15055
SECTION 15055
MOTORS, STARTERS, CONTROL CENTERS AND WIRING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply and install
the motors, starters, control centres and wiring indicated on the Drawings and
specified in this Section of the Specification.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15075 - Variable Speed Drives.
The Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.
A. IEEE 112 B - Test procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators
B. NEMA MG I – Motors and Generators
C. UL-B45
D. NEMA 1652-322
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and manufactures’ data for the following items in accordance
with the conditions of the contract.
1. Elementary control diagrams, unit wiring diagram for each motor controller,
assembly outline drawings, summary sheets, shop interwiring diagrams, field
connection diagrams, shall be submitted.
2. Include full detailed and dimensioned plans, section and elevations. Include
information on type and size of structural supports, metal thickness, surface
finishes, bus cross sections, provisions for lifting as well as single line
diagram of switch, fuse, circuit breakers, bus arrangements, metering
arrangements, etc.
3. Furnish complete schematic wiring diagram and a full set of equipment wiring
diagrams for protective equipment relays, pilot, lights, alarms, controls, etc.
Provide narratives for all wiring diagrams.
4. Include full load heat rejection in BTU per hour for total components by control
center.
5. All circuit breaker sizes and types must be indicated.
6. Where a control center assembly is shipped in more than one section, show
field inter wiring required to maintain circuit continuity upon reassembly.
Clearly delineate shipping sections.

SECTION 15055
7. Include a statement verifying coordination with the automatic temperature

controls fire alarm system, BMS and the other required systems.
8. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be

included in the submittal and bill of lading before delivery to site.
A. Each as a complete and finished product shall receive a single integrated equipment
rating by the manufacturer. The integrated equipment short circuit wiring shall certify
that all equipment is capable of withstanding the thermal and magnetic stress of a
fault equal to the value specified on the Drawings. Such rating shall be established by
actual tests by the manufacturer on similar equipment. This certification shall be
permanently affixed to each motor control center. Test data shall be submitted to the
Engineer at time of submission of Acceptance Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTORS
A. Provide Westinghouse, GE or U.S. Electric, 60 cycle, 1800 rpm for 4P motors, except
where noted, with the following characteristics:
1. under 1.0 kW - single phase, 220 V
2. 1.0 kW and over - 3 phase, 380 V
B. High efficiency motors (per NEMA Standard) shall be provided and shall be
compatible with standard motor frames.
C. All motors 1.0 kW and over, unless specified differently, shall be T-frame, A.C. Three
Phase and equal to Motor Efficiency Level as tested to the most recent issue of IEEE
112B.
D. Provide squirrel cage induction motors built to NEMA MGI.
E. The minimum requirement for 3 phase motors shall be NEMA Design B, Class B
insulated for maximum 40 deg. C ambient.
F. Select motors for quiet continuous operation to suit loads imposed by equipment.
Recognize that motor horsepower specified and scheduled are minimum sizes.
Include extra costs for larger motors, starters, power wiring and additional control
wiring if larger motors are required per Contractor’s actual approved submittals.
G. Provide motor enclosures as follows:
1. Open drip-proof, 1.15 service factor for motors protected from the weather
and moisture entertainment to operate satisfactorily at maximum temperature
and moisture levels of surrounding air for motors located in air streams.
2. Totally enclosed fan cooled 1.15 service factor for motors in all other
locations, including cooling towers.
3. Provide explosion proof motors where scheduled.
H. Equip motors 18 kW and larger, as well as those smaller but with longer than 10
second starting time, with inherent overheat protection, consisting of thermistors, one
for each phase, embedded in the stator windings. Extend wires out to motor terminal

SECTION 15055
box, ready for field wiring into the starter holding coil circuit. Provide manual reset
tripping device compatible with starter.
I. Provide motors to operate with variable speed drives supplied according to Section
15075 and to meet the following:
1. Rated for VSD duty
2. Be operable from a pulse width modulated (PWM) waveform and shall not
saturate while operating at up to 110% of the nameplate voltage.
3. At least Class F insulation.
4. Cast frame construction.
5. Must be capable of running at 10% full rated speed with the VSD output
provided by the drives supplied under Section 15075.
6. Provided with thermal sensors imbedded in the windings with connections

extended to the motor terminal box. For motor sizes up to and including 18.6
kW, the thermal sensors may be thermistors. For larger sizes, provide RTDs
(Resistive Temperature Device). Embed sensors in that part of the windings
which is in the iron for response to both copper and iron temperature.
J. Two speed motors shall be, single winding, variable torque high and low speed.
Provide starter to suit motor requirements.
2.2 STARTERS, CONTACTORS AND MOTOR CONTROL
A. Starters and contactors factory built into the control panel of packaged equipment will
be considered as an integral part of the package and may be from a different
manufacturer.
B. Magnetic Motor Starters
1. Magnetic Motor Starters shall be for general purpose, Class A and for
induction motors rated in horsepower.
2. Self contained unit in a NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure (NEMA 3R where

installed outdoors), externally operable from the front.
3. Provide full voltage non-reversing (FVNR) type combination magnetic starters

for motors of ½ HP (0.373 kw) to 7.5 HP (5.5 kw).
4. Provide reduced voltage, non reversing, Wye-delta type combination

magnetic starters for motors 10 HP (7.46 kw) up to 50 HP (37.3 kw).
1. Adjustable timing relay for start to run transfer timing.

2. Closed transition from reduced to full voltage.
5. Provide reduced voltage, non-reversing, auto-transformer type, combination

starters for motors above 50 HP.
1. Two winding, open delta connected.
2. Adjustable timing relay for start to run transfer timing.
3. Closed transition from reduced to full voltage.

SECTION 15055
4. Field adjustable auto transformers taps, 50%, 65%, and 80%, factory
set at 80%.
6. Provide an individual control power transformer with two primary and one
secondary control fuses for each motor controller. The other secondary lead
shall be grounded. Secondary voltage shall be 230V AC.
7. Provide each motor controller with three phase, ambient temperature

compensating, thermal overload relays with heaters. Overload relays shall
have be adjustable from 90% to 110% of heater rating, factory set at 100%.
Provide an insulated pushbutton on the outside of door to reset overload
relays.
8. Provide each motor controller with a Hand-Off-Automatic (HOA) selector

switch. Provide a Hand-Automatic (HA) selector switch for life safety
equipment. Mount switch on outside of door.
9. Provide each motor controller with 2 normally open and 2 normally closed
auxiliary contacts long life (50,000 hours) pilot indicators on outside of door,
auxiliary relays, and other devices required for operation of the equipment to
be controlled.
10. Provide transformer type indicating lights in from cover (Lens color(s) red-
stop, green run) and push to test type indicating lights.
2.3 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
A. General
1. Provide motor control centers, completely factory-assembled and tested,

metal-enclosed, free-standing, dead-front equipment, with the following
general ratings and construction designations.
a. Voltage: 380/220V as indicated, 3 phase, 4-wire, 60 hertz except as

otherwise noted.
b. Minimum bus short circuit rating: as indicated in the drawing.
c. Motor Controllers: Combination magnetic type with circuit breaker

switches.
d. Feeder access: Top or bottom as job conditions permit.
e. Wiring: Type B, Class I, as defined by National Electrical

Manufacturers’ Association Standards.
B. Construction
1. Provide number of vertical sections and general arrangement of modular

control units as outlined and as required. Provide disconnect switches or
miscellaneous equipment. Each vertical section to contain no more than 6
modular units, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide motor control centers to consist of detachable vertical sections, each

reinforced, shaped, rigid, free-standing structure, with cover plate of steel or
aluminium. Provide each standard section capable of mounting
interchangeably with various motor controller units and designed so that
control units may be readily removed or added as required. Mount entire

SECTION 15055
assembly on two (2) sturdy structural steel channels, drilled for bolting to floor.
Provide each section 2300mm overall height by 500mm wide by 500mm.
a. Horizontal sections of entire assembly to contain the main horizontal

bus feeding the busses of the vertical sections. Provide removable
plates for access to main bus. Provide sections above or below
control units constituting a continuous wiring through with screw-on
covers along the entire length of the control center.
b. Provide each vertical section to be dead-front NEMA 4. Provide

vertical bus full-length and isolated from starter compartments by a
full-height fiber barrier, provided with opening so designed that control
units of any standard size can be removed or added as required.
Provide a 100-millimeter minimum-width, full-length vertical wiring
trough with cable supports on one side of each section. Provide
easily removable isolating metal barriers between control units.
3. Provide a separate, formed, heavy sheet door for each control unit. Doors
secured to the vertical section frame by screw-fastened, concealed hinges
and bolted door fasteners, capable of being tightened by hand or screwdriver.
Door to be gasketed dust-tight all around, including disconnect operating
handles and knockouts and opening for required pushbuttons, selector
switches and indicating lights. Do not attach wiring to door.
4. Provide disconnect handle mounted on door of each control unit to operate

switch through adjustable linkage with clearly marked “On” and “Off”
designations. Handle designed for padlocking either in “On” or “Off” position
with 1 to 3 padlocks. Provide mechanical interlock to prevent opening of door
when handle is in the “On” position. Interlock to be bypassable with special
tool.
5. Provide each vertical section with a number of motor controllers, fused

switches, or miscellaneous equipment units. Provide each unit with
components and wiring readily accessible for ease of maintenance and
connected to the vertical bus by means of self-aligning connectors having
free-floating spring construction so as to insure a positive silver-to-silver
contact with both sides of the bus at all times. Provide stationary structure
and unit supports designed to support and align the units during removal or
replacement and for locking in connect or disconnect positions. Provide units
of modular heights and interchangeable with other units of same size or
multiple of this size.
a. Provide each modular unit capable of being secured and padlocked

from the power bus, to facilitate inspection and maintenance.
6. Provide control center with facilities for future field installation of motor
controller units without requiring modification of the bus structures.
7. Thoroughly clean interior and exterior of entire assembly, including pullbox,

after fabrication and give it a rust-inhibiting primer coat followed by finish
coats of medium-light gray air-drying lacquer or baked enamel.
8. Provide control center completely assembled and connected at factory and

then given operating and high potential test in accordance with American
Institute of Electrical Engineers and National Electrical Manufacturers’
Association Standard. Provide entire assembly suitably reinforced for
shipping and provided with bolted-on lifting irons at the top. Ship control
center as a single assembly unless entry conditions or handling facilities at a

SECTION 15055
point of installation require division into smaller sections.
9. Provide factory wired terminal strips for all required field connections at top of
each vertical section.
C. Buswork
1. Horizontal bus sized as indicated, but not less than 600 amperes. Provide
bus supports of high-quality insulators with high dielectric strength low
moisture absorption, and high impact strength, so arranged and secured to
bus as to provide the required short-circuit bracing and integrated equipment
rating.
2. Bus bars shall be arranged throughout A-B-C left to right, top to bottom and
front to rear. Where special circuiting precludes this arrangement has
accepted by the Architects/Engineers bus bars shall be permanently labelled.
3. Conductor material shall be plated copper.
4. Bus shall be sized at 155 centimeter but in no case less that of sufficient
cross section to limit temperature rise to 55 degrees Celcius above an
ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celcius.
5. Horizontal bus shall be full size, tapered bus is not permitted. Provide bolt
holes drilled and tapped for future expansion at the end of horizontal bus bars
including neutral and ground bus. The provisions shall include bus bars
installed and extended to the extreme side of the section and be fabricated in
such a fashion that the addition of a future section would require only the
installation of standard bolted splice plates.
D. Grounding
1. Provide a ground of 33 percent of phase bus capacity throughout the length of

the control center with grounding lugs for equipment grounding.
E. Motor Controllers
1. Provide motor controller unit of the combination type with circuit breaker
switches and magnetic starter, complete with auxiliary equipment, including
selector switches, pushbuttons, indicating lights, auxiliary contacts, and all
other devices required for satisfactory operation of the equipment to be
controlled.
a. Starter short-circuit current-interrupting rating to be not less than

65,000 amperes symmetrical at 240 volts.
b. Provide standard magnetic type starter 3 properly sized overload

heaters for 3-phase motors, manual reset overload pushbutton, and a
minimum of 2 auxiliary contacts arranged in the normally closed
position. Provide each starter with a long-life green pilot light and a
HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC selector switch. Provide necessary
interlocks and remote terminals for both local and remote connections
indicated for the electrical or mechanical work. Coordinate
requirements with BMS and Fire Alarm System and other required
systems.
c. Provide starter operating coil with voltage of 120 volts. Provide a two-
winding control circuit transformer for each starter unit of sufficient
capacity to supply the inrush and continuous volt-amperes required

SECTION 15055
by the starter coil and other devices in the control circuit. Capacity of
transformers shall be a minimum of 150VA over standard by size of
motor starter. Furnish a dual element fuse in each line of the primary
circuit of the control transformer. Required fuse size engraved on
fuse block or adjacent thereto.
2.4 CONTROLLER OVER CURRENT PROTECTION AND DISCONNECTION MEANS FOR COMBINATION
STARTER
A. Motor Circuit Protector: A motor short circuit protector shall be permitted in lieu of
devices as listed in PEC Part 1 Table 6.6.12.6. Motor short circuit protector is part of a
PS or UL listed combination controller having both motor over load protection and
short circuit & protection in each conductor and if it will operate at not more than 13
times of full load motor current. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with
motor circuit protector in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position, where required
to achieve specified short-circuit rating, provide a current-limiter attachment.
B. Molded-Case Thermal/Magnetic Circuit Breakers: circuit breakers with integral thermal

and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide interlock to prevent opening
front cover with circuit breaker in ON position defeatable with screw driver. Handle
lockable in OFF position. Interrupting rating shall be as indicated in the drawings.
Where required to achieve specified short-circuit rating, provide a current-limiter
attachment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
A. Provide conduit and wiring materials and methods in strict accordance with Division
16 requirements.
B. Provide motors, starters, contactors, disconnect switches and control devices for
Division 15 work.
C. Provide all power wiring from load side of starters and contactors required for Division
15 work.
D. Sizing for starters and wiring shall meet requirements of the Electrical Code.
E. Provide control wiring for all equipment provided or supplied under Division 15.
F. Provide control wiring between kitchen exhaust hood control box and exhaust fan
starter.
G. Connections to motors shall be made in flexible seal-tight conduit, and with sufficient
material to reduce vibration transmission and to allow full travel of motor for belt
adjustment.
H. Install wiring materials parallel to or perpendicular to building planes.
I. Refer to Division 16, for all line side power wiring to loose starters, MCCs and
Contactors.
J. Refer to Division 16, for normal and emergency power service locations. Provide
power wiring for electrical tracing, controls and elsewhere where required.

SECTION 15055
K. Power wiring and control wiring connected to life safety equipment shall utilize fire
rated cable. (Wiring located in room where equipment is located shall not be fire
rated.)
3.2 WARNING NOTICES
A. Place warning notices at each starter and on or close to each motor under BMS
control.
B. Provide conspicuous notices with bold lettering and advising that the motor is under
BMS control and may start at any time without warning. Submit notices at the shop
drawing stage for Consultant review.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Control
SECTION 15071
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 RELATED WORK ....................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS............................................................................................................................. 2
PART 2 – PRODUCTS......................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................................... 4
2.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT ................................................................ 4
2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATORS .............................................................................................................. 4
2.4 BASES ..................................................................................................................................... 6
2.5 SOUND ATTENUATING UNITS ..................................................................................................... 7
2.6 ACOUSTICAL ENCLOSURES IN MECHANICAL ROOMS .................................................................... 7
2.7 VERTICAL RISER SUPPORT SYSTEM........................................................................................... 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION......................................................................................................................... 7
3.1 INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................................... 7
3.2 ADJUSTING .............................................................................................................................. 8

Development\Mechanical\15071-Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Control.doc
SECTION 15071
SECTION 15071
MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
Noise criteria, seismic restraints for equipment, vibration tolerance and vibration isolation for
HVAC Works.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15050- Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B. Section 15815- Metal Ducts and Accessories.
A. Refer to article, QUALITY ASSURANCE in specification Section 15050.
B. Noise Criteria:
1. Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and duct systems shall
not exceed following NC levels:
NC CRITERIA
TYPE OF SPACE
(NC) LEVEL
General office space in excess of 35

5 meters from the core mechanical
rooms
Offices within 5.0 meters of the 40
core
Lobbies, Corridors, Halls 45
Service Spaces, Parking Garages 45-50
2. After systems have been balanced, take sound measurements throughout

the complete range of audible frequencies from 63 Hz through 8000 Hz, in
each occupied area above, below and beside each Mechanical Equipment
Room and where directed. Plot readings on noise criteria NC curves.
3. Modify, as required and at no additional cost to the Owner, the fan

distribution and other mechanical systems to achieve the specified noise
criteria.
4. Submit a report, including sound curves, to substantiate that equipment has

been isolated adequately, and that acceptable noise levels have been
attained. Provide a list to indicate equipment in operation at time of readings
taken. Certify report by Professional Engineer.
5. Make sound measurements in accordance with the American Standard

Method for the Physical Measurement of Sound, ANSI S1.2.
6. Sound measuring equipment shall be Type 2 Class I in accordance with

ANSI Standards S1.4 or S1.11.

SECTION 15071
7. For equipment which has no sound power ratings scheduled on the plans,
the contractor shall select equipment such that the foregoing noise criteria,
local ordinance noise levels, and OSHA requirements are not exceeded.
Selection procedure shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Fundamentals
Handbook 2001, Chapter 7, Sound and Vibration.
8. An allowance, not to exceed 5db, may be added to the measured value to

compensate for the variation of the room attenuating effect between room
test condition prior to occupancy and design condition after occupancy which
may include the addition of sound absorbing material, such as, furniture. This
allowance may not be taken after occupancy. The room attenuating effect is
defined as the difference between sound power level emitted to room and
sound pressure level in room.
9. In absence of specified measurement requirements, measure equipment

noise levels three feet from equipment and at an elevation of maximum noise
generation.
C. Seismic Restraint Requirements:
1. Equipment:
a. All mechanical equipment not supported with isolators external to the

unit shall be securely anchored to the structure. Such mechanical
equipment shall be properly supported to resist a horizontal force of
50 percent of the weight of the equipment furnished.
b. All mechanical equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall be

provided with seismic restraints capable of resisting a horizontal force
of 100 percent of the weight of the equipment furnished.
2. Piping: Refer to specification Section 15050.
3. Ductwork: Refer to specification Section 15815.
D. Allowable Vibration Tolerances for Rotating, Non-reciprocating Equipment: Not to

exceed a self-excited vibration maximum velocity of 5 mm per second (0.20 inch per
second) RMS, filter in, when measured with a vibration meter on bearing caps of
machine in vertical, horizontal and axial directions or measured at equipment
mounting feet if bearings are concealed. Measurements for internally isolated fans
and motors may be made at the mounting feet.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Vibration isolators:
a. Floor mountings
b. Hangers
c. Snubbers
d. Thrust restraints
2. Bases.
3. Seismic restraint provisions and bolting.
4. Acoustical enclosures.

SECTION 15071
B. Isolator manufacturer shall furnish with submittal load calculations for selection of
isolators, including supplemental bases, based on lowest operating speed of
equipment supported.
C. Seismic Requirements: Submittals are required for all equipment anchors, supports
and seismic restraints. Submittals shall include weights, dimensions, standard
connections, and manufacturer's certification that all specified equipment will
withstand seismic Lateral Force requirements as shown on the documents.
D. In conjunction with vibration isolator supplier/manufacturer, the Contractor shall

submit official certification on vibration – free installation.
E. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be included in

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.

(ASHRAE):
ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook 2001 - Sound and Vibration, Chapter 7
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A123/A123M - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on major Iron

and Steel Components (except spring elements).
A884/A884M-02 - Epoxy Coating on spring elements and other Iron

and Steel components.
A325 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile

Strength
D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property -

Durometer Hardness
A216 - Carbon Cast Steel top cup and bottom cup.
C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
29 CFR 1910 - Guidelines for Noise Enforcement, Appendix A, 1983

SECTION 15071
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Type of isolator, base, and minimum static deflection shall be as required for each
specific equipment application as recommended by isolator or equipment
manufacturer but subject to minimum requirements indicated herein and in the
schedule on the drawings.
B. Elastometric Isolators shall comply with ASTM D2240 and be oil resistant neoprene
with a maximum stiffness of 60 durometer and have a straight-line deflection curve.
C. Exposure to weather: Isolators, excluding springs, exposed to weather shall be hot

dip galvanized after fabrication. Hot-dip zinc coating shall not be less than 609 grams
per square meter (two ounces per square foot) by weight complying with ASTM A123
or Epoxy Coating complying with ASTM A884/A884M-02.In addition provide limit
stops to resist wind velocity. Comply with the design wind velocity of 125 mph (200
kmph).
D. Uniform Loading: Select and locate isolators to produce uniform loading and
deflection even when equipment weight is not evenly distributed.
E. Color code isolators by type and size for easy identification of capacity.
2.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT
A. Bolt pad mounted equipment, without vibration isolators, to the floor or other support
using ASTM A307 standard bolting, material or equal.
B. Floor mounted equipment, with vibration Isolators: Type SS. Where Type N isolators
are used provide channel frame base horizontal restraints bolted to the floor, or other
support, on all sides of the equipment Size and material required for the base shall be
as recommended by the isolator manufacturer.
C. On all sided of suspended equipment, provide bracing for rigid supports and provide
restraints for resiliently supported equipment. The slack cable restraint method,
Mason Industries, or equal, is acceptable.
2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Floor Mountings:
1. Double Deflection Neoprene: Shall include neoprene covered steel support

plated (top and bottom), friction pads, and necessary bolt holes.
Type: “Mason” SLFH, “VCS” NM or equal
2. Captive Spring Mount for Seismic Restraint:
a. Design mounts to resiliently resist seismic forces in all directions.

Snubbing shall take place in all modes with adjustment to limit
upward, downward, and horizontal travel to a maximum of 6 mm (1/4-
inch) before contacting snubbers. Mountings shall have a minimum
rating of one G coefficient of gravity as calculated and certified by a
registered structural engineer.

SECTION 15071
b. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to
the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the
compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a
minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the rated
deflection. Mountings shall have ports for spring inspection. Provide
an all directional neoprene cushion collar around the equipment bolt.
Type: “Mason” SSLFH, “VCS” SM or equal
3. Spring Isolators with Vertical Limit Stops: Similar to spring isolators noted
above, except include a vertical limit stop to limit upward travel if weight is
removed and also to reduce movement and spring extension due to wind
loads. Provide clearance around restraining bolts to prevent mechanical short
circuiting. Isolators shall have a minimum seismic rating of one G.
Type: “Mason” SLR, SLRS, “VCS” FSR or equal
4. Seismic Pad: Pads shall be felt, cork neoprene waffle, neoprene and cork
sandwich, neoprene and fiberglass, neoprene and steel waffle, or reinforced
duck and neoprene, with steel top plate and drilled for an anchor bolt.
Washers and bushings shall be reinforced duck and neoprene. Size pads for
a maximum load of 345 kPa (50 pounds per square inch).
Type “Mason” Super W, Mini Super W, “VCS” HE or equal
B. Hangers: Shall be combination neoprene and springs unless otherwise noted and
shall allow for expansion of pipe.
1. Combination Neoprene and Spring: Vibration hanger shall contain a spring

and double deflection neoprene element in series. Spring shall have a
diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed operating spring height. Spring
shall have a minimum additional travel of 50 percent between design height
and solid height. Spring shall permit a 15 degree angular misalignment
without rubbing on hanger box.
Type: “Mason” 30N, “VCS” HE or equal
2. Spring Position Hanger: Similar to combination neoprene and spring hanger

except hanger shall hold piping at a fixed elevation during installation and
include a secondary adjustment feature to transfer load to spring while
maintaining same position.
Type: “Mason” PC30N, “VCS” HPE or equal
3. Neoprene: Vibration hanger shall contain a double deflection type neoprene

isolation element. Hanger rod shall be separated from contact with hanger
bracket by a neoprene grommet.
Type: “Mason” HD, “VCS” H1-3 or equal
4. Spring: Vibration hanger shall contain a coiled steel spring in series with a
neoprene grommet. Spring shall have a diameter not less than 0.8 of
compressed operating spring height. Spring shall have a minimum additional
travel of 50 percent between design height and solid height. Spring shall
permit a 15 degree angular misalignment without rubbing on hanger box.
Type: “Mason” 30, “VCS” H or equal

SECTION 15071
5. The first four (4) Hanger supports from the vibrating equipment for piping 5
mm (2 inches) and larger shall have a pointer and scale deflection indicator.
Type: “Mason” PC30N or equal
C. Snubbers: Each spring mounted base shall have a minimum of four all-directional or
eight two directional (two per side) seismic snubbers that are double acting.
Elastomeric materials shall be shock absorbent neoprene bridge quality bearing
pads, maximum 60 durometer, replaceable and have a minimum thickness of 6 mm
(1/4 inch). Air gap between hard and resilient material shall be not less than 3 mm
(1/8 inch) nor more than 6 mm (1/4 inch). Restraints shall be capable of withstanding
design load without permanent deformation.
Type: “Mason” Z-1011, Z-1225 or equal
D. Thrust Restraints: Restraints shall provide a spring element contained in a steel

frame with neoprene pads at each end attachment. Restraints shall have factory
preset thrust and be field adjustable to allow a maximum movement of 6 mm (1/4
inch) when the fan starts and stops. Restraint assemblies shall include rods, angle
brackets and other hardware for field installation.
Type: “Mason” WBI, WBD, or equal
2.4 BASES
A. Rails: Design rails with isolator brackets to reduce mounting height of equipment and
cradle machines having legs or bases that do not require a complete supplementary
base. To assure adequate stiffness, height of members shall be a minimum of 1/12 of
longest base dimension but not less than 100 mm (4 inches). Where rails are used
with neoprene mounts for small fans or close coupled pumps, extend rails to
compensate overhang of housing.
Type: “Mason” ICS Rails, or equal
B. Integral Structural Steel Base: Design base with isolator brackets to reduce mounting
height of equipment which require a complete supplementary rigid base. To assure
adequate stiffness, height of members shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest base
dimension, but not less than 100 mm (four inches).
Type: “Mason” WFSL or equal
C. Inertia Base: Base shall be a reinforced concrete inertia base. Pour concrete into a
welded steel channel frame, incorporating pre-located equipment anchor bolts and
pipe sleeves. Level the concrete to provide a smooth uniform bearing surface for
equipment mounting. Provide grout under uneven supports. Channel depth shall be a
minimum of 1/12 of longest dimension of base but not less than 150 mm (six inches).
Form shall include 13-mm (1/2-inch) reinforcing bars welded in place on minimum of
203 mm (eight inch) centers running both ways in a layer 40 mm (1-1/2 inches) above
bottom. Use height saving brackets in all mounting locations. Weight of inertia base
shall be equal to or greater than weight of equipment supported to provide a
maximum peak-to-peak displacement of 2 mm (1/16 inch).
Type: “Mason” BMK or equal
D. Curb Mounted Isolation Base: Fabricate from aluminum to fit on top of standard curb
with overlap to allow water run-off and have wind and water seals which shall not
interfere with spring action. Provide resilient snubbers with 6 mm (1/4 inch) clearance
for wind resistance. Top and bottom bearing surfaces shall have sponge type weather

SECTION 15071
seals. Integral spring isolators shall comply with Spring Isolator (Type S)
requirements.
Type: “Mason” CMAB or equal
2.5 SOUND ATTENUATING UNITS
Refer to specification Section 15815.
2.6 ACOUSTICAL ENCLOSURES IN MECHANICAL ROOMS
Provide if necessary to meet the required NC criteria at no additional cost to the Owner.
Enclosures shall be removable and sectional, of a size and weight that sections can be
readily handled with typical lifting and moving equipment available in the equipment room.
Enclosures must contain access openings, observation ports, lights, and ventilation where
required for normal operation, observation and servicing.
2.7 VERTICAL RISER SUPPORT SYSTEM
All vertical risers subjected to thermal expansion and/or contraction shall be supported by
spring isolators and central anchors designed to insure loading within design limits at
structural support points. The riser design must be prepared and submitted for approval by
the same isolation vendor supplying the HVAC mechanical equipment isolation and must
include the initial load, initial deflection, change in deflection, final load and change in load at
all spring support locations. In order to minimize load changes, the initial spring deflection
must be at least 4 times the thermal movement. The submittal must also include anchor loads
when installed, cold filled, and at operating temperature. Include calculated pipe stress at end
conditions and branch off locations as well as installation instruction. The submittal must be
stamped and signed by a licensed professional engineer in the employ of the vibration vendor
for at least five years.
Proper provision shall be made for seismic protection in seismic zones.
The support spring mounts shall be Type SLF, anchors Type ADA, telescoping guides Type
VSG, all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
The isolation vendor shall provide and design all brackets at riser spring and anchor locations
where standard clamps lack capacity or do not fit. The contractor must install and adjust all
isolators under the supervision of the designing isolation vendor or his representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Vibration Isolation:
1. No metal-to-metal contact will be permitted between fixed and floating parts.
2. Connections to Equipment: Allow for deflections equal to or greater than

equipment deflections. Electrical, drain, piping connections, and other items
made to rotating or reciprocating equipment (pumps, compressors, etc.)
which rests on vibration isolators, shall be isolated from building structure for
first three hangers or supports.
3. Common Foundation: Mount each electric motor on same foundation as

driven machine. Hold driving motor and driven machine in positive rigid
alignment with provision for adjusting motor alignment and belt tension.

SECTION 15071
Bases shall be level throughout length and width. Provide shims to facilitate
pipe connections, leveling, and bolting.
4. Provide heat shields where elastomers are subject to temperatures over 38

degrees C (l00 degrees F).
5. Extend bases for pipe elbow supports at discharge and suction connections
at pumps. Pipe elbow supports shall not short circuit pump vibration to
structure.
6. Non-rotating equipment such as heat exchangers and convertors shall be

mounted on isolation units having the same static deflection as the isolation
hangers or support of the pipe connected to the equipment.
B. Inspection and Adjustments: Check for vibration and noise transmission through
connections, piping, ductwork, foundations, and walls. Adjust, repair, or replace
isolators as required to reduce vibration and noise transmissions to specified levels.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust vibration isolators after piping systems are filled and equipment is at operating
weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal

operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they
are out of contact during normal operation.
C. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4inch (6-mm)
movement during start and stop.
D. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
E. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode
of operation.
G. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's recommendations to

resist seismic forces.

SECTION 15071
SELECTION GUIDE FOR VIBRATION ISOLATORS
50FT FLOOR SPAN

EQUIPMENT BASE ISOL MIN
TYPE TYPE DEFL
REFRIGERATION MACHINE
ABSORPTION --- SP 2”
PACKAGED R SP 2.5
HERMETIC
OPEN B SP 3.5
CENTRIFUGAL
ROTARY-SCREW --- N 0.40
RECIPROCATING
500 - 750 RPM R SP 3.5
751 RPM & OVER R SP 2.5
COMPRESSORS AND VACUUM PUMPS
UP THROUGH 1- --- D,L,W ---
1/2 HP
2 HP AND OVER
500 - 750 RPM --- S 2.5
750 RPM & OVER --- S 2.5
PUMPS
UP --- D,L, ---
TO W
CLOSE 1-/2
COUPLED HP
2 HP I S 2”
&
BASE OVE
MOUNTED R
I S 2”
I S 2”
I S 2.5
ROOF VENTILATORS

SECTION 15071
ABOVE OCCUPIED AREAS:

5 HP & OVER CB S 1.0
CENTRIFUGAL BLOWERS
UP TO 50 HP
UP TO 200 RPM B S 3.5
201 - 300 RPM B S 3.5
301 - 500 RPM B S 3.5
501 RPM & OVER B S 2.5
60 HP & OVER
UP TO 300 RPM I S 3.5
301 - 500 RPM I S 3.5
501 RPM & OVER I S 2.5
COOLING TOWERS
UP TO 500 RPM --- SP 3.5
501 RPM & OVER --- SP 2.5
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES
UP TO 25 HP I S 2.5
30 THRU 100 HP I S 3.5
125 HP & OVER I S 4.5
AIR HANDLING UNIT PACKAGES
SUSPENDED
UP THRU 5 HP --- H 2”
7-1/2 HP & OVER
UP TO 500 RPM --- H,TH 2”
R
501 RPM & OVER --- H,TH 2”
R
FLOOR MOUNTED:
UP THRU 5 HP --- S 2”
7-1/2 HP & OVER

UP TO 500 RPM R S,THR 2”
501 RPM & OVER R S,THR 2”
IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL AND VANE AXIAL
FANS, FLOOR MOUNTED: (APR9)
UP THRU 50 HP:
UP TO 300 RPM R S 3.5
301 - 500 RPM R S 2.5
501 - & OVER R S 2.5
60 HP AND OVER
301 - 500 RPM R S 3.5
501 RPM & OVER R S 2.5
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Mechanical Insulation SECTION 15080
PART 1 – GENERAL ........................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 RELATED WORK ....................................................................................................................... 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS............................................................................................................................. 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................................... 6
2.1 INSULATION FACINGS AND JACKETS ........................................................................................... 6
2.2 FLEXIBLE CLOSED CELL ELASTOMERIC RUBBER INSULATION (BASE OFFER FOR DUCTWORK) ........ 7
2.3 CLOSED-CELL POLYOLEFIN FOAM INSULATION (ALTERNATIVE OFFER FOR DUCTWORK)................. 8
2.4 MINERAL FIBER INSULATION (ALTERNATIVE OFFER FOR DUCTWORK) ........................................... 8
2.5 FLEXIBLE CLOSED CELL ELASTOMERIC RUBBER INSULATION ....................................................... 9
2.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION (UNDER GENSET PACKAGE) ...................................................... 10
2.7 DUCT WRAP FOR KITCHEN HOOD GREASE DUCTS .................................................................... 10
2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORY MATERIALS ....................................................................................... 10
PART 3 – EXECUTION ...................................................................................................................... 11
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS....................................................................................................... 11
3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................... 12

Development\Mechanical\15080-Mechanical Insulation.doc
SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Field applied insulation for thermal efficiency and condensation control for
1. HVAC piping, ductwork and equipment.
2. Boiler plant mechanical systems are not included.
B. Definitions
1. ASJ: All service jacket, white finish facing or jacket.
2. Air conditioned space: Space directly supplied with heated or cooled air.
3. Cold: Equipment, ductwork or piping handling media at design temperature of

16 degrees C (60 degrees F) or below.
4. Concealed: Ductwork and piping above ceilings and in chases, interstitial

space, and pipe spaces.
5. Exposed: Piping, ductwork, and equipment exposed to view in finished areas

including mechanical, Boiler Plant and electrical equipment rooms or
exposed to outdoor weather. Attics and crawl spaces where air handling units
are located are considered to be mechanical rooms. Shafts, chases,
interstitial spaces, unfinished attics, crawl spaces and pipe basements are
not considered finished areas.
6. FSK: Foil-scrim-kraft facing.
7. Hot: HVAC Ductwork handling air at design temperature above 16 degrees C

(60 degrees F);HVAC and plumbing equipment or piping handling media
above 41 degrees C (105 degrees F); Boiler Plant breechings and stack
temperature range 150-370 degrees C(300-700 degrees F) and piping media
and equipment 32 to 230 degrees C(90 to 450 degrees F)
8. Density: Kcm - kilograms per cubic meter (Pcf - pounds per cubic foot).
9. Runouts: Branch pipe connections up to 25-mm (one-inch) nominal size to

fan coil units or reheat coils for terminal units.
10. Thermal conductance: Heat flow rate through materials.
a. Flat surface: Watt per square meter (BTU per hour per square foot).
b. Pipe or Cylinder: Watt per square meter (BTU per hour per linear
foot).
11. Thermal Conductivity (k): Watt per meter, per degree C (BTU per inch
thickness, per hour, per square foot, per degree F temperature difference).
12. CH: Chilled water supply.
13. CHR: Chilled water return.
14. RS: Refrigerant suction.

1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01340 - Sample and Shop Drawings
B. Section 07841 – Through penetration Firestopping Systems
C. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
A. Refer to article QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 15010.
B. Criteria:
1. Comply with NFPA 90A, particularly paragraphs 2-3.3.1 through 2-3.3.5; 2-

3.10.2(a); and 3-4.6.4, parts of which are quoted as follows:
a. 2-3.3.1 Pipe insulation and coverings, duct coverings, duct linings,

vapor retarder facings, adhesive, fasteners, tapes and supplementary
materials added to air ducts, plenums, panels and duct silencers
used in duct systems shall have, in the form in which they are used, a
maximum flame spread index of 25 without evidence of continued
progressive combustion and a maximum smoke developed index of
50. Where these products are to be applied with adhesive, they shall
be tested with such adhesive applied or the adhesive used shall have
a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke
developed index of 50 when in the final dry state.
b. Closure systems for use with rigid and flexible air ducts tested in
accordance with UL 181, Standard for Safety Factory-Made Air Ducts
and Air Connectors, shall have been tested and listed in accordance
with UL 181A, Standard for Safety Closure Systems for Use with
Rigid Air Ducts and Air Connectors, or UL 181B, Standard for Safety
Closure Systems for Use with Flexible Air Ducts and Air Connectors,
and used in accordance with the conditions of their listings.
Exception No. 1: This requirement shall not apply to air duct

weatherproof coverings where they are located entirely outside of a
building, do not penetrate a wall or roof, and do not create an
exposure hazard.
Exception No. 2: Smoke detectors required by 4-4.2.
c. 2-3.3.2 Air duct, panel and plenum coverings and linings and pipe
insulation and coverings shall not flame, glow, smolder, or smoke
when tested in accordance with a similar test for pipe coverings;
ASTM C 411, Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of
High-Temperature Thermal Insulation at the temperature to which
they are exposed in service. In no case shall the test temperature be
below 250 degrees F (121 degrees C)
d. 2-3.3.3 Air duct coverings shall not extend through walls or floors that
are required to be fire stopped or required to have a fire resistance
rating.
Exception: Where such coverings meet the requirements of 3-4.6.4.
e. 2-3.3.4 Air duct linings shall be interrupted at fire dampers to prevent

interference with the operation of devices.

f. 2-3.3.5 Air duct coverings shall not be installed so as to conceal or

prevent the use of any service openings.
g. 2-3.10.2(a) All materials exposed to the airflow shall be

noncombustible or limited combustible and have a maximum smoke
developed index of 50.
h. 3-4.6.4 Where air ducts pass through walls, floors or partitions that
are required to have a fire resistance rating and where fire dampers
are not required, the opening in the construction around the air duct
shall be as follows:
1) Not exceeding a 2.5 cm (one inch) average clearance on all

sides.
2) Filled solid with an approved material capable of preventing

the passage of flame and hot gases sufficient to ignite cotton
waste when subjected to the time-temperature fire conditions
required for fire barrier penetration as specified in NFPA 251,
Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building
Construction and Materials.
Exception: Where fire dampers are installed, proper clearance for

expansion shall be maintained.
2. Test methods: ASTM E84, UL 723, or NFPA 255.
3. Specified k factors are at 24 degrees C (75 degrees F) mean temperature

unless stated otherwise. Where optional thermal insulation material is used,
select thickness to provide thermal conductance no greater than that for the
specified material. For pipe, use insulation manufacturer's published heat
flow tables. For domestic hot water supply and return, run out insulation and
condensation control insulation, no thickness adjustment need be made.
4. All materials shall be compatible and suitable for service temperature, and
shall not contribute to corrosion or otherwise attack surface to which applied
in either the wet or dry state.
5. Listings or Certification from Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or an equivalent

third party testing laboratory will be required to show that surface burning
characteristics for materials to continue to adhere to the specified ratings.
C. Every package or standard container of insulation or accessories delivered to the job

site for use must have a manufacturer's stamp or label giving the name of the
manufacturer and description of the material.
D. General Requirement for CHW Pipe Insulation

The Contractor shall comply with the following performance specifications relating to
CHW piping system (equipment, piping, accessories):
 The insulation thickness indicated in the technical specifications are the minimum
thickness to be provided, regardless of whether the performance specifications
specified below are being met or not.
 The temperature rise due to heat gain in the piping system from the source
(chiller) to the farthest AHU/FCU or any point in the piping system shall not
exceed 1.11ºC (2ºF) CHW temperature from the chiller is 5.56ºC (42ºF).

 The insulation thickness and also the workmanship shall be such that the CHW
distribution system (equipment, piping, accessories) shall not have any
condensation at any part and portion thereof, or at any worst case operating
condition including that of ambient.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. All information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance

with drawings and specifications and ASTM, BS, DIN, Federal and Military
specifications.
a. Insulation materials: Specify each type used and state surface
burning characteristics.
b. Insulation facings and jackets: Each type used. Make it clear that
white finish will be furnished for exposed ductwork, casings and
equipment.
c. Insulation accessory materials: Each type used.
d. Manufacturer's installation and fitting fabrication instructions for
flexible unicellular insulation.
e. Make reference to applicable specification paragraph numbers for
coordination.
C. Samples:
1. Each type of insulation: Minimum size 100 mm (4 inches) square for

board/block/ blanket; 150 mm (6 inches) long, full diameter for round types.
2. Each type of facing and jacket: Minimum size 100 mm (4 inches square).
3. Each accessory material: Minimum 120 ML (4 ounce) liquid container or 120

gram (4 ounce) dry weight for adhesives / cement / mastic.
D. For equipment and material submittals, provide certificate of origin to be included in

publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.
A. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):

HH-B-100 - (Rev. B) Barrier Material Vapor (For Pipe, Duct and
Equipment Thermal, Insulation)
L-P 535 E - Plastic Sheet (Sheeting): Plastic Strip; Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) and Poly (Vinyl Chloride - Vinyl Acetate),
Rigid.
B. Military Specifications (Mil. Spec.):
MIL-A-3316C (2) - Adhesives, Fire-Resistant, Thermal Insulation
MIL-A-24179A - Adhesive, Flexible Unicellular-Plastic NOTICE 1

Thermal Insulation
MIL-C-19565C (1) - Coating Compounds, Thermal Insulation, Fire-and

Water-Resistant, Vapor-Barrier

MIL-C-20079H - Cloth, Glass; Tape, Textile Glass; and Thread, Glass

and Wire-Reinforced Glass
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
C411 - Standard test method for Hot-Surface Performance

of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation
C449 - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating

and Finishing Cement
C533 - Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
C534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal

Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form
C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation
C1126 - Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal

Insulation
D1171 - Ozone Resistance
D1667 - Specific Gravity
D1668-Rev.A - Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for Roofing and

Waterproofing
E84-Rev.A - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
E662 - Smoke Density
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems
96 - Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of

Commercial Cooking Operations.
251 - Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building

Construction Materials.
255 - Method of Tests of Surface Burning Characteristics

of Building Materials
E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
181 - Standard for Safety Factory -Made Air Ducts and Air
Connectors
181A - Standard for Safety Closure systems for use with

Rigid Air Ducts and Air Connectors
181B - Standard for Safety Closure Systems for use with

Flexible Air Ducts and Air Connectors
723 - UL Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials with Revision of
12/98

F. British Standards
BS 476 part 7 - Ignitability and Spread of Flame; Class “1”
BS 874 part 2 - Thermal Conductivity
BS 4370 part 2 - Water Vapor Permeability
G. DIN Standards
DIN 52612/52613 - Thermal Conductivity
DIN 52615 - Water-Vapour Diffusion Resistance Factor
DIN 53434 - Water Absorption
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION FACINGS AND JACKETS
A. Fed. Spec. HH-B-100 for Vapor Barrier Type I and II: The mold and mildew test
requirement is waived.
1. Type I, low vapor transmission (0.02 perm rating), Beach puncture 50 units:
Use for insulation facing on exposed ductwork, casings and equipment, and
for pipe insulation jackets. Facings and jackets shall be white all service
(ASJ) suitable for painting without sizing.
2. Type II, medium vapor transmission, Beach puncture 25 units: Foil-Scrim-

Kraft (FSK) type for concealed ductwork and equipment.
3. Pre-sized Glass Cloth Jacket, Beach puncture 100 units: Not less than 240
grams per square meter (7.8 ounces per square yard), with integral vapor
barrier where required; for use where specified and in lieu of Type I and Type
II jacket at the Contractor’s option.
4. Factory composite materials may be used provided that they have been
tested and certified by the manufacturer, and witnessed by the authority
having jurisdiction to meet Beach puncture units specified above. Witnessing
of the test may be waived by the authority having jurisdiction.
5. Fire and smoke treatment of jackets and facings shall be permanent. The use
of soluble treatments is not acceptable.
6. Pipe insulation jackets shall have a minimum 40 mm (1 ½ inch) lap at

longitudinal joints and not less than 75 mm (3 inch) butt strips at end joints.
Facing on board, blanket and block insulation shall have 50 mm (2 inch) laps
or a minimum 75 mm (3 inch) butt strips. Butt strips may be self-sealing type
with factory applied pressure sensitive adhesive.
7. PVC Jackets (for indoor CHW Piping): Shall be according to Fed. Spec. L-P-
535, Composition A, Type II, Grade GU. One-piece pre-molded plastic
covers for fittings, flanges, and valves are limited to indoor piping only.

B. Protective Coverings
Provide protective jackets over insulation as follows:
a. All piping and ducts exposed to outdoor weather.

b. Piping exposed in building, within 1800 mm (6 feet) of the floor.
Jacket may be applied with pop rivets. Provide aluminum angle ring
escutcheons at wall, ceiling or floor penetrations.
c. A 50 mm (2 inch) overlap is required at longitudinal and
circumferential joints.
Protective coverings shall be installed on areas of insulation that are exposed to

weather or subject to Mechanical damage. The protective covering shall be:
1. “Arma-Check Silver” multi-layer laminate of Aluminum, coated with a UV

protective film and backed with flexible PVC film. The material should be
adhered with Armaflex 520 Adhesive or equivalent, and all joins and seams
secured with “Arma-Chek Silver Tape”. Insulation shall be in all cases to the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. High density rubber cladding of the “Arma-chek R” type bonded using an

appropriate full contact adhesive with a minimum 50mm overlap at all butt
joints and longitudinal seams. A weather-proof mastic sealant shall be
applied over all seams and joints. All materials shall be overlapped and
staggered in such a way as to ensure a watershed is always provided.
Installation shall be in all cases to the manufacturer’s recommendations. All
excess adhesive visible on the surface of the completed assembly shall be
removed using an appropriate cleaning material.
3. Metal Protective Jacket:
a. Sheet aluminum: ASTM B209, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper, 0.4 mm

(0.016 inch) thick. Provide moisture barrier lining for service
temperature 16 ºC (60 ºF) or less except where applied over a Type I
or II jacket. Longitudinal lap shall be at least 50 mm (2 inches) wide.
For service temperature 16 ºC (60 ºF) or less, seal all jacket laps in
accordance with Mil. Spec. MIL-C-19565, Type II Coating.
b. Fitting covers: Factory fabricated from not lighter than 0.5 mm (0.020
inch) thick type 3003 sheet aluminum.
c. Bands: 20 mm (3/4 inch) wide aluminum on maximum 450 mm (18

inch) centers.
2.2 FLEXIBLE CLOSED CELL ELASTOMERIC RUBBER INSULATION (BASE OFFER FOR DUCTWORK)
A. ASTM C534, k = 0.033 Watt per meter, per degree C (0.27), flame spread not over
25, smoke developed not over 50, for temperatures from minus 4 degrees C (40
degrees F) to 93 degrees C (200 degrees F). No jacket required except those
required under item 2.1 B above.
B. Insulation Thickness
1. Exposed, unlined ductwork and equipment in unfinished areas, mechanical

and electrical equipment rooms, and attics containing air handling units, and
ductwork exposed to outdoor weather:

a. 50 mm (2 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ (white all service

jacket): Supply air ducts exposed to ambient, unlined air handling
units, and final filter housing. (40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick for above
ceilings below roof deck areas (supply and return).
b. 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ: Mixed air
plenums and pre-filter housing.
c. 25mm (1 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ: Supply and return
air ducts other than the above.
d. Outside air ducts: No insulation required.
2.3 CLOSED-CELL POLYOLEFIN FOAM INSULATION (ALTERNATIVE OFFER FOR DUCTWORK)
A. Closed-cell polyolefin foam insulation may be provided for ductwork in lieu of mineral
fiber insulation. Insulation efficiency of polyolefin foam must not be less than that of
the specified thickness of mineral fiber insulation, where thickness of polyolefin foam
insulation is not specified.
B. Electron Beam (Physically) Crosslinked, closed cell Polyolefin foam with factory
applied reinforced aluminum foil and acrylic adhesive backing, 25kg/m³ density,
maximum 0.032 W/mK @ 20ºC, non-hydroscopic, water vapor permeability better
than 0.8gm/m²/24hrs (90% RH, 38 ºC), -80 to 100 ºC, service temperature, Class O
fire rating according to BS 476 parts 6 & 7.
1. Exposed, unlined ductwork and equipment in unfinished areas mechanical

and electrical equipment rooms and office containing air handling units, and
a. 25mm (1 inch) complete with foil adhesive and aluminum foil:

Supply air ducts exposed to ambient, unlined air handling units,
and final filter housing. 19mm (3/4 inch) thick for above ceiling
below roof deck areas (supply and return).
b. 19mm (3/4 inch) thick complete with foil adhesive and aluminum foil
in mixed air plenums and pre-filter housing and to all supply and
return air ducts other than the above.
2.4 MINERAL FIBER INSULATION (ALTERNATIVE OFFER FOR DUCTWORK)
A, Note the NFPA 90A building characteristic requirements of 25/50 in paragraph 1.3.B.
Refer to paragraph 3.1 for items not to be insulated.
B. ASTM C612 (Board, Block), Class 1 or 2, K = 0.037 Watt per meter, per degree C
(0.26 BTU-in/ft² hr ºF), external insulation for temperatures up to 204 ºC (400 ºF).
1. Exposed, unlined ductwork and equipment in unfinished areas, mechanical

and electrical equipment rooms, and attics containing air handling units, and
a. 50 mm (2 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ (white all service

jacket): Supply air ducts exposed to ambient, unlined air handling
units, and final filter housing. (40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick for above
ceilings below roof deck areas (supply and return).
b. 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ: Mixed air
plenums and pre-filter housing.
c. 25mm (1 inch) thick insulation faced with ASJ: Supply and return
air ducts other than the above.
d. Outside air ducts: No insulation required.

C. Firestop Pipe and Duct Insulation:
1. Provide firestopping insulation at fire and smoke barriers through

penetrations. Firestopping insulation shall be UL listed and as defined in
Section 07841.
2. Pipe and duct penetrations requiring fire stop insulation including, but not
limited to the following:
a. Pipe risers through mechanical room floors.

b. Pipe or duct chase walls and floors.
c. Smoke partitions.
d. Fire partitions.
2.5 FLEXIBLE CLOSED CELL ELASTOMERIC RUBBER INSULATION
A. ASTM C534, k = 0.033 Watt per meter, per degree C (0.27), flame spread not over
25, smoke developed not over 50, for temperatures from minus 4 degrees C (40
degrees F) to 93 degrees C (200 degrees F). No jacket required except those
required under item 2.1 B above.
B. Pipe insulation: Nominal thickness in millimeters (inches are specified in table below
for piping above ground:
Nominal Pipe Size 25 (1) & 32-65 75-250 350 & Up

millimeters (inches) below) (1¼-2½) (3”-10”) (14” & up)
(Tube) (Tube) (Sheet) (Sheet)
1. 4-16 ºC (40-60 ºF) (CH, 25 32 40 50

CHR) (1.0) (1 1/4) (1.5) (2)
a. Runouts to fan coil 20 25 32 -

units, cooling coil (0.75) (1.0) (1 ¼)
condensate piping
2. 10 ºC (50 ºF) and less, 20 25

RS for DX refrigerants (0.75) (1)
C. Use Class S (Sheet), 25 mm 1 (inch) thick for the following:
1. Chilled water pumps
2. Chillers, insulate any cold chiller surfaces subject to condensation which has
not been factory insulated.
3. Expansion tank, chemical pot feeder, water filter/separator.

2.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION (UNDER GENSET PACKAGE)
A. ASTM C533:
Type I Type II
Use temperature, maximum ºC (ºF) 649 (1200) 927 (1700)

Density (dry), max kg/m ³ (lb/ft³) 240 (15) 352 (22)
Thermal Conductivity:
W/m K (Btu in/h ft² ºF) @ mean temp of 93 ºC 0.065 (0.45) 0.078 (0.54)
(200 ºF)
Surface Burning Characteristics:
Flame Spread Index, Max 0 0
Smoke Density Index, Max 0
B. Engine Exhaust Insulation for Emergency Generators.
Type II, Class D, 65 mm (2 ½ inch) nominal thickness. Cover exhaust completely

form engine through roof or wall construction, including muffler.
2.7 DUCT WRAP FOR KITCHEN HOOD GREASE DUCTS
A. Light weight, high temperature Rockwool of 50mm (2 inches) thick with low thermal
conductivity K value of 0.036 W/m ºC (0.250 Btu in/hr ft² Fº) at mean temperature of
20 ºC (68 ºF) with nominal density value of 50 – 60 kg/m3.
B. Material shall be fully encapsulated by UL classified aluminum foil and tested to

ASTM E84 standard.
C. Material shall be UL tested for internal grease fire to 1093 ºC (2,000 ºF) with zero
clearance and for through-penetration firestop.
D. Provide stainless steel jacket for all exterior and exposed interior ductwork.
E. Material shall be UL classified for 1 hour, 2 hours, fire rating for grease duct
enclosure, and meet NFPA 96 requirements for direct applied insulating material to
grease ducts with zero clearance.
F. Material flame spread and smoke developed ratings shall not be higher than 5, as per
ASTM E 84/UL 723 flammability test.
2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Insulation inserts at pipe supports: Provide for all insulated piping as per Section
15050, Item 2.2L
B. Adhesive, Mastic, Cement
1. Mil. Spec. MIL-A-3316, Class 1: Jacket and lap adhesive and protective finish
coating for insulation.
2. Mil. Spec. MIL-A-3316, Class 2: Adhesive for laps and for adhering insulation
to metal surface.
3. Mil. Spec. MIL-A-24179, Type II Class 1: Adhesive for installing flexible

unicellular insulation and for laps and general use.
4. Mil. Spec. MIL-C-19565, Type I: Protective finish for outdoor use.

5. Mil. Spec. MIL-C-19565, Type I or Type II: Vapor barrier compound for indoor
use.
6. ASTM C449: Mineral fiber hydraulic-setting thermal insulating and finishing

cement.
7. Other: Insulation manufacturer’s published recommendations.
C. Mechanical Fasteners:
1. Pins, anchors: Welded pins, or metal or nylon anchors with tin-coated or fiber
washer, or clips. Pin diameter shall be as recommended by the insulation
manufacturer.
2. Staples: Outward clinching monel or stainless steel.
3. Wire: 1.3 mm thick (18 gage) soft annealed galvanized, or 1.9 mm (14 gage)
copper clad steel or nickel copper alloy.
4. Bands: 20mm (3/3 inch) nominal width, brass, galvanized steel, aluminum or
stainless steel.
D. Reinforcement and Finishes:
1. Glass Fabric, open weave: ASTM D1668, Type III (resin treated) and Type I
(asphalt treated).
2. Glass fiber fitting tape: Mil.Spec. MIL-C-20079, Type II, Class 1.
3. Tape for Flexible Unicellular Insulation: Scoth No. 472, Nashua PE-12, or
approved equal recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
4. Hexagonal wire netting: 25 mm (one inch) mesh, 0.85 mm thick (22 gage)
galvanized steel.
5. Corner beads: 50 mm (2 inch) by 50 mm (2 inch), 0.55 mm thick (26 gage)

galvanized steel; or, 25 mm (1 inch) by 25 mm (1 inch), 0.47 mm thick (28
gage) aluminum angle adhered to 50 mm (2 inch) by 50 mm (2 inch) Kraft
paper.
6. PVC fitting cover: Fed. Spec. L-P-535, Composition A, 11-86 Type II, Grade
GU, with Form B Mineral Fiber insert, for media temperature ºC (40 ºF) to
121 ºC (250 ºF). Below 4 ºF) and above 121 ºC (250 ºF) provide double layer
insert. Provide color matching, vapor barrier, pressure sensitive tape.
E. Firestopping Material, Other than Pipe and Duct Insulation: Refer to Section 07841.
A. Required pressure tests of duct and piping joints and connections shall be completed
and the work approved by the Resident Engineer for application of insulation. Surface
shall be clean and dry with all foreign materials, such as dirt, oil, loose scale and rust
removed.
B. Except for specific exceptions, insulate entire specified equipment, piping (pipe,
fittings, valves, accessories), and duct systems. Insulate each pipe and duct
individually. Do not use scrap pieces of insulation where a full length section will fit.

C. Where removal of insulation of piping, ductwork and equipment is required to comply

with Asbestos Abatement, such areas shall be reinsulated to comply with this
specification.
D. Insulation materials shall be installed in a first class manner with smooth and even
surfaces, with jackets and facings drawn tight and smoothly cemented down at all
laps. Insulation shall be continuous through all sleeves and openings, except at fire
dampers and duct heaters (NFPA 90A). Vapor retarders shall be continuous and
uninterrupted throughout systems with operating temperature 16 degrees C (60
degrees F) and below. Lap and seal vapor barrier over ends and exposed edges of
insulation. Anchors, supports and other metal projections through insulation on cold
surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed for a minimum length of 150 mm (6
inches).
E. Install vapor stops at all insulation terminations on either side of valves, pumps and
equipment and particularly in straight lengths of pipe insulation.
F. Construct insulation on parts of equipment such as chilled water pumps and heads of
chillers, convertors and heat exchangers that must be opened periodically for
maintenance or repair, so insulation can be removed and replaced without damage.
Install insulation with bolted 1 mm thick (20 gage) galvanized steel or aluminum
covers as complete units, or in sections, with all necessary supports, and split to
coincide with flange/split of the equipment.
G. HVAC work not to be insulated:
1. Internally insulated ductwork and air handling units. Omit insulation on relief
air ducts.
2. Exhaust air ducts and plenums, and ventilation exhaust air shafts, unless
otherwise specified.
G. Apply insulation materials subject to the manufacturer's recommended temperature

limits. Apply adhesives, mastic and coatings at the manufacturer's recommended
minimum coverage.
3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Mineral Fiber Board:
1. Faced board: Apply board on pins spaced not more than 300 mm (12 inches)
on center each way, and not less than 75 mm (3 inches) from each edge of
board. In addition to pins, apply insulation bonding adhesive to entire
underside of horizontal metal surfaces. Butt insulation edges tightly and seal
all joints with laps and butt strips. After applying speed clips cut pins off flush
and apply vapor seal patches over clips.
2. Plain board:
a. Insulation shall be scored, beveled or mitered to provide tight joints
and be secured to equipment with bands spaced 225 mm (9 inches)
on center for irregular surfaces or with pins and clips on flat surfaces.
Use corner beads to protect edges of insulation.
b. For hot equipment: Stretch 25 mm (1 inch) mesh wire, with edges
wire laced together, over insulation and finish with insulating and
finishing cement applied in one coat, 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick, trowel led
to a smooth finish.
c. For cold equipment: Apply meshed glass fabric in a tack coat 1.5 to
1.7 square meter per liter (60 to 70 square feet per gallon) of vapor
mastic and finish with mastic at 0.3 to 0.4 square meter per liter (12
to 15 square feet per gallon) over the entire fabric surface.

d. Chilled water pumps: Insulate with removable and replaceable 1 mm

thick (20 gage) aluminum or galvanized steel covers lined with
insulation. Seal closure joints/flanges of covers with gasket material.
Fill void space in enclosure with flexible mineral fiber insulation.
B. Closed-Cell Polyolefin Foam Insulation
1. The insulation must be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.
2. All joints should be butted firmly against each other, Seal all joints with 75mm
reinforced aluminum foil tape. No gluing of joints is required.
3. Insulate each duct separately. Flanges should be insulated with a 120mm

wide strip of insulation material, ensuring joints are sealed with 75mm
reinforced aluminum foil tape.
4. No additional vapor barrier, or coatings are required.
5. All supporting hangers should be lined with the same insulation material to
avoid excess compression of insulation. (Refer manufacturer’s instructions).
6. Ensure no air pockets during the installation of the insulation to the duct.
C. Flexible Closed-Cell Elastomeric Rubber Insulation:
1. Apply insulation and fabricate fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's

installation instructions and finish with two coats of weather resistant finish as
recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
2. Pipe and tubing insulation:

a. Use proper size material. Do not stretch or strain insulation.
b. To avoid undue compression of insulation, provide cork stoppers or
wood inserts at supports as recommended by the insulation
manufacturer. Insulation shields are specified under Section 15050.
c. Where possible, slip insulation over the pipe or tubing prior to
connection, and seal the butt joints with adhesive. Where the slip-on
technique is not possible, slit the insulation and apply it to the pipe
sealing the seam and joints with contact adhesive. Optional tape
sealing, as recommended by the manufacturer, may be employed.
Make changes from mineral fiber insulation in a straight run of pipe,
not at a fitting. Seal joint with tape.
3. Apply sheet insulation to flat or large curved surfaces with 100 percent
adhesive coverage. For fittings and large pipe, apply adhesive to seams only.
D. Pipe and Duct Insulation at Penetrations of Fire or Smoke Barriers:
1. Wrap pipe or duct with firestop pipe insulation, seal jacket seam and seal and
joints to adjacent sections of insulation.
2. Seal opening between insulation and pipe sleeve with firestopping material.
3. Among pipe and duct penetrations requiring fire stop insulation are the
following:
a. Floor (platform) of interstitial space (ducts and pipes).
b. Pipe risers through mechanical room floors.
c. Pipe or duct chase walls and floors.
d. Smoke partitions.

e. Fire partitions.
F. Duct Wrap for Kitchen Hood Grease Ducts:
1. The insulation thickness, layers and installation method shall be as per

recommendations of the manufacturer to maintain the fire integrity and
performance rating.
G. Calcium Silicate Insulation:
1. The installation and fastening method shall be as per manufacturer’s

recommendations.
2. Conform to workmanship and dimensional tolerances as required by ASTM

C533 standard.
H. Weatherproofing Outdoor Insulation:
1. Piping, round and oval ducts: Protective metal jacket.
2. Plenums, casing, fans, rectangular or square ducts and equipments: apply

two coats of weatherproof coating, Mil. Spec. MIL-C-19565, each trowelled or
sprayed in place to a wet thickness of 6 mm (1/4 inch), reinforced with open
weave glass fabric. After the second layer of mastic has dried, coat and seal
with a layer of asphalt aluminum sealer brushed in place.
3. Flexible elastomeric cellular and polyethylene insulation: Finish with two
coats of weather resistant finish as recommended by the insulation
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Hydronic Piping SECTION 15181
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 RELATED WORKS ..................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS............................................................................................................................. 1
PART 2 – PRODUCTS......................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, PIPE SLEEVES, AND WALL CEILING PLATES ............................. 4
2.2 PIPE AND TUBING ..................................................................................................................... 4
2.3 FITTINGS FOR STEEL PIPE ......................................................................................................... 4
2.4 FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBING ................................................................................................. 5
2.5 FITTINGS FOR ALUMINUM TUBING .............................................................................................. 6
2.6 FITTINGS FOR PLASTIC PIPING ................................................................................................... 6
2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS ............................................................................................................... 6
2.8 SCREWED JOINTS..................................................................................................................... 6
2.9 VALVES ................................................................................................................................... 6
2.10 WATER FLOW MEASURING DEVICES .......................................................................................... 9
2.11 STRAINERS ............................................................................................................................ 10
2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS FOR WATER SERVICE ......................................................................... 11
2.13 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDE.......................................................................................................... 11
2.14 HYDRONIC SYSTEM COMPONENTS .......................................................................................... 11
2.15 FLEXIBLE BALL JOINTS (WHERE APPLICABLE ONLY) ................................................................... 12
2.16 WATER FILTERS AND POT CHEMICAL FEEDERS ........................................................................ 13
2.17 GAGES, PRESSURE AND COMPOUND ....................................................................................... 13
2.18 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PROVISIONS .......................................................................... 13
2.19 THERMOMETERS .................................................................................................................... 13
2.20 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL ....................................................................................................... 14
PART 3 - EXECUTION....................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 14
3.2 PIPE JOINTS ........................................................................................................................... 15
3.3 EXPANSION JOINTS (BELLOWS AND SLIP TYPE) (WHERE APPLICABLE ONLY) ................................ 15
3.4 SEISMIC BRACING .................................................................................................................. 15
3.5 LEAK TESTING........................................................................................................................ 16
3.6 FLUSHING AND CLEANING PIPING SYSTEMS .............................................................................. 16
3.7 WATER TREATMENT ............................................................................................................... 17
3.8 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TEST AND INSTRUCTION .......................................................... 17

Development\Mechanical\15181-Hydronic Piping.doc
SECTION 15181
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Water piping to connect HVAC equipment, including the following:
1. Chilled water, condenser water, and drain piping.
2. Extension of domestic water make-up piping.
1.2 RELATED WORKS
A. Section 15010 – Mechanical General Provisions
B. Section 07841 - Through penetration Firestopping Systems
C. Section 15071 – Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
D. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: General mechanical

requirements and items, which are common to more than one section of Division 15.
E. Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation.
F. Section 15185 - Hydronic Pumps.
G. Section 15189 - HVAC Water Treatment Systems.
H. Section 15900 - HVAC Instrumentation and Controls.
Section 15010, which include welding qualifications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
1. Pipe and equipment supports. Submit calculations for variable spring and
constant support hangers.
2. Pipe and tubing, with specification, class or type, and schedule.
3. Pipe fittings, including miscellaneous adapters and special fittings.
4. Flanges, gaskets and bolting.
5. Valves of all types.
6. Strainers.
7. Flexible connectors for water service.
8. Pipe alignment guides.

9. Expansion joints.
10. Expansion compensators.
11. Flexible ball joints: Catalog sheets, performance charts, schematic drawings,
specifications and installation instructions.
12. All specified hydronic system components.
13. Water flow measuring devices.
14. Gages.
15. Thermometers and test wells.
16. Seismic bracing details for piping.
C. Manufacturer's certified data report, Form No. U-1, for ASME pressure vessels:
1. Air separators.
2. Expansion tanks.
D. Coordination Drawings: Refer to Article Drawings and Approval of Section 15010.
E. As-Built Piping Diagrams: Provide drawing as follows for chilled water, condenser
water and heating hot water system and other central plant equipment.
1. One wall-mounted stick file for prints. Mount stick file in the chiller plant or
adjacent control room along with control diagram stick file.
2. One set of reproducible drawings.

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American National Institute Standard (ANSI):
B1.20.1- Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings
B16.4- Gray Iron Threaded Fittings
B16.5- Welding Flanges and Bolting
B16.9- Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings
B16.11- Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
B16.24 - Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class
150,300, 400, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500
B16.39 - Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions, Classes 150, 250, and
300

B16.42 - Flange Union with Dielectric Gasket and Hot Sleeves
B31.1- Power Piping
B40.1 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: SEC VIII D1-2001, Pressure Vessels, Division 1
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and

Seamless
A106 - Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service
A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,

Flanges, and Pipe Fittings
A183 - Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
A216 - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for

Fusion Welding, for High Temperature Service
A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength
A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
B62 - Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings
B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube
F439 - Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic

Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
F441 - Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe,

Schedules 40 and 80
D. American Welding Society (AWS):
B2.1 - Welding Procedure and Performance Qualifications
E. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fitting Industry, Inc.:
SP-67 - Butterfly Valves
SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
SP-71- Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves
SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded
Ends
F. Military Specifications (Mil. Spec.):
MIL-S-901D- Shock Tests, H.I. (High Impact) Shipboard Machinery,

Equipment, and Systems

G. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NB): Relieving Capacities
of Safety Valves and Relief Valves
H. Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association: TEMA 18th Edition, 2000
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, PIPE SLEEVES, AND WALL CEILING PLATES
Provide in accordance with Section 15050.
2.2 PIPE AND TUBING
A. Chilled Water and Condenser Water Piping (above ground):
1. Steel: ASTM A53 Grade B seamless or ERW, Schedule 40.
Note: Spiral welded pipes may be used in lieu of ERW pipes, provided
working pressure is equal to or greater than that of ERW pipes of
same size.
2. Copper water tube option: ASTM B88, Type K or L, hard drawn. Soft drawn
tubing, 20 mm (3/4 inch) and larger, may be used for runouts to floor
mounted fan coil units.
3. HDPE: For embedded CHW and COW pipes subject to corrosion, HDPE
pipes may be used in lieu of steel pipes provided specified working pressures
are complied with.
B. Extension of Domestic Water Make-up and Water Piping: ASTM B88, Type K or L,
hard drawn copper tubing.
C. Cooling Coil Condensate Drain Piping:
1. From air handling units: PVC pipe conforming to ASTM D2729, ISO4435 and
PVC fittings conforming to ASTM D2729/ASTM D3311.
2. From fan coil or other terminal units: Sch 80 flame retardant polypropylene
plastic.
D. Chemical Feed Piping for Condenser Water Treatment: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
(CPVC), Schedule 80, ASTM F441.
2.3 FITTINGS FOR STEEL PIPE
A. 65 mm (2-1/2 inches) and Larger: Welded or flanged joints. Mechanical couplings and
fittings shall be used for water piping only whenever shown in the design drawing.
1. Butt welding fittings: ASME B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting
piping. Elbows shall be long radius type, unless otherwise noted.
2. Welding flanges and bolting: ASME B16.5:
a. Water service: Weld neck or slip-on, plain face, with 6 mm (1/8 inch)
thick full face neoprene gasket suitable for 104 degrees C (220
degrees F).

1) Contractor's option: Convoluted, cold formed 150 pound

steel flanges, with teflon gaskets, may be used for water
service.
b. Flange bolting: Carbon steel machine bolts or studs and nuts, ASTM
A307, Grade B.
B. 50 mm (2 inches) and Smaller: Screwed or welded. Mechanical couplings are

optional for water piping only.
1. Butt welding: ASME B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping.
2. Forged steel, socket welding or threaded: ASME B16.11.
3. Screwed: 150 pound malleable iron, ASME B16.3. 125 pound cast iron,
ASME B16.4, may be used in lieu of malleable iron, except for steam and
steam condensate piping. Provide 300 pound malleable iron, ASME B16.3 for
steam and steam condensate piping. Cast iron fittings are piping is not
acceptable for steam and steam condensate piping. Bushing reduction of a
single pipe size, or use of close nipples, is not acceptable.
4. Unions: ASME B16.39.
5. Water hose connection adapter: Brass, pipe thread to 20 mm (3/4 inch)

garden hose thread, with hose cap nut.
C. Welded Branch and Tap Connections: Forged steel weldolets, or branchlets and
thredolets may be used for branch connections up to one pipe size smaller than the
main. Forged steel half-couplings, ASME B16.11 may be used for drain, vent and
gage connections.
D. Mechanical Pipe Couplings and Fittings: May be used, with cut or roll grooved pipe, in
water service up to 110 degrees C (230 degrees F) in lieu of welded, screwed or
flanged connections and as shown in the design drawings.
1. Grooved mechanical couplings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47 or ductile iron,

ASTM A536, fabricated in two or more parts, securely held together by two or
more track-head, square, or oval-neck bolts, ASTM A183.
2. Gaskets: Rubber product recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the

intended service.
3. Grooved end fittings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47; ductile iron, ASTM A536; or
steel, ASTM A53 or A106, designed to accept grooved mechanical couplings.
Tap-in type branch connections are acceptable.
2.4 FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBING
A. Solder Joint:
1. Joints shall be made up in accordance with recommended practices of the

materials applied. Apply 95/5 tin and antimony on all copper piping.
2. Mechanically formed tee connection in water and drain piping: Form

mechanically extracted collars in a continuous operation by drilling pilot hole
and drawing out tube surface to form collar, having a height of not less than
three times the thickness of tube wall. Adjustable collaring device shall insure
proper tolerance and complete uniformity of the joint. Notch and dimple
joining branch tube in a single process to provide free flow where the branch
tube penetrates the fitting.

B. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24.
2.5 FITTINGS FOR ALUMINUM TUBING
2.6 FITTINGS FOR PLASTIC PIPING
A. Schedule 80, socket type for solvent welding.
B. Polypropylene drain piping: Flame retardant, drainage pattern.
C. Chemical feed piping for condenser water treatment: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
(CPVC), Schedule 80, ASTM F439.
2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Provide where copper tubing and ferrous metal pipe are joined.
B. 50 mm (2 inches) and Smaller: Threaded dielectric union, ASME B16.39.
C. 65 mm (2 1/2 inches) and Larger: Flange union with dielectric gasket and bolt
sleeves, ASME B16.42.
D. Temperature Rating, 99 degrees C (210 degrees F) for water systems, 121 degrees
C (250 degrees F) for steam condensate and as required for steam service.
2.8 SCREWED JOINTS
A. Pipe Thread: ANSI B1.20.
B. Lubricant or Sealant: Oil and graphite or other compound approved for the intended
service.
2.9 VALVES
A. Asbestos packing is not acceptable.
B. All valves of the same type shall be products of a single manufacturer. Provide gate
and globe valves with packing that can be replaced with the valve under full working
pressure.
C. Provide chain operators for valves 100 mm (4 inches) and larger when the centerline
is located 2400 mm (8 feet) or more above the floor or operating platform.
D. Gate Valves:
1. 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller: MSS-SP80, Bronze, 1034 kPa (150 lb.),

wedge disc, rising stem, union bonnet.
2. 65 mm (2 1/2 inches) and larger: Flanged, outside screw and yoke.
a. High pressure steam 413 kPa (60 psig) and above nominal MPS
system): Cast steel body, ASTM A216 grade WCB, 1034 kPa (150
psig) at 260 degrees C (500 degrees F), 11-1/2 to 13 percent chrome
stainless steel solid disc and seats. Provide factory installed bypass
with globe valve on valves 100 mm (4 inches) and larger.
b. All other services: MSS-SP 70, iron body, bronze mounted, 861 kPa
(125 psig) wedge disc.

E. Globe and Angle Valves:
1. 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller: MSS-SP 80, bronze, 1034 kPa (150 lb.) Globe
and angle valves shall be union bonnet with metal plug type disc.
2. 65 mm (2 1/2 inches) and larger:
a. Globe valves for high pressure steam 413 kPa (60 psig) and above
nominal MPS system): Cast steel body, ASTM A216 grade WCB,
flanged, OS&Y, 1034 kPa (150 psig) at 260 degrees C (500 degrees
F), 11-1/2 to 13 percent chrome stainless steel disc and renewable
seat rings.
b. All other services: 861 kPa (125 psig), flanged, iron body, bronze
trim, MSS-SP-85 for globe valves and MSS-SP-71 for check valves.
F. Non-Slam or Silent Check Valve: Spring loaded double disc swing check or internally
guided flat disc lift type check for bubble tight shut-off. Provide where check valves
are shown in chilled water and hot water piping. Check valves incorporating a
balancing feature may be used.
1. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B, or steel, ASTM A216, Class WCB, or
ductile iron, ASTM 536, flanged, grooved, or wafer type.
2. Seat, disc and spring: 18-8 stainless steel, or bronze, ASTM B62. Seats may
be elastomer material.
G. Butterfly Valves: May be used in lieu of gate valves in water service except for direct
buried pipe. Provide stem extension to allow 50 mm (2 inches) of pipe insulation
without interfering with valve operation.
1. MSS-SP 67, flange lug type (for end of line service) or grooved end rated
1205 kPa (175 psig) working pressure at 93 degrees C (200 degrees F).
a. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B. Malleable iron, ASTM A47
electro-plated, or ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 electro-
plated.
b. Trim: Bronze, aluminum bronze, or 300 series stainless steel disc,

bronze bearings, 316 stainless steel shaft and manufacturer's
recommended resilient seat. Resilient seat shall be field replaceable,
and fully line the body to completely isolate the body from the
product. A phosphate coated steel shaft or stem is acceptable, if the
stem is completely isolated from the product.
c. Actuators: Field interchangeable. Valves for balancing service shall

have adjustable memory stop to limit open position.
1) Valves 150 mm (6 inches) and smaller: Lever actuator with

minimum of seven locking positions, except where chain
wheel is required.
2) Valves 200 mm (8 inches) and larger: Enclosed worm gear

with handwheel, and where required, chain-wheel operator.
H. Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome-plated ball with full port and Teflon
seat at 2760 kPa (400 psig) working pressure rating. Screwed or solder connections.
Provide stem extension to allow operation without interfering with pipe insulation.

I. Combination Isolating, Measuring, and Balancing Valve (CIMB): A multi-purpose

manual flow balancing valve and adjustable flow meter, with bronze or cast iron body,
calibrated position pointer, valved pressure taps or quick disconnects with integral
check valves and preformed polyurethane insulating enclosure. Provide a readout kit
including flow meter, readout probes, hoses, flow charts or calculator, and carrying
case.
J. Automatic Balancing Valves:
1. Contractor shall install Automatic Balancing Valves where indicated in

drawings.
2. Valve shall consist of dynamic, flow limiting device.
Valve Housing:
1. Valve shall be:
15mm – 40mm Brass Body 25 Bar Max Working Pressure Threaded

Connection
50mm – 80mm Grey Iron Body 20 Bars Max Working Pressure

Threaded Flange Connection.
100mm – bigger Grey Iron Body 20 Bars Max Working Pressure

Wafer Connection
All valves shall have P/T ports.
2. Valve shall be permanently marked to show direction of flow; shall have body
tag to indicate model number, flow rate and DP control range.
Flow regulator/Automatic Balancing Unit
1. Flow regulation cartridge assembly shall be precision ground, all AISI type
300 Series stainless steel; shall be available in four kPaD control ranges;
minimum range shall be capable of being activated by less than 10 kPa; and
shall be capable of controlling flow within +/-5% of rated flow.
2. Dual pressure or pressure/temperature test valves for verifying accuracy of

flow performance shall be provided for all valve sizes.
3. All flow regulating units shall be warranted by the manufacturer for five years
from date of sale.
Accessories
1. Analog pressure meter kit shall be provided as a single-hose portable or

double-hose portable kit; pressure gauge with 4-1/2” dial shall have range of
–14.7 to 150 PSI; portable kits shall be available with end connections for
either pressure only or pressure/temperature test valves and shall include
carrying cases; all kits shall include flow rate chart for determining flow rate.
2. Identification tags shall be available for all valves; tags shall be indelibly
marked with flow rate, model number, zone identification: tags shall be 75mm
x 75mm aluminum.

K. Suction Diffuser: Angle pattern flow straightening fitting equipped with a combination
diffuser-strainer-orifice cylinder, flow straightening vanes, start-up strainer and
adjustable support foot. The combination diffuser-strainer-orifice cylinder shall be
designed to withstand pressure differential equal to the system pump shutoff head
(maximum 100 PSIG) and shall have a free area equal to five times the cross section
area of the pump suction opening. The length of the flow straightening vanes shall be
no less than 2½ times the diameter of the system pump suction connection.
The flow straightening fitting shall be of cast iron construction with flanged system
and flanged pump connections. The fitting shall have a Stainless steel combination
diffuser-strainer-orifice cylinder with 3/16” diameter perforations to protect the system
pump. The full length Stainless steel flow straightening vanes shall provide
nonturbulent flow to the suction side of the system pump. The start-up strainer shall
be of 16 mesh bronze, and the support foot (supplied by others) shall eliminate pipe
strain at the flow fitting/pump connection. All internal components shall be
replaceable.
L. Triple Duty Valve: Furnish and install as shown on plans, a straight angle, or straight-
angle pattern valve designed to perform the functions of a center guided nonslam
check valve, shutoff valve and calibrated balancing valve.
The valve shall be of heavy-duty cast iron flanged construction with 125 psi ANSI
flanged connections suitable for 175 psi working pressure for operating temperatures
up to 250ºF. The valve shall be fitted with a bronze seat, replaceable bronze disc with
EPDM seat insert (brass [2”-12” valves} or stainless steel stem, and chatter
preventing stainless spring. The valve design shall permit repacking under full system
pressure.
Cv rating shall be provided at every 10% increment opening for the straight and angle
valve. Manufacturer shall supply the Cv rating for read-out of flow determination and
system pressure drop.
The valve shall be equipped with brass readout valves (with integral check valve) to
facilitate taking differential pressure readings across the orifice for accurate system
balance. The valve shall be produced at an ISO 9001 approved facility.
Each valve shall be ITT Bell & Gossett.
2.10 WATER FLOW MEASURING DEVICES
A. Minimum overall accuracy plus or minus three percent over a range of 70 to 110
percent of design flow. Select devices for not less than 110 percent of design flow
rate.
B. Venturi Type: Bronze, steel, or cast iron with bronze throat, with valved pressure
sensing taps upstream and at the throat.
C. Wafer Type Circuit Sensor: Cast iron wafer-type flow meter equipped with readout
valves to facilitate the connecting of a differential pressure meter. Each readout valve
shall be fitted with an integral check valve designed to minimize system fluid loss
during the monitoring process.
D. Self-Averaging Annular Sensor Type: Brass or stainless steel metering tube, shutoff
valves and quick-coupling pressure connections. Metering tube shall be rotatable so
all sensing ports may be pointed down-stream when unit is not in use.
E. Flow Measurement/Balance Valves: A multi-purpose flow balancing valve and

adjustable flow meter, with bronze or cast iron body, calibrated position pointer,
valved pressure taps or quick disconnects with integral check valves and preformed

polyurethane insulating enclosure. Provide a readout kit including flow meter, readout
probes, hoses, flow charts or calculator, and carrying case.
1. Measurement and shut-off valve: An on/off ball valve with integral high regain
venturi and dual quick connect valves with integral check valves and color
coded safety caps for pressure/temperature readout.
2. A butterfly balancing valve as specified herein, with memory stop and quick
connect valve for pressure/temperature readout.
F. Insertion Turbine Type Sensor: Section 15902.
G. Flow Measuring Device Identification:
1. Metal tag attached by chain to the device.
2. Include meter or equipment number, manufacturer's name, meter model, flow

rate factor and design flow rate in l/m (gpm).
H. Portable Water Flow Indicating Meters:
1. Minimum 150 mm (6 inch) diameter dial, forged brass body, beryllium-copper

bellows, designed for 1205 kPa (175 psig) working pressure at 121 degrees
C (250 degrees F).
2. Bleed and equalizing valves.
3. Vent and drain hose and two 3000 mm (10 feet) lengths of hose with quick
disconnect connections.
4. Factory fabricated carrying case with hose compartment and a bound set of
capacity curves showing flow rate versus pressure differential.
5. Provide one portable meter for each range of differential pressure required
for the installed flow devices.
I. Permanently Mounted Water Flow Indicating Meters: Minimum 150 mm (6 inch)

diameter, or 450 mm (18 inch) long scale, for 120 percent of design flow rate, direct
reading in lps (gpm), with three valve manifold and two shut-off valves.
2.11 STRAINERS
A. Basket or Y Type. Tee type is acceptable for water service.
B. Screens: Bronze, monel metal or 18-8 stainless steel, free area not less than 2-1/2
times pipe area, with perforations as follows:
1. 75 mm (3 inches) and smaller: 20 mesh for steam and 1.1 mm (0.045 inch)
diameter perforations for liquids.
2. 100 mm (4 inches) and larger: 1.1 mm (0.045) inch diameter perforations for
steam and 3.2 mm (0.125 inch) diameter perforations for liquids.
C. Suction Diffusers: Specified in Section 15185.

2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS FOR WATER SERVICE
A. Flanged Spool Connector:
1. Double arch type. Tube and cover shall be constructed of chlorobutyl

elastomer with full faced integral flanges to provide a tight seal without
gaskets. Connectors shall be internally reinforced with high strength synthetic
fibers impregnated with rubber or synthetic compounds as recommended by
connector manufacturer, and steel reinforcing rings.
2. Working pressures and temperatures shall be as follows:
a. Connector sizes 50 mm to 100 mm (2 inches to 4 inches), 1137 kPa

(165psig) at 121 degrees C (250 degrees F).
b. Connector sizes 125 mm to 300 mm (5 inches to 12 inches), 965 kPa

(140 psig) at 121 degrees C (250 degrees F).
3. Provide ductile iron retaining rings and control units.
B. Mechanical Pipe Couplings:
See other fittings specified under Part 2, PRODUCTS.
2.13 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDE
A. These units shall be the standard product of the vibration isolation mounting
manufacturer, incorporating neoprene isolation elements which are specifically
designed for providing resilient lateral bracing of vertically rising ducts or pipes.
B. Resilient lateral guides shall be one of the following products:
1. Type LPR: A.B.

2. Type ADA: M.I.
3. Type RGN: K.N.C.
2.14 HYDRONIC SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Air Purger: Cast iron or fabricated steel, 1723 kPa (250 psig) water working pressure,
for in-line installation.
B. Tangential Air Separator: ASME Pressure Vessel Code construction for 1723 kPa
(250 psig) working pressure, flanged tangential inlet and outlet connection, internal
perforated stainless steel air collector tube designed to direct released air into
expansion tank, bottom blowdown connection. Provide Form No. U-1. If scheduled on
the drawings, provide a removable stainless steel strainer element having 5 mm (3/16
inch) perforations and free area of not less than five times the cross-sectional area of
connecting piping.
C. Closed Expansion (Compression) Tank: ASME Pressure Vessel Code construction

for 1723 kPa (250 psig) working pressure, steel, rust-proof coated. Provide gage
glass, with protection guard, and angle valves with tapped openings for drain (bottom)
and plugged vent (top). Provide Form No. U-1.
1. Horizontal tank: Provide cradle supports and following accessories:
a. Air control tank fittings: Provide in each expansion tank to facilitate air
transfer from air separator, or purger, into tank while restricting
gravity circulation. Fitting shall include an integral or separate air vent

tube, cut to length of about 2/3 of tank diameter, to allow venting air
from the tank when establishing the initial water level in the tank.
b. Tank drainer-air charger: Shall incorporate a vent tube, cut to above

2/3 of tank diameter, and drain valve with hose connection draining
and recharging with air.
2. Vertical floor-mounted expansion tank: Provide gage glass, system or drain

connection (bottom) and air charging (top) tappings. Provide gate valve and
necessary adapters for charging system. Tank support shall consist of floor
mounted base ring with drain access opening or four angle iron legs with
base plates.
D. Diaphragm Type Pre-Pressurized Expansion Tank: ASME Pressure Vessel Code

construction for 861 kPa (125 psig) working pressure, welded steel shell, rust-proof
coated, with a flexible elastomeric diaphragm suitable for a maximum operating
temperature of 116 degrees C (240 degrees F). Provide Form No. U-1. Tank shall be
equipped with system connection, drain connection, standard air fill valve and be
factory pre-charged to a minimum of 83 kPa (12 psig).
E. Pressure Reducing Valve (Water): Diaphragm or bellows operated, spring loaded

type, with minimum adjustable range of 28 kPa (4 psig) above and below set point.
Bronze, brass or iron body and bronze, brass or stainless steel trim, rated 861 kPa
(125 psig) working pressure at 107 degrees C (225 degrees F).
F. Pressure Relief Valve: Bronze or iron body and bronze or stainless steel trim, with
testing lever. Comply with ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, Section 8, and bear
ASME stamp.
G. Automatic Air Vent Valves (where shown): Cast iron or semi-steel body, 1034 kPa
(150 psig) working pressure, stainless steel float, valve, valve seat and mechanism,
minimum 15 mm (1/2 inch) water connection and 6 mm (1/4 inch) air outlet.
2.15 FLEXIBLE BALL JOINTS (WHERE APPLICABLE ONLY)
A. Design and Fabrication: One piece component construction, fabricated from steel
with welded ends, designed for a working steam pressure of 1720 kPa (250 psig) and
a temperature of 232 degrees C (450 degrees F). Each joint shall provide for 360
degrees rotation in addition to a minimum angular flexible movement of 30 degrees
for sizes 6 mm (1/4 inch) to 150 mm (6 inch) inclusive, and 15 degrees for sizes 65
mm (2-1/2 inches) to 750 mm (30 inches). Joints through 350 mm (14 inches) shall
have forged pressure retaining members; while size 400 mm (16 inches) through 760
mm (30 inches) shall be of one piece construction.
B. Material:
1. Cast or forged steel pressure containing parts and bolting in accordance with
Section II of the ASME Boiler Code or ASME B31.1. Retainer may be ductile
iron ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12, or ASME Section II SA 515, Grade 70.
2. Gaskets: Steam pressure molded composition design for a temperature

range of from minus 10 degrees C (50 degrees F) to plus 274 degrees C
(525 degrees F).
C. Certificates: Submit qualifications of ball joints in accordance with the following test
data:
1. Low pressure leakage test: 41 kPa (6psig) saturated steam for 60 days.
2. Flex cycling: 800 Flex cycles at 3445 kPa (500 psig) saturated steam.

3. Thermal cycling: 100 saturated steam pressure cycles from atmospheric

pressure to operating pressure and back to atmospheric pressure.
4. Environmental shock tests: Forward certificate from a recognized test

laboratory, that ball joints of the type submitted has passed shock testing in
accordance with Mil. Spec MIL-S-901.
5. Vibration: 170 hours on each of three mutually perpendicular axis at 25 to

125 Hz; 1.3 mm to 2.5 mm (0.05 inch to 0.1 inch) double amplitude on a
single ball joint and 3 ball joint off set.
2.16 WATER FILTERS AND POT CHEMICAL FEEDERS
See section 15189, HVAC Water Treatment Systems.
2.17 GAGES, PRESSURE AND COMPOUND
A. ASME B40.1, Accuracy Grade 1A, (pressure, vacuum, or compound for air, steam, oil
or water), initial mid-scale accuracy 1 percent of scale (Qualify grade), metal or
phenolic case, 115 mm (4-1/2 inches) in diameter, 6 mm (1/4 inch) NPT bottom
connection, white dial with black graduations and pointer, clear glass or acrylic plastic
window, suitable for board mounting. Provide red "set hand" to indicate normal
working pressure.
B. Provide brass, lever handle union cock. Provide brass/bronze pressure snubber for
gages in water service. Provide brass pigtail syphon for steam gages.
C. Range of Gages: For services not listed provide range equal to at least 130 percent
of normal operating range:
Condenser water suction (compound) 207 kPa (30 inches Hg) to 689 kPa (100
psig).
2.18 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PROVISIONS
A. Pete's Plug: 6 mm (1/4 inch) MPT by 75 mm (3 inches) long, brass body and cap,
with retained safety cap, nordel self-closing valve cores, permanently installed in
piping where shown, or in lieu of pressure gage test connections shown on the
drawings.
B. Provide one each of the following test items to the Consultant:
1. 6 mm (1/4 inch) FPT by 3 mm (1/8 inch) diameter stainless steel pressure

gage adapter probe for extra long test plug. PETE'S 500 XL is an example.
2. 90 mm (3-1/2 inch) diameter, one percent accuracy, compound gage, 762

mm (30 inches) Hg to 689 kPa (100 psig) range.
3. 0 - 104 degrees C (220 degrees F) pocket thermometer one-half degree

accuracy, 25 mm (one inch) dial, 125 mm (5 inch) long stainless steel stem,
plastic case.
2.19 THERMOMETERS
A. Organic liquid filled type, red or blue column, clear plastic window, with 150 mm (6
inch) brass stem, straight, fixed or adjustable angle as required for each in reading.
B. Case: Chrome plated brass or aluminum with enamel finish.

C. Scale: Not less than 225 mm (9 inches), range as described below, two degree
graduations.
D. Separable Socket (Well): Brass, extension neck type to clear pipe insulation.
C. Scale ranges may be slightly greater than shown to meet manufacturer's standard.
Required ranges in degrees C (F):
Chilled Water and Condenser 0 to

38 degrees C (32-100 degrees F)
2.20 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL
Refer to Section 07841.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The drawings show the general arrangement of pipe and equipment but do not show
all required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect pipes to equipment,
fan-coils, coils, radiators, etc., and to coordinate with other trades. Provide all
necessary fittings, offsets and pipe runs based on field measurements and at no
additional cost to the Owner. Coordinate with other trades for space available and
relative location of HVAC equipment and accessories to be connected on ceiling grid.
Pipe location on the drawings shall be altered by contractor where necessary to avoid
interferences and clearance difficulties.
B. Store materials to avoid excessive exposure to weather or foreign materials. Keep

inside of piping relatively clean during installation and protect open ends when work is
not in progress.
C. Support piping securely. Refer to PART 3, Section 15050. Install convertors and other
heat exchangers at height sufficient to provide gravity flow of condensate to the flash
tank and condensate pump.
D. Install piping generally parallel to walls and column center lines, unless shown
otherwise on the drawings. Space piping, including insulation, to provide 25 mm (one
inch) minimum clearance between adjacent piping or other surface. Unless shown
otherwise, slope steam, condensate and drain piping down in the direction of flow not
less than 25 mm (one inch) in 12 m (40 feet). Provide eccentric reducers to keep
bottom of sloped piping flat.
E. Locate and orient valves to permit proper operation and access for maintenance of
packing, seat and disc. Generally locate valve stems in overhead piping in horizontal
position. Provide a union adjacent to one end of all threaded end valves. Control
valves usually require reducers to connect to pipe sizes shown on the drawing. Install
butterfly valves with the valve open as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent
binding of the disc in the seat.
F. Offset equipment connections to allow valving off for maintenance and repair with
minimal removal of piping. Provide flexibility in equipment connections and branch
line take-offs with 3-elbow swing joints where noted on the drawings.
G. Tee water piping runouts or branches into the side of mains or other branches. Avoid
bull-head tees, which are two return lines entering opposite ends of a tee and exiting
out the common side.

H. Connect piping to equipment as shown on the drawings. Install components furnished

by others such as:
1. Water treatment pot feeders and condenser water treatment systems.
2. Flow elements (orifice unions), control valve bodies, flow switches, pressure
taps with valve, and wells for sensors.
I. Thermometer Wells: In pipes 65 mm (2-1/2 inches) and smaller increase the pipe size
to provide free area equal to the upstream pipe area.
J. Firestopping: Fill openings around uninsulated piping penetrating floors or fire walls,
with firestop material. For firestopping insulated piping refer to Section 15080.
K. Where copper piping is connected to steel piping, provide dielectric connections.
3.2 PIPE JOINTS
A. Welded: Beveling, spacing and other details shall conform to ASME B31.1 and AWS
B2.1. See Welder’s qualification requirements under "Quality Assurance" in Section
15050.
B. Screwed: Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20; joint compound shall be applied to
male threads only and joints made up so no more than three threads show. Coat
exposed threads on steel pipe with joint compound, or red lead paint for corrosion
protection.
C. Mechanical Joint: Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with joint manufacturer's

specifications. Lubricate gasket exterior including lips, pipe ends and housing
interiors to prevent pinching the gasket during installation. Lubricant shall be as
recommended by coupling manufacturer.
D. 125 Pound Cast Iron Flange (Plain Face): Mating flange shall have raised face, if any,
removed to avoid overstressing the cast iron flange.
E. Solvent Welded Joints: As recommended by the manufacturer.
3.3 EXPANSION JOINTS (BELLOWS AND SLIP TYPE) (WHERE APPLICABLE ONLY)
A. Anchors and Guides: Provide type, quantity and spacing as recommended by

manufacturer of expansion joint and as shown. A professional engineer shall verify in
writing that anchors and guides are properly designed for forces and moments which
will be imposed.
B. Cold Set: Provide setting of joint travel at installation as recommended by the

manufacturer for the ambient temperature during the installation.
C. Preparation for Service: Remove all apparatus provided to restrain joint during
shipping or installation. Representative of manufacturer shall visit the site and verify
that installation is proper.
D. Access: Expansion joints must be located in readily accessible space. Locate joints to
permit access without removing piping or other devices. Allow clear space to permit
replacement of joints and to permit access to devices for inspection of all surfaces
and for adding packing.
3.4 SEISMIC BRACING
Provide in accordance with Section 15071.

3.5 LEAK TESTING
A. Inspect all joints and connections for leaks and workmanship and make corrections
as necessary, to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Tests may be either of those
below, or a combination, as approved by the Consultant.
B. An operating test at design pressure, and for hot systems, design maximum
temperature.
C. A hydrostatic test at 1.5 times design pressure. For water systems the design
maximum pressure would usually be the static head, or expansion tank maximum
pressure, plus pump head. Factory tested equipment (convertors, exchangers, coils,
etc.) need not be field tested. Avoid excessive pressure on mechanical seals and
safety devices.
3.6 FLUSHING AND CLEANING PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Steam, Condensate and Vent Piping: No flushing or chemical cleaning required.

Accomplish cleaning by pulling all strainer screens and cleaning all scale/dirt legs
during start-up operation.
B. Water Piping: Clean systems as recommended by the suppliers of chemicals

specified in Section 15189.
1. Initial flushing: Remove loose dirt, mill scale, metal chips, weld beads, rust,
and like deleterious substances without damage to any system component.
Provide temporary piping or hose to bypass coils, control valves, exchangers
and other factory cleaned equipment unless acceptable means of protection
are provided and subsequent inspection of hide-out areas takes place.
Isolate or protect clean system components, including pumps and pressure
vessels, and remove any component which may be damaged. Open all
valves, drains, vents and strainers at all system levels. Remove plugs, caps,
spool pieces, and components to facilitate early debris discharge from
system. Sectionalize system to obtain debris carrying velocity of 1.8 m/S (6
feet per second), if possible. Connect dead-end supply and return headers as
necessary. Flush bottoms of risers. Install temporary strainers where
necessary to protect down-stream equipment. Supply and remove flushing
water and drainage by various type hose, temporary and permanent piping
and Contractor's booster pumps. Flush until clean as approved by the
Consultant.
2. Cleaning: Using products supplied in Section 15189, circulate systems at

normal temperature to remove adherent organic soil, hydrocarbons, flux, pipe
mill varnish, pipe joint compounds, iron oxide, and like deleterious
substances not removed by flushing, without chemical or mechanical damage
to any system component. Removal of tightly adherent mill scale is not
required. Keep isolated equipment which is "clean" and where dead-end
debris accumulation cannot occur. Sectionalize system if possible, to
circulate at velocities not less than 1.8 m/S (6 feet per second). Circulate
each section for not less than four hours. Blow-down all strainers, or remove
and clean as frequently as necessary. Drain and prepare for final flushing.
3. Final Flushing: Return systems to conditions required by initial flushing after

all cleaning solution has been displaced by clean make-up. Flush all dead
ends and isolated clean equipment. Gently operate all valves to dislodge any
debris in valve body by throttling velocity. Flush for not less than one hour.

3.7 WATER TREATMENT
A. Install water treatment equipment and provide water treatment system piping.
B. Close and fill system as soon as possible after final flushing to minimize corrosion.
C. Charge systems with chemicals specified in Section 15189.
D. Utilize this activity, by arrangement with the Consultant, for instructing Owner
operating personnel.
3.8 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TEST AND INSTRUCTION
A. Refer to PART 3, Section 15050.
B. Adjust red set hand on pressure gages to normal working pressure.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Air Handling Units SECTION 15725
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 RELATED WORK.......................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................................. 2
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 AIR HANDLING UNITS .................................................................................................................. 4
2.2. TESTING ............................................................................................................................... 11
PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 12
3.1 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................... 12

Development\Mechanical\15725-Air Handling Units.doc
SECTION 15725
AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Air handling units including integral components specified herein.
B. Definitions:
1. Air Handling Unit (AHU) / Fresh Air Handling Unit (FAHU): A factory
fabricated assembly consisting of fan, coils, filters, and other necessary
equipment to perform one or more of the following functions of circulating,
cleaning, heating, cooling, humidifying, dehumidifying, and mixing of air.
Design capacities of units shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Conditions.
B. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
C. Section 15055 - Motors, Starters, Control Centers, and Wiring
D. Section 15071 - Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls.
E. Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation.
F. Section 15181 - Hydronic Piping
H. Section 15815 - Metal Ducts and Accessories.
I. Section 15861 - Air Filters.
J. Section 15900 - HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
K. Section 15950 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
A. Refer to Article, Quality Assurance, in Section 15050.
B. Air Handling Units Certification:
1. ARI Certified AHUs/FAHU: AHUs/FAHU shall have been tested, rated, and
certified in accordance with ARI 430, shall bear the ARI certification label, and
shall be listed in the ARI Directory of Certified Applied air-conditioning
Products.
2. Non-ARI certified AHUs/FAHU: If ARI certification is not available for the

complete air handling unit, compliance with the following minimum
requirements shall be established for approval and acceptance.
a. The individual components of the AHU/FAHU shall be certified by the

applicable standards, that is, ASHRAE, AMCA, ARI, and UL, and
shall bear the certification label.

b. All air handling units shall be factory tested prior to shipment, in

accordance with paragraph Test Procedure.
C. Performance Criteria:
1. The fan schedule indicates design liters per second (cubic feet per minute)
and design static pressure. Scheduled fan motors, 375 watts (1/2
horsepower) and larger, are sized for the maximum of present or future
design liters per second (cubic feet per minute) at 110 percent design static
pressure, but not to exceed 187 Pa (3/4 inch water) additional pressure.
2. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and
at design liters per second (cubic feet per minute) and 110 percent pressure
as stated above.
3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may

allow use of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When
submitted as a deviation, a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of
energy conservation. Such a deviation shall not qualify for any value
engineering incentive claim or reward.
4. Select fan operating point to right hand side of peak static pressure point and
near the peak of static efficiency.
5. Heating, Cooling, and Air Handling Capacity and Performance Standards: ARI
430, ARI 410, ASHRAE 51, and AMCA 210.
6. Operating Limits: AMCA 99.
D. Units shall be constructed by a manufacturer who has been manufacturing air

handling units for at least five (5) years.
E. Condensation: During first year guarantee period, if condensation forms on any

section of air handler when unit is operating at design conditions, contractor shall
replace or repair unit to correct the situation. Repairs shall not impair unit or
component accessibility and future repairability and inherent access for maintenance.
All repairs shall be subject to Consultant’s approval.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The contractor shall, in accordance with Section 15010. Furnish a complete

submission for all air handling units covered in the project. The submission shall
include all information listed below. Partial and incomplete submissions shall be
rejected without reviews.
1. Submittals for AHUs/FAHU shall include fans, drives, motors, coils,

humidifiers, sound attenuators, mixing box with outside/return air dampers,
filter housings, and all other related accessories. The contractor shall provide
custom drawings showing total air handling unit assembly including
dimensions, access sections, diffusion plates, flexible connections, door
swings, ontrol penetrations, electrical disconnect, lights, duplex outlets,
switches, wiring, utility connection points, unit support system, vibration
isolators, drain pan, and rigging points. Submittal drawings of section or
component only, will not be acceptable. Contractor shall also submit
performance data including performance test results, charts, curves or
certified computer selection data; data sheets; fabrication and insulation
details; and the number of pieces that each unit will have to be broken into to
meet shipping and job site rigging requirements.

2. Submit sound power levels in each octave band for fan and at entrance and
discharge of AHUs/FAHU at both present and future scheduled conditions.
Include sound attenuator capacities and itemized internal component
attenuation. Internal lining of supply air ductwork with sound absorbing
material is not permitted. In absence of sound power ratings refer to Section
15071.
3. Provide fan curves showing liters per second (cubic feet per minute), static
pressure, efficiency, and horsepower for both present and future design point
of operation and at maximum of present and future design liters per second
(cubic feet per minute) and 110 percent of design static pressure.
4. Submit total fan static pressure, external static pressure, for AHU/FAHU
including total, inlet and discharge pressures, and itemized specified internal
losses and unspecified internal losses using average pressure drop for air
filter. Refer to air handling unit schedule on drawings.
C. Maintenance and operating manuals in accordance with Section 15010.
D. Submit written test procedures two weeks prior to factory testing. Submit written
results of factory tests for approval prior to shipping.
A. Military Specifications (Mil. Spec.):
DOD-P-21035A Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair
B. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI):
410 Standard for Forced-Circulation Air-Heating and Air-Cooling

Coils
430 Standard for Central Station Air Handling Units
ARI-DCAACP Directory of Certified Applied Air Conditioning Products
C. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA):
99 Standard Handbook
210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating
D. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers

(ASHRAE):
51 Standard, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
B117 Salt Spray (Fog) Testing
C1071 Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Mineral Fiber, Duct Lining

Material)
D1654 Standard Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated

Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments

D1735 Water Resistance of Coatings Using Water Fog Apparatus
D3359 Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
G23 Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus
F. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association, Inc. (AFBMA):
9 Load Ratings and Fatigue life for Ball Bearings
G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR HANDLING UNITS
A. General:
1. AHUs/FAHU shall be entirely of double wall galvanized steel construction.

Galvanizing shall be hot dipped conforming to ASTM A525 and shall provide
a minimum of 0.275 kg of zinc per square meter (0.90 oz. of zinc per square
foot) (G90). Aluminum constructed units may be provided subject to
Consultant’s approval and documentation that structural rigidity is equal or
greater than the galvanized steel specified.
2. The contractor and the AHU/FAHU manufacturer shall be responsible for

insuring that the unit will not exceed the allocated space shown on the
drawings, including required clearances for service and future overhaul or
removal of unit components. All structural, piping, wiring, and ductwork
alterations of units, which are dimensionally different than those specified,
shall be the responsibility of the contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. AHUs/FAHU shall be fully assembled by the manufacturer in the factory in

accordance with the arrangement shown on the drawings. The unit shall be
assembled into the largest sections possible subject to shipping and rigging
restrictions. The correct fit of all components and casing sections shall be
verified in the factory for all units prior to shipment. Factory tested units shall
be fully assembled, tested and then split to accommodate shipment and job
site rigging. On units not shipped fully assembled, the manufacturer shall tag
each section and include air flow direction to facilitate assembly at the job
site. Lifting lugs or shipping skids shall be provided for each section to allow
for field rigging and final placement of unit.
4. The AHU/FAHU manufacturer shall provide the necessary gasketing,

caulking, and all screws, nuts, and bolts required for assembly. The
manufacturer shall provide a local representative at the job site to supervise
the assembly and to assure the units are assembled to meet manufacturer's
recommendations and requirements noted on the drawings. Provide
documentation that this representative has provided this service on similar
jobs to the Consultant. If a local representative cannot be provided, the
manufacturer shall provide a factory representative.
5. Gaskets: All door and panel gaskets shall be high quality which seal air tight
and retain their structural integrity and sealing capability after repeated
assembly and disassembly of bolted panels and opening and closing of
hinged components. Bolted sections may use a more permanent gasketing
method provided they are not disassembled.

6. Structural Rigidity: Provide structural reinforcement when required by span or

loading so that the deflection of the assembled structure shall not exceed
1/200 of the span based on a differential static pressure of 1991 Pa (8 inches
water) or 1-1/2 times design static pressure whichever is greater.
B. Base:
1. Provide a heavy duty steel base for supporting all AHU/FAHU major
components. Bases shall be constructed of wide-flange steel I-beams,
channels, or minimum 152 mm (6 inch) high 3.5 mm (10 gauge) steel base
rails. Welded or bolted cross members shall be provided as required for
lateral stability. Contractor shall provide supplemental steel supports as
required to obtain proper operation heights for cooling coil condense drain
trap and steam coil condensate return trap as shown on drawings.
2. AHUs/FAHU shall be completely self supporting for installation on concrete

housekeeping pad, steel support pedestals, or suspended as shown on
drawings.
3. The AHU/FAHU bases not constructed of galvanized material shall be

cleaned, primed with a rust inhibiting primer, and finished with a rust inhibiting
exterior enamel.
C. Casing (including wall, floor and roof):
1. General: AHU/FAHU shall be designed and constructed such that removal of

any panel shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit. Plug panels may
be used to enhance structural stability provided access space is not reduced.
NOTE: Use 50 mm (2 inch) panels unless sound analysis indicates that

thicker sections of the AHU/FAHU assembly are required. If thicker panels are
used they shall be a perforated panel design.
2. Casing shall be double wall galvanized steel, minimum 50 mm (2 inches)

thick, constructed of minimum 1.3 mm (18 gauge) outer skin and 1.0 mm (20
gauge) solid or perforated inner skin. Perforated panels are not allowed in
cooling coil sections, floors, door panels and where solid sheet is required to
avoid air bypass.
3. Blank-Off: Provide where required to insure no air bypass between sections,

through perforated panels or around coils or filters. Blank-Off shall be installed
at each component of the air handling unit and also at the internal panels to
prevent recirculation of the air through perforated panels. Seal any holes
where bypass occurs.
4. Thermal Conductance (C): Maximum overall thermal conductance of casing

panels shall not exceed 0.68 W/square meter. K (0.12 Btu/h. sq. ft. ºF).
5. Condensation Requirements: AHUs/FAHU shall be designed to insure that

there is no condensation on the exterior of the unit based on outside design
conditions. Through metal connections between inner and outer panels shall
be kept to an absolute minimum. If tubular structural members are used inside
of tube shall be insulated equal to casing.
6. Unit sections shall be tightly joined in the field through the use of all-thread
rod or casing brackets and shall be gasketed to make air tight.
7. Exterior and interior panels shall be secured to the support channels with
stainless steel or zinc-chromate plated screws and gaskets installed around
the panel perimeter. Screw spacing shall not be greater than 229 mm (nine
inches). Panels shall be completely removable to allow removal of fan, coils,

and other internal components for future maintenance, repair, or

modifications. Welded exterior panels are not acceptable.
8. Access Doors: Provide where shown in each access section and where
shown on drawings. Doors shall be a minimum of 50 mm (2 inches) thick with
same construction as the unit casing. Doors shall be a minimum of 600 mm
(24 inches) wide and shall be the full casing height up to a maximum of 1850
mm (6 feet). Doors shall be gasketed, hinged, and latched to provide an
airtight seal. Each door shall include a minimum 150 mm x 150 mm (6 inch x
6 inch) double thickness reinforced glass or Plexiglas window in a gasketed
frame.
a. Hinges: Manufacturers standard, designed for door size, weight and

pressure classifications. Hinges shall hold door completely rigid with
minimum 45 kg (100 pound) weight hung on latch side of door.
b. Latches: Non-corrosive alloy construction, with operating levers for

positive cam action, operable from either inside or outside. Doors that
do not open against unit operating pressure shall be provided with
safety "Vent lock"-style latches which allow the door to open
approximately 75 mm (3 inches) and then require approximately
0.785 radian (45 degrees) further movement of the handle for
complete opening. Latch shall be capable of restraining explosive
opening of door with a force equal to a minimum of 2986 Pa (12
inches water) of differential static pressure or 1-1/2 times operating
differential pressure whichever is greater.
c. Gaskets: Neoprene, continuous around door, positioned for direct

compression with no sliding action between the door and gasket.
Secure with high quality mastic to eliminate possibility of gasket
slipping or coming loose.
9. Provide sealed sleeves, metal or plastic escutcheons or grommets for

penetrations through casing for power and temperature control wiring and
pneumatic tubing. Coordinate number and location with electrical and
temperature control subcontractors. Coordinate lights, switches, and duplex
outlets and disconnect switch location and mounting. All penetrations and
equipment mounting may be provided in the factory or in the field. All field
penetrations shall be performed neatly by drilling or saw cutting. No cutting by
torches will be allowed. Neatly seal all openings airtight.
D. Painted Exterior Finish: Galvanized steel (G90) exterior shall be mill prepared for
painting by bonderizing and factory prepared for prime coat of paint by acid etch
cleaning, as required, to assure paint adhesion. Provide factory applied prime coat
and enamel finish coat of paint of color selected by owner. Paint corrosion resistance
and adhesion shall have satisfactorily passed ASTM B117, D1654, D1735, D3359
and G23 for a minimum of 500 hours. Rating of failure at the scribe mark shall be not
less than 6, average creepage not greater than 3 mm (1/8 inch). Rating of the
inscribed area shall not be less than 10, no failure. Refer to Section 09900.
E. Insulation:
1. Insulation: Section 15080.
2. The walls, roof and floor of the AHU/FAHU shall be insulated. Insulation shall
be held securely in position between the inner and outer skin of casing.
3. The insulation of the panels shall be injected CFC-free polyurethane foam

with a thermal conductivity (K-value) of no more than 0.025 w/m-k and density
of 50 kg/cubic meter.

4. Materials shall meet NFPA 90A flame spread and smoke generation
requirements.
F. Floor:
1. Unit floor shall be level without offset space or gap and designed to support a
minimum of 488 kg/square meter (100 pounds per square foot) distributed
load without permanent deformation or crushing of internal insulation. Provide
adequate structural base members beneath floor in service access sections to
support typical service foot traffic and to prevent damage to unit floor or
internal insulation. Unit floors in casing sections, which may contain water or
condensate, shall be watertight with drain pan.
2. Thermal Conductance (C): Maximum overall thermal conductance of casing

floors shall not exceed 0.025 w/m-k.
3. Where indicated, furnish and install floor drains, flush with the floor, with
nonferrous grate cover and stub through floor for external connection.
G. Condensate Drain Pan: Drain pan shall be designed to extend entire length of cooling
coils including headers and return bends. Depth of drain pan shall be at least 43 mm
(1.7 inches) and shall handle all condensate without overflowing. Drain pan shall be
constructed of #304 stainless steel and shall be sloped to drain. Drain pan shall be
continuous metal or welded watertight. No mastic sealing of joints exposed to water
will be permitted. Drain pan shall placed on top of casing floor or integrated into casing
floor assembly. Maximum overall thermal conductance of floor/drain pan assembly
shall not exceed 0.025 w/m-k.
1. An intermediate condensate drip pan shall be provided on stacked cooling

coils and shall be constructed of #304 stainless steel with copper downspouts
factory piped to main condensate pan. Use of intermediate condensate drain
channel on upper casing of lower coil is permissible provided it is readily
cleanable. Design of intermediate condensate drain shall prevent upper coil
condensate from flowing across face of lower coil.
2. Drain pan shall be piped to the exterior of the unit. Drain pan shall be readily
cleanable.
3. Installation, including frame, shall be designed and sealed to prevent blow-by.
H. Diffuser Section: Furnish a diffuser section, with perforated diffuser plate, on

discharge of supply fan and return fan where indicated or where recommended by
manufacturer. The diffusion plate shall be located to assure uniform distribution of
leaving air across the face of the downstream cooling coil and filters to create uniform
velocity profiles across the entire opening, with variances not to exceed 25% at any
location more than 150 mm (6 inches) from perimeter of casing. Maximum air
pressure drop across distribution plate for scheduled air volume shall not exceed 25
Pa (0.10" water). Bolt or weld diffuser plate to a sturdy steel support frame so that it
remains rigid. Manufacturer shall include any diffuser section pressure loss in excess
of diffuser plate and this value shall be included in unspecified internal losses when
selecting fan.
I. Fans Sections:
NOTE: Use forward curve fans only for low static pressure applications, typically 747
Pa (3 inches of water) total static pressure or less.
1. Fans shall be minimum Class II construction, double width, double inlet

centrifugal, air foil or backward inclined or forward curved type as indicated on
drawings, factory balanced and rated in accordance with AMCA 210 or
ASHRAE 51. Provide self-aligning, pillow block, regreasable ball-type

bearings selected for a B (10) life of not less than 40,000 hours and an L (50)
average fatigue life of 200,000 hours per AFBMA Standard 9. Extend bearing
grease lines to motor and drive side of fan section. Fan shall be located in
airstream to assure proper air flow.
2. Allowable vibration tolerances for fan shall not exceed a self-excited vibration
maximum velocity of 0.005 m/s (0.20 inch per second) RMS, filter in, when
measured with a vibration meter on bearing caps of machine in vertical,
horizontal and axial directions or measured at equipment mounting feet if
bearings are concealed. After field installation, compliance to this requirement
shall be demonstrated with field test in accordance with Section 15071 and
Section 15950.
J. Fan Motor, Drive and Mounting Assembly:
1. Provide internally vibration isolated fan (Seismic spring-type), motor and drive,
mounted on a common integral bolted or welded structural steel base with
adjustable motor slide rail with locking device. Provide vibration isolators with
50 mm minimum deflection and flexible duct connections at fan discharge to
completely isolate fan assembly. Refer to Section 15071, for additional
requirements.
2. Fan Motor and Drive: Motors shall be energy efficient type (per NEMA
Standard) and suitable for use in variable frequency drive applications on
AHU/FAHU where this type of drive is indicated. The fan motor shall be totally
enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type with IP54 protection and class F insulation
with class B temperature rise complying with BS2757. Refer to Section 15055
and Section 15075, for additional motor and drive specifications. Where
Variable Speed Motor Controllers (VSMC) are required they shall be
compatible with fan and motor. Refer to Division 16.
3. Fan drive and belts shall be factory mounted with final alignment and belt
adjustment to be made by the Contractor after installation. Drive and belts
shall be as specified in Section 15050. Unit manufacturer shall provide
additional drive(s) and/or speed up the blowers if required during balancing, to
achieve desired airflow. Size the fan motor liberally to allow for speeding up;
otherwise, replace the motor and associated electricals at no additional cost
to the owner.
4. Fan TSP: The External Static Pressure (ESP) shall be specified by the
Consultant. However the internal component losses (coil, filters, etc.) and the
unspecified internal losses (fan section, inlet/outlet system effect losses, etc.)
shall be the sole responsibility of the AHU/fan manufacturer and same is true
for the fan motor sizing and selection.
5. Some AHU’s/FAHU and related fans may initially be operated at partial

capacity as indicated on the equipment schedule. In these cases, the
pulleys/sheaves shall be sized at the reduced capacity subject for future
replacement, and the fans shall have satisfactory and stable operation at the
specified initial partial capacity although shall be sized at full capacity.
K. Mixing Boxes (Where Applicable): Mixing box shall consist of casing and outdoor air
and return air dampers in opposed blade arrangement with damper linkage for
automatic operation. Coordinate damper operator with Section 15900. Dampers shall
be of low leak design with metal compressible bronze jamb seals and extruded vinyl
edge seals on all blades. Blades shall rotate on stainless steel sleeve bearings or
bronze bushings. Maximum damper length shall be 1500 mm (60 inches). Leakage
rate shall not exceed 2.5 cubic meters/min/square meter (8 cfm per square foot) at
250 Pa (1 inch water) and 3.7 cubic meters/min/square meter (12 cfm per square foot)
at 995 Pa (4 inches water). Electronic damper operators shall be furnished and
mounted in an accessible and easily serviceable location by the air handling unit

manufacturer at the factory. Damper operators shall be of same manufacturer as

controls furnished under Section 15900.
L. Filter Section: Refer to Section 15861, for additional filter requirements.
1. General
All AHUs/FAHU and fresh air intakes and where indicated on the tender
drawings shall be provided with primary and secondary air filters of the types
as specified herein.
a. Air filters shall comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1 –

1992 Standard or an approved equivalent standard. Reference shall
made to ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1 – 1992 Standard or to relevant
approved equivalent standard from definition of terms employed.
b. Air filters test shall be performed by an independent Testing
Laboratory. Test certificate shall be produced on request.
c. The filters shall be installed complete with all accessories and other
minor necessary for their satisfactorily installation and performance
whether individually specifies or not.
d. Uniform air velocity through the media shall be achieved, if necessary
by means of air screens, baffles and other devices to approval.
2. Pre-Filter
a. The filters shall have a rated average dust spot efficiency of 25-30%
(MERV 7) when tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1 –
1992 Standard atmospheric dust spot method.
b. Both fresh and return air filters shall have pleated surface media. The
filter shall be throwaway type. Normal filter depth shall be 50 mm.
c. The filters, with non-woven synthetic fabric media shall be classified
by the Underwriter Laboratories.
d. For fan TSP calculations; use mid-life filter pressure drop or 160 Pa,
whichever is higher.
3. Final Filters
a. Use air filter of the rigid, pleated extended surface type fabricated for
disposal when the dust load limit reached as indicated by maximum
(final) pressure drop.
b. Average atmospheric dust spot efficiency shall be 85% or above
(MERV 13) in accordance to ASHRAE 52-I 1992 Test Standard. Filter
shall be classified as Underwriter Laboratory Class 2.
c. For fan TSP calculations; use mid-life filter pressure drop or 330 Pa,
whichever is higher.
4. Filter Media and Frame Construction
a. Media Support Grid

 The media shall be treated with adhesive and continuously
laminated to a supported steel wire grid.
 The media shall be sandwiched to maintain the designed space
for each pleat to maximize dust collection capacity and to avoid
the possibility of media oscillation and media being pulled away.
b. Enclosing Frame
 The enclosing frame shall made of heavy duty rigid and high wet
strength double wall beverage board.
 The frame with two of its largest surfaces being die-cut into
mating openings with diagonal supports, shall be a square box of
about 50 mm depth capable of totally encasing the filter media.

 The filter media shall be perfectly bonded to the internal periphery

of the frame to prevent air leak.
c. Rear Access Filter Frames
 The rear access filter frames shall be in modular form with each
module designed to accommodate a standard size pleated filter.
 Constructed with galvanized steel, each filter holding frame shall
be equipped with holding clips to hold the filter.
d. Side Access Filter Frame
 Side access filter section shall be accessible from the side of an
AHU/FAHU.
 The access panel shall be sealed by gasket, double wall fastened
with latches. Inside the section, standard sized, 50 mm deep
pleated filters shall be held by extruded aluminum track.
M. Coils:
1. The cooling coil shall be fabricated by the AHU/FAHU manufacturer. The

cooling coil for the AHU/FAHU shall be suitable for chilled water application.
2. The coils shall be constructed of copper tubes and mechanically expanded
into aluminum fins to enhance heat transfer.
3. Suitable provision shall be made to facilitate adequate draining and cleaning
through removable plugs at both ends of each tubes. Each set of coils shall
be fitted with air vent at the highest point.
4. All coil capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures shall be rated in
accordance to ARI Standard 410.
5. The coil shall be fitted with supply and return headers, made of steel pipes, to
ensure even distribution of chilled water throughout the coil.
6. Coil shall be designed to utilize the full available unit cross section area.
7. Coil shall be proof tested at 26 bar (375 psig) and leak tested at 17 bar (250
psig).
8. Coils shall be limited to six (6) rows and 12 FPI maximum.
N. Humidifier: When indicated on the drawings, AHUs/FAHU shall include factory
installed humidifiers. Refer to Drawings and Section 15181, for additional
requirements.
O. Sound Attenuators: Refer to Drawings, Specification Section 15071 and Section

15815 & 15820, for additional unit mounted sound attenuator requirements.
AHU/FAHU sound attenuators shall be factory installed as an integral part of
AHU/FAHU. Provide required sound attenuators if required NC level is not met after
installation. This should be at no additional cost to the Owner.
P. Discharge Section: Provide aerodynamically designed framed discharge openings or

spun bellmouth fittings to minimize pressure loss.
Q. Electrical and Lighting: Wiring and equipment specifications shall conform to Division
16, Electrical.
1. Vapor-proof lights using cast aluminum base style with glass globe and cast
aluminum guard shall be installed in each access section. A switch shall
control the lights in each compartment with pilot light mounted outside the
respective compartment access door. Wiring between switches and lights
shall be factory installed. All wiring shall run in neatly installed electrical
conduits and terminate in a junction box for field connection to the building
system. Provide single point 115 volt - one phase connection at junction box.
2. Install compatible 100 watt bulb in each light fixture.
3. Provide a convenience duplex outlet next to the light switch.

4. Disconnect switch and power wiring: Provide factory or field mounted

disconnect switch. Coordinate with Electrical Specifications.
R. Electric Heater: Factory Standard electric heater coil/section shall be provided where
specified and shown.
2.2. TESTING
A. General:
1. ARI certified AHUs/FAHU: The following AHUs/FAHU shall be factory

assembled and tested prior to shipment and shall be shipped prior to any
untested units. Substitutions for specific AHUs/FAHU may be made with
Consultant’s approval.
2. Non-ARI certified AHUs/FAHU: All units shall be factory assembled and

tested.
3. Units specified to be tested shall be factory assembled and tested in

accordance with specified Test Procedure to demonstrate compliance with
required unit capacities, ensure correct fit of all components and minimize
field assembly labor.
B. Factory Test:
1. General: The test procedure, instrumentation and calculation shall use those
methods specified in Specification Section 15950, however test methods
including instruments used must be submitted and approved by the
Consultant prior to initiating testing. The AHUs/FAHU shall be tested for air
volume, static pressure for AHU/FAHU and each component, fan RPM and
power consumption for the maximum of present or future design conditions.
Submit fan curves showing test results.
2. Test Procedure (Airflow):
a. Provide straight runs of full size ducts at inlet and discharge of

AHU/FAHU with lengths equal to 2-1/2 times fan diameter and with
volume dampers to adjust static pressure located at ends. Locate a
four-point static pressure sensor 2/3 the distance down the discharge
duct and connected to an inclined manometer to be used to measure
external static pressure.
b. Six static pressure tap sensors shall be located on both entering and
leaving sides of cooling coil and a Meriam micro manometer used to
read cooling coil pressure drop. Unit cubic meters per minute (cubic
feet per minute) may be determined by dry coil air friction curve.
c. Adjust dampers to compensate for variations in pressure drops due to

clean vs. dirty filters, dry vs. wet cooling coils, and as required to
simulate fan design conditions.
d. Drain connections shall be plugged. Piped connection openings shall

be sealed.
e. Correct cubic meters per minute (cubic feet per minute), static
pressure and watts (horsepower) to standard air conditions of 1.2
kg/cubic meter (0.075 lbs. per cubic foot) density, 21oC (70oF)
temperature, and 101 kPa (29.92 in. Hg) barometric pressure at sea
level. Measure supply air wet bulb and dry bulb temperatures. Obtain
barometric pressure readings from local airport.

f. Determine fan motor watts (horsepower) consumption by use of

wattmeter, voltmeter, ammeter and obtaining motor efficiency from
manufacturer. Refer to standard testing and balancing procedure.
Determine fan RPM by use of tachometer.
g. Obtain values for the items in the following formula. (Fan Total Static
Pressure = External Static Pressure + Specified Internal Losses +
Unspecified Internal Losses). Refer to AHU/FAHU schedule on the
drawings for additional information.
C. Approval:
1. Tests shall be witnessed by the Consultant or authorized representative.

Contractor shall provide the Consultant’s with a minimum two-week notice
prior to proposed schedule test.
2. Failure of AHU/FAHU to meet test requirements shall require correction of

deficiency and re-testing of unit.
3. Submit written results of factory tests for approval prior to shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble air handling unit/fresh air handling unit components following

manufacturer's instructions for handling, testing and operation. Repair damaged
galvanized areas with paint in accordance with Military Spec. DOD-P-21035. Repair
painted units by touch up of all scratches with finish paint material. Vacuum clean
interior of air handling units prior to operation.
B. Leakage and test requirements for air handling units shall be the same as specified for
ductwork in Specification Section 15815 & 15820, except leakage shall not exceed
Leakage Class (CL) 12 listed in SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual when
tested at 1.5 times the design static pressure. Repair casing air leaks that can be
heard or felt during normal operation and to meet test requirements.
C. Perform field mechanical (vibration) balancing in accordance with Section 15071.
D. Seal and/or fill all openings between the casing and AHU/FAHU components and
utility connections to prevent air leakage or bypass.
E. Make casing penetrations according to the casing manufacturer's instructions and

details. Provide sleeves through the unit casing.
F. AHU/FAHU Manufacturer shall provide factory service for pre-start-up site inspection,
start-up and operating instruction to Owner personnel.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Metal Ducts and Accessories SECTION 15815
PART 1 – GENERAL ........................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 RELATED WORK ....................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................ 2
PART 2 – PRODUCTS......................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 DUCT MATERIALS AND SEALANTS .............................................................................................. 5
2.2 DUCT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION .................................................................................. 5
2.3 DUCT LINER (WHERE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS) .......................................................................... 6
2.4 DUCT ACCESS DOORS, PANELS AND SECTIONS ......................................................................... 7
2.5 FIRE DAMPERS ........................................................................................................................ 7
2.6 SMOKE DAMPERS..................................................................................................................... 8
2.7 FIRE DOORS ............................................................................................................................ 9
2.8 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT CONNECTORS ............................................................................................ 9
2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS ........................................................................................................... 9
2.10 SOUND ATTENUATING UNITS ................................................................................................... 10
2.11 GRAVITY TYPE AIR INTAKE/EXHAUST HOODS ........................................................................... 10
2.12 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS ................................................................................................ 10
2.13 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS .......................................................................................................... 10
2.14 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL ....................................................................................................... 11
2.15 SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR DUCTWORK ...................................................................................... 11
2.16 SHEET METAL DUCT ISOLATION............................................................................................... 11
2.17 THERMOMETER (AIR) .............................................................................................................. 12
2.18 INSTRUMENT TEST FITTINGS ................................................................................................... 12
2.19 CONSTANT AIRFLOW REGULATOR (CAR) ................................................................................. 12
2.20 PERFORATED DISTRIBUTION PLATE (WHERE APPLICABLE) ......................................................... 12
2.21 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS ....................................................................................................... 12
2.22 WIRE MESH GRILLE................................................................................................................ 14
2.23 MISCELLANEOUS DUCT ACCESSORIES ..................................................................................... 14
PART 3 – EXECUTION ...................................................................................................................... 18
3.1 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................ 18
3.2 TESTING ................................................................................................................................ 19
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ..................................................................................................... 20
3.4 SCHEDULE ............................................................................................................................. 20

Development\Mechanical\15815-Metal Ducts and Accessories.docx
SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Ductwork and accessories for HVAC including the following:
1. Supply air, return air, outside air, exhaust, and relief systems.
B. Definitions:
1. SMACNA Standards as used in this specifications means the HVAC Duct

Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.
2. Seal or Sealing: Use of liquid or mastic sealant, with or without compatible

tape overlay, or gasketing of flanged joints, to keep air leakage at duct joints,
seams and connections to an acceptable minimum.
3. Duct Pressure Classification: SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards,

Metal and Flexible.
4. Exposed Duct: Exposed to view in a finished room.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions
B. Section 07841 - Through Penetration Firestopping Systems
C. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
D. Section 15071 - Noise and Vibration Control
E. Section 15840 - Air Terminal Units
F. Section 15725 - Typical Air Handling Units
G. Section 15900 - HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
A. Refer to article, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 15010.
B. Fire Safety Code: Comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Duct System Construction and Installation: Referenced SMACNA Standards are the
minimum acceptable quality.
D. Duct Sealing: Air Leakage Criteria, and Air Leakage Tests:
1. All ducts shall be sealed as per SMACNAS duct sealing requirements in

Section 1 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual for actual duct
pressure classes shown on the drawings. All ducts less than 500 Pa (2
inches w.g) pressure classification shall meet requirements of class C seal.

2. At the beginning of the work, leak test representative samples of the duct
construction for each pressure class greater than 750 Pa (3 inches w.g). The
sample specimen shall be minimum 25% of the ductwork of the selected
system representing each pressure class, and shall include at least five
transverse joints, typical seams, an access door, and at least two typical
branch connections and an elbow. The sample specimen shall be part of the
actual ductwork to be installed for the project.
3. The leakage amount shall not exceed the permissible leakage rate in CFM
per 100 square feet of duct surface for the pressure and leakage classes
shown in table below. The permissible leakage rate shall be calculated as per
Section 4 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
DUCT CONSTRUCTION CLASS Leakage Class

(Representing Pressure Class)
2490 pa (10 inches w.g) and above 3
1500 pa (6 inches w.g) 6
4. Follow leakage testing procedures, test apparatus, and test reports to be

submitted to the Consultant as per SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual. All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Consultant. The
Test and Balance agency shall measure and record duct leakage as
specified herein, and shall report any unusual conditions to the Consultant
and identify leakage source.
5. If a specimen fails to meet the permissible leakage level, the contractor shall
modify all ductwork installed represented by this specimen to bring it into
compliance and shall retest it until acceptable leakage is demonstrated to the
Consultant.
6. Tests and re-tests and necessary repairs shall be completed prior to

insulation and concealment of ducts.
E. Duct accessories exposed to the air stream, such as dampers of all types (except
smoke dampers) and access openings, shall be of the same material as the duct or
provide at least the same level of corrosion resistance.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Manufacturer’s Literature and Data:
1. Rectangular ducts:
a. Schedules of duct systems, materials and selected SMACNA

construction alternatives for joints, sealing, gage and reinforcement.
b. Duct liner.
c. Sealants and gaskets

d. Access doors.
2. Round and flat oval duct construction details:
a. Manufacturer’s details for duct fittings:
b. Duct liner.
c. Sealants and gaskets.
d. Access sections.
e. Installation instructions.
3. Volume dampers, back draft dampers.
4. Upper hanger attachments.
5. Fire dampers, fire doors, and smoke dampers with installation instructions
and certificates of origin.
6. Sound attenuators, including pressure drop and acoustic performance.
7. Flexible ducts and clamps, with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
8. Flexible connections.
9. Air intake/exhaust hoods.
10. Instrument test fittings.
11. Perforated distribution plates.
12. Diffusers, registers, grilles and accessories, including certificate of origin.
13. Details and design analysis of alternate or optional duct systems.
C. Coordination Drawings: Refer to article, DRAWINGS AND APPROVAL, in Section

15010.

A. Air Diffusion Council Test Code:
1062R4 Certification, Rating, and Test Manual (1977)
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A167 Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting

Chromium-Nickel, Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip
A527 Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum

Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality.

A569 Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot Rolled Sheet

and Strip, Commercial Quality
B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Sheet and Plate
C1071 Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation

(Mineral Fiber, Duct Lining Material)
E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
90A Standard for the Installations of Air Conditioning and

Ventilating Systems.
96 Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of

Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking
Equipment.
D. National Uniform Seismic Installation Guideline (NUSIG)
E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):
HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible

HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual
Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards
Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems
F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
181 UL Standard for Safety Factory-Made Air Ducts and

Connectors
555 UL Standard for Fire Dampers
555S UL Standard for Safety Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in

Smoke Control System
G. Australian Standards
AS 1682.1 – 1990 Fire dampers

Part 1 – Specifications
AS 1530.4 – 1990 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and
structures
Part 4 – Fire-resistance tests of elements of building
construction
H. ISO834: 1975 Fire-resistance tests – Elements of building construction

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCT MATERIALS AND SEALANTS
A. General: Except for systems specified otherwise, construct ducts, casings, and
accessories of galvanized sheet steel, ASTM A653 or A875, coating G60 (Z180) for
dry indoor ducts and G115 (Z350) for ducts exposed outdoors: or equal; or aluminum
sheet, ASTM B209, alloy 1100, 3003 or 5052.
B. Specified Corrosion Resistant Systems: Stainless steel sheet, ASTM A167, Class
302 or 304, Condition A (annealed), Finish No. 4 for exposed ducts and Finish No. 2B
for concealed ducts. For chlorinated indoor pools, STP exhaust ducts and other ducts
inside the STP room, and other highly – corrosive environment and applications.
1. Damper frames, damper blades and shafts, shall be stainless steel or PVC
coated galvanized steel, with non-ferrous bearing material.
C. Grease Duct: Double wall Metalbestos Model PS, factory-built grease duct, UL
labeled and complying with NFPA 96 may be furnished in lieu of specified materials
for kitchen and grill hood exhaust duct. Installation and accessories shall comply with
the manufacturers catalog data. Outer jacket or exposed ductwork shall be stainless
steel. Square and rectangular duct shown on the drawings will have to be converted
to equivalent round size.
D. Joint Sealing: Refer to SMACNA Standards, paragraph S1.8 and S1.9
2. Sealant: Elastomeric compound, gun or brush grade, maximum 25 flame

spread and 50 smoke developed (dry state) compounded specifically for
sealing ductwork as recommended by the manufacturer. Generally provide
liquid sealant, with or without compatible tape, for low clearance slip joints
and heavy, permanently elastic, mastic type where clearances are larger. Oil
base caulking and glazing compounds are not acceptable because they do
not retain elasticity and bond.
3. Tape: Use only tape specifically designated by the sealant manufacturer and
apply only over wet sealant. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used on
bare metal or on dry sealant.
4. Gaskets in Flanged Joints: Soft neoprene.
E. Approved factory made joints such as DUCTMATE SYSTEM may be used.
2.2 DUCT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
B. Duct Pressure Classes: As shown on the drawings.
C. Seal Classes: As shown on the drawings and in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air
Duct Leakage Test Manual.
D. Kitchen and Grill Hood (Ventilator) Exhaust Ducts: Comply with NFPA 96.
1. Material: 1.6mm (16 gage) steel sheet (black iron), ASTM A569, or 1.3mm
(18 gage) stainless steel. Use stainless steel for exposed duct in occupied
areas.

E. Round and Flat Oval Ducts: Furnish duct and fittings made by the same manufacturer
to insure good fit of slop joints. When submitted and approved in advance, round and
flat oval duct, with size converted on the basis of equal pressure drop, may be
furnished in lieu of rectangular duct design shown on the drawings.
1. Elbows: Diameters 80 through 200 mm (3 through 8 inches) shall be two

section die stamped, all others shall be gored construction, maximum 18
degree angle. With all seams continuously welded or standing seam. Coat
galvanized areas of fittings damaged by welding with corrosion resistant
aluminum paint or galvanized repair compound.
2. Provide bellmouth, conical tees or taps, laterals, reducers, and other low loss
fittings as shown in SMACNA Standards.
3. Ribbed Duct Option: Lighter gage round/oval duct and fittings may be
furnished provided certified tests indicating that the rigidity and performance
is equivalent to SMACNA standard gage ducts are submitted.
a. Ducts: Manufacturer’s published standard gage, G90 coating, spiral

lock seam construction with an intermediate standing rib.
b. Fittings: May be manufacturer’s standard as shown in published
catalogs, fabricated by spot welding and bonding with neoprene base
cement or machine formed seam in lieu of continuous welded seams.
4. Provide flat side reinforcement of oval ducts as recommended by the

manufacturer and SMACNA Standard S3.13. Because of high pressure loss,
do not use internal tie-rod reinforcement unless approved by the Consultant.
F. Canopy Hoods, Reagent Grade Water Treatment Room Exhausts: Constructed of

1.3, (18 gauge) stainless steel.
G. Casings and Plenums: Construct in accordance with SMACNA Standards Section VI,
including curbs, access doors, pipe penetrations, eliminators and drain pans. Access
doors shall be hollow metal, insulated with latches and door pulls, 500 mm (20
inches) wide by 1200 - 1350 mm (48-54 inches) high. Provide viewport in the doors
where shown. Provide drain for outside air louver plenum. Outside air plenum shall
have exterior insulation. Drain piping shall be routed to the nearest floor drain.
H. Volume Dampers: Single blade or opposed blade, multi-louver type as detailed in

SMACNA Standards.
I. Duct Hangers and Supports: Refer to SMACNA Standards Section IV. Avoid use of
trapeze hangers for round duct.
2.3 DUCT LINER (WHERE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS)
A. Duct sizes shown on drawings for lined duct are clear opening inside lining.
B. Rectangular Duct or Casing Liner: ASTM C1071, Type I (flexible), or Type II (board),
25 mm (one inch) minimum thickness matte face with anti-microbial coating, applied
with mechanical fasteners and 100 percent coverage of adhesive in conformance
with SMACNA, Duct Liner Application Standard.
C. Round and Oval Duct Liner: Factory fabricated double-walled with 25 mm (one inch)
thick sound insulation and inner perforated galvanized metal liner. Construction shall
comply with flame and smoke rating required by NFPA 90A. Metal liner shall be 1.0 to
0.60 mm (20 to 24 gage) having perforations not exceeding 2.4 mm (3/32 inch)
diameter and approximately 22 percent free area. Metal liner for fittings need to be
perforated. Assemblies shall be complete with continuous sheet mylar liner, 2 mil

thickness, between the perforated liner and the insulation to prevent erosion of the
insulation. Provide liner couplings/spacer for outer shell to liner size. Provide liner
spacing/concentricity leaving airway unobstructed.
2.4 DUCT ACCESS DOORS, PANELS AND SECTIONS
A. Provide access doors, sized and located for maintenance work, upstream, in the
following locations:
1. Each duct mounted coil and humidifier.
2. Each fire damper (for link service), smoke damper and automatic control
damper.
3. Each duct mounted smoke detector.
4. For cleaning kitchen hood exhaust duct, locate access doors at 6 m (20 feet)
intervals and at each change in duct direction.
B. Openings shall be at large as feasible in small ducts, 300 mm (12 inch by 12 inch)
minimum where possible. Access sections in insulated ducts shall be double-wall,
insulated. Transparent shatterproof covers are preferred for uninsulated ducts.
1. For rectangular ducts: Refer to SMACNA Standards (Figure 2-12).
2. For round and flat oval duct: Access sections shall be not less than 1.0 mm
(20 gage) housing welded or riveted to a duct section.
C. For additional details, refer to item 2.24 – G.
2.5 FIRE DAMPERS
Curtain Type:
A. Description: Curtain type, UL labeled assembly with frame, interlocking blades, and
165 degrees F rated fusible link. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches
for horizontal installations. Configure with blades stored out of the airstream.
B. Provide assemblies rated to maintain the integrity of the rated construction in which
the damper is to be installed.
C. Select thin-line dampers with nominal 2-inch-thick frame for installation in walls
between or behind grilles.
D. A view port for damper and activating mechanism shall be provided.
Blade Type:
A. Galvanized steel, interlocking blade type, UL listing and label, 1 ½ hour rating, 70 ºC
(160 ºF), fusible link, 100 percent free opening with no part of the blade stack or
damper frame in the air stream.
B. Fire dampers in fume hood exhaust or wet air exhaust shall be stainless steel
construction, all others may be galvanized steel.
1. The damper frame may be of design and length as to function as the

mounting sleeve, thus eliminating the need for a separate sleeve, as allowed
by UL 555. Otherwise provide sleeves and mounting angles, minimum 1.9

mm (14 gage), required to provide installation equivalent to the damper

manufacturer’s UL test installation.
2. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions conforming to UL rating test,

including certificate of origin.
3. Combination fire and smoke dampers: multi-louver or curtain type units

meeting all requirements of both dampers shall be used where shown and
may be used at the Contractor’s option where applicable.
2.6 SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Maximum air velocity, through free area of open damper, and pressure loss: low
pressure and medium pressure duct (supply, return, exhaust, outside air): 450 m/min
(1500 fpm). Maximum static pressure loss: 32 Pa (0.13 inch WG).
B. Maximum air leakage, closed damper: 0.32 cubic meters/min/square meter (4.0 cfm
per square foot) at 750 Pa (3 inches wg) differential pressure.
C. Minimum requirements for dampers:
1. Meet requirements of Table 6-1 of UL 555S, except the Fire Endurance and
Hose Stream test.
2. Frame: Galvanized steel channel with side, top and bottom stops or seals.
3. Blades: Galvanized steel, parallel type preferably, 300 mm (12 inch)

maximum width, edges sealed with neoprene, rubber or felt, if required to
meet minimum leakage. Airfoil (streamlined) type for minimum noise
generation and pressure drop are preferred for duct mounted dampers.
4. Shafts: Galvanized steel.
5. Bearing: Nylon, bronze sleeve or ball type.
6. Hardware: Zinc plated.
7. Operation: Automatic open/close. No smoke damper that requires manual

reset or link replacement after actuation is acceptable. See drawings for
required control operation.
8. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions conforming to UL rating test,

including certificate of origin.
D. Motor operator (actuator): Provide pneumatic or electric as required by the automatic

control system, externally mounted on stand-offs to allow complete insulation
coverage.
E. Combination Smoke/Fire Dampers
1. UL rated (UL555S) damper assembly rated to maintain the integrity of the

floor/ceiling (F/C) and roof/ceiling (R/C) assemblies, consisting of airfoil
blades with silicone rubber blade seal and 250 degree F rated fusible link.
Damper shall be class II.
2. For hard-ducted applications, supply standard damper frame, and for flex-
ducted applications, supply extended frame damper box.

3. Provide electric actuator for smoke signal actuation. Damper shall be

normally closed. Damper actuator shall be a rated part of the UL listed
assembly.
2.7 FIRE DOORS
A. Galvanized steel, interlocking blade type, UL listing and label, 71 ºC (160 ºF) fusible
link, 3 hour rating and approved for openings in Class A fire walls with rating up to 4
hours, 100 percent free opening with no part of the blade stack or damper frame in
the air stream.
B. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions conforming to UL rating test, including

certificate of origin.
2.8 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT CONNECTORS
A. General: Factory fabricated, complying with NFPA 90A for connectors not passing
through floors of buildings. Flexible ducts shall not penetrate any fire or smoke barrier
which is required to have a fire resistance rating of one hour or more. Flexible duct
length shall not exceed 1.5 m (5 feet). Provide insulated acoustical air duct
connectors in supply air duct systems and elsewhere as shown.
B. Flexible ducts shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with UL

181. Ducts larger than 200 mm (8 inches) in diameter shall be Class 1. Ducts 200
mm (8 inches) in diameter and smaller may be Class 1 or Class 2.
C. Insulated Flexible Air Duct: Factory made including mineral fiber insulation with
maximum C factor of 0.25 at 24 ºC (75 ºF) mean temperature, encased with a low
permeability moisture barrier outer jacket, having a puncture resistance of not less
than 50 Beach Units.
Acoustic insertion loss shall not be less than 3 dB per 300 mm (foot) of straight duct,
at 500 Hz, based on 150 mm (6 inch) duct, of 750 m/min (2500 fpm).
D. Application Criteria:
1. Temperature range: - 18 to 93 ºC (0 to 200 ºF) internal.

2. Maximum working velocity: 1200 m/min (4000 feet per minute).
3. Minimum working pressure, inches of water gage: 2500 Pa (10 inches)
positive, 500 Pa (2 inches) negative.
E. Duct Clamps: 100 percent nylon strap, 80 kg (175 pounds) minimum loop tensile
strength manufactured for this purpose or stainless steel strap with cadmium plated
worm gear tightening device. Apply clamps with sealant and as approved for UL 181,
Class 1 installation.
2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Where duct connections are made to fans and air handling units, install a non-
combustible flexible connection of 822 g (29 ounce) neoprene coated fiberglass fabric
approximately 150 mm (6 inches) wide. For connections exposed to sun and weather
provide hypalon coating in lieu of neoprene. Burning characteristics shall conform to
NFPA 90A. Securely fasten flexible connections to round ducts with stainless steel or
zinc-coated iron draw band with worm gear fastener. For rectangular connections,
crimp fabric to sheet metal and fasten sheet metal to ducts by screws 50 mm (2
inches) on center. Fabric shall not be stressed other than by air pressure. Allow at
least 25 mm (one inch) slack to insure that no vibration is transmitted.

2.10 SOUND ATTENUATING UNITS
General: In addition to those shown on the schematic diagrams, the Contractor shall provide
duct-mounted sound attenuators where required to satisfy the Room Noise Criteria specified
under Section 15071, without additional cost to the Owner. Adjustments of fan ESP shall be
done accordingly.
Ordinary (Air Systems Having  85% Efficiency Air Filters)
A. Cleaning, not less than 1.0 mm (20 gage) galvanized sheet steel, or 1.3 mm (18
gage) aluminum fitted with suitable flanges to make clean airtight connections to
ductwork. Sound-absorbent material faced with glass fiber cloth and covered with not
less than 0.6 mm (24 gage) or heavier galvanized perforated sheet steel, or 0.85 mm
(22 gage) or heavier perforated aluminum. Perforations shall not exceed 4 mm (5/32-
inch) diameter, approximately 25 percent free area. Sound absorbent material shall
be long glass fiber acoustic blanket meeting requirements of NFPA 90A.
B. Entire unit shall be completely air tight and free of vibration and buckling at internal
static pressures up to 2000 Pa (8 inch water gage) at operating velocities.
C. Pressure drop through each unit: Not to exceed indicated value at design air
acoustical performance 80 Pascal maximum.
D. Cap open ends of attenuators at factory with plastic, heavy duty paper, cardboard, or
other appropriate material to prevent entrance of dirt, water, or any other foreign
matter to inside of attenuator. Caps shall not be removed until attenuator is installed
in duct system.
2.11 GRAVITY TYPE AIR INTAKE/EXHAUST HOODS
A. Aluminum, ASTM B209, louvered, spun, or fabricated using panel sections with roll-
formed edges, 13 mm (1/2 inch) mesh aluminum or galvanized welded wire bird
screen, with gravity or motorized dampers were shown, accessible interior, designed
for 2200 km/h winds.
B. See hood schedule on the drawings. Sizes shown designate throat size. Area of hood
perimeter opening shall be not less than the throat area.
C. Dampers for Gravity Ventilators without Duct Connection: Construct damper of the
same material as the ventilator and design to completely close opening or remain
wide open. Hold damper in closed position by a brass chain and catch. Extend chains
300 mm (12 inches) below and engage catch when damper is closed.
2.12 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS
Galvanized steel or extruded aluminum 300 mm (12 inches) above finish roof service,
continuous welded corner seams, treated wood nailer, 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) thick, 48 kg/cubic
meter (3 pound/cubic feet) density rigid mineral fiberboard insulation with metal liner, built-in
cant strip (except for gypsum or tectum decks). For surface insulated roof deck, provide
raised cant strip (recessed mounting flange) to start at the upper surface of the insulation.
Curbs shall be constructed for pitched roof or ridge mounting as required to keep top of curb
level.
2.13 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
Section 15050.

2.14 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL
2.15 SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR DUCTWORK
A. Ductwork shall be supported and braced to resist all directional (transverse,

longitudinal and vertical) forces.
B. Brace all duct branches, minimum of one brace per branch.
C. Provide required bracing material.
D. Provide one of the following options:
a. Design and installation to meet the criteria listed above, and meet requirements
of the latest Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
(SMACNA), Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems for the
prescribed Seismic Hazard Level (SHL).
b. Design and installation to meet the criteria listed above, and meet the most
current requirements of the National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines
(NUSIG). Contractor shall submit all design tables and information for the design
force levels, stamped and signed by a professional engineer registered in the
place where project is located.
c. Where SMACNA or NUSIG requirements are not met completely, submit

proposed alternate details and calculations to completely address seismic bracing
requirements. Such designs shall use more severe of the Local Code and the
Uniform Building Code requirements for determining seismic forces, and be
performed, stamped and signed by a professional engineer registered in the
place where project is located. Revise if necessary any details shown on the
contract drawings for vertical support and lateral bracing, and submit for the
approval of the Consultant to meet the design criteria listed above.
2.16 SHEET METAL DUCT ISOLATION
A. All sheet metal ducts and air plenums within mechanical rooms or within a distance of
50 feet total duct length of connected vibration-isolated equipment (whichever is
longer) shall be isolated from the building structure by either Unit SLRS or 30N
isolators (whichever is applicable to the mounting condition). All isolators shall
achieve 1.0-inch minimum static deflection.
B. Ducts within the specified limits which penetrate the building construction shall be
isolated from the building by using resilient penetration sleeve/seals. Resilient lateral
guides shall be used wherever lateral support of vertical duct runs is required within
the specified limits.
C. Flexible Duct Connections: Sheet metal ducts or plenum openings shall be squarely
aligned with the fan discharge, fan intake, or adjacent duct section prior to installation
of the flexible connection, so that the clear length is approximately equal all the way
around the perimeter. Flexible duct connections shall not be installed until this
provision is met. The fan unit or adjacent duct section shall be able to move 1 inch in
any direction without causing metal-to-metal contact or stretching taut the flexible
connection.

2.17 THERMOMETER (AIR)
Section 15900 - HVAC Instrumentation and Controls.
2.18 INSTRUMENT TEST FITTINGS
A. Manufactured type with a minimum 50 mm (two inch) length for insulated duct, and a
minimum 25 mm (one inch) length for duct not insulated. Test hole shall have a flat
gasket for rectangular ducts and a concave gasket for round ducts at the base, and a
screw cap to prevent air leakage.
B. Provide instrument test holes at each duct or casing mounted temperature sensor or
transmitter, and at entering and leaving side of each heating coil, cooling coil, and
heat recovery unit.
2.19 CONSTANT AIRFLOW REGULATOR (CAR)
Each regulator shall solely operate on duct pressure and require no external power supply.
Each regulator shall be preset and factory calibrated requiring no field adjustment to the
airflows as indicated on the design drawing, and shall be rated for use in air temperatures
ranging from -25o to 140o F (-32o to 60o C). Constant airflow regulators shall be capable of
maintaining constant airflow within +/- 10% of scheduled flow rates (15% for units 50 cfm or
less), within the operating range of 0.2 to 0.8 in. w.g. differential pressure, or 0.6 to 2.4. in.
w.g. on high-pressure models. Sound power levels shall not exceed those for each size and
cfm rating as scheduled. Regulators shall be provided as an assembly consisting of a flame
resistant plastic body with self-inflating silicon element housed within a .75mm galvanized
steel sleeve or flanged plate for mounting in either round or rectangular duct. Each round
sleeve must be fitted with a brush gasket to assure perimeter air tightness with the interior
surface of the duct. All Constant Airflow Regulators will require no maintenance and must be
warranted for a period of no less than five years. Constant Airflow Regulators shall be
installed in tight ducting systems in accordance with all applicable codes and manufacturer’s
instructions.
2.20 PERFORATED DISTRIBUTION PLATE (WHERE APPLICABLE)
A. Furnish under Section 15725 - Typical Air Handling Units
B. Material: 60 percent free area perforated plate made of 3.5 mm (10 gage) galvanized
steel with round openings equally spaced over entire face area. Maximum air
pressure drop through distribution plate for air volumes scheduled shall be 25 Pa
(0.10-inch WG). Bolt plate to a sturdy steel support frame.
C. Location: Where shown on the drawings.
2.21 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
A. Materials:
1. Steel or aluminum except that all units installed in operating rooms shall be
aluminum or stainless steel. Provide manufacturer's standard gasket.
2. Exposed Fastenings: The same material as the respective inlet or outlet.

Fasteners for aluminum may be stainless steel.
3. Contractor shall review all ceiling drawings and details and provide all ceiling
mounted devices with appropriate dimensions and trim for the specific
locations.

B. Performance Test Data: In accordance with Air Diffusion Council code 1062R4. Refer
to Section 15071, for NC criteria.
C. Air Supply Outlets:
1. Ceiling Diffusers: Suitable for surface mounting, exposed T-bar or special tile
ceilings, baked white powder coated finish, square or round neck connection
as shown on the drawings. Provide plaster frame for units in plaster ceilings.
a. Square, louver, fully adjustable pattern: Round neck, surface

mounting unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Provide
equalizing or control grid and volume control damper.
b. Louver face type: Square or rectangular, removable core for 1, 2, 3,

or 4 way directional pattern. Provide equalizing or control grid and
opposed blade damper.
c. Perforated face type: Manual adjustment for 1, 2, 3, or 4 way

horizontal air distribution pattern without change of air volume or
pressure. Provide equalizing or control grid and opposed blade over
overlapping blade damper. Perforated face diffusers for VAV systems
shall have the pattern controller on the inner face, rather than in the
neck and designed to discharge air horizontally at the ceiling
maintaining a constant effect.
d. Slot diffuser/plenum:
1) Galvanized steel boot lined with 13 mm (1/2 inch) thick

fiberglass conforming to NFPA 90A and complying to UL 181
for erosion. Form slots or use adjustable pattern controllers,
to provide stable, horizontal air flow pattern over a wide
range of operating conditions.
2) Provide inlet connection diameter equal to duct diameter

shown on drawings or provide transition coupling if
necessary.
3) Maximum pressure drop at design flow rate: 37 Pa (0.15

inch) wg.
2. Linear Grilles and Diffusers: Extruded aluminum, manufacturer's standard

finish, positive holding concealed fasteners.
a. Margin: Flat, 20 mm (3/4 inch) wide.
b. Bars: Minimum 5 mm (3/16 inch) wide by 20 mm (3/4 inch) deep,

zero deflection unless otherwise shown. Reinforce bars on 450 mm
(18 inch) center for sidewall units and on 150 mm (6 inch) center for
units installed in floor or sills.
c. Provide opposed blade damper and equalizing or control grid where

shown.
D. Return and Exhaust Registers and Grilles: Provide opposed blade damper without
removable key operator for registers.
1. Finish: Baked white powder coated for ceiling mounted units. Wall units shall
have a prime coat for field painting, or shall be extruded aluminum with
manufacturer's standard aluminum finish.

2. Standard Type: Fixed horizontal face bars set at 30 to 45 degrees,

approximately 30 mm (1-1/4 inch) margin.
3. Perforated Face Type: To match supply units.
4. Grid Core Type: 20 mm by 20 mm (3/4 inch by 3/4 inch) core with 30 mm

(1-1/4 inch) margin.
5. Linear Type: To match supply units.
6. Door Grilles: Are furnished with the doors.
7. Filter Grilles: Standard face hinged to a mounting frame with space for a 25
mm (one inch) throwaway filter. Hold face closed by a locking screw. Provide
retaining clips to hold filter in place. Provide one inch thick fiberglass
throwaway filter.
2.22 WIRE MESH GRILLE
A. Fabricate grille with 20 x 20mm mesh 13 mm (1/2 inch) galvanized steel or aluminum
hardware cloth in a spot welded galvanized steel frame with approximately 30 mm
(1-1/4 inch) margin.
B. Use grilles where shown in unfinished areas such as mechanical rooms.
2.23 MISCELLANEOUS DUCT ACCESSORIES
A. General: Fabricate duct accessories from the same material as the ductwork in which
the accessory will be installed, unless specified otherwise.
B. Manual Splitter Dampers: Fabricated from same material as the ductwork two gauges
heavier than duct in which installed with splitters long enough to completely close the
branch duct without flutter. In all cases, blade dimension in direction of airflow shall
be 1-1/2 times width of branch duct not less than 12 inches. Provide a locking
quadrant and align its operating handle with the damper blade.
C. Manual Single Blade Volume or Balancing Dampers (2 inches WC Construction):

1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA standards, except as detailed on the
Drawings and as specified.
1. Blade and fastener material shall be the same as the ductwork in which the
damper is to be installed. Rod shall be galvanized steel. Blade shall be
riveted or bolted to rod.
2. Dampers shall be of a length suitable to shut off branch ducts without causing
damper flutter.
3. Cross break dampers and stiffen edges with two edge brakes for rigidity.
Provide additional stiffening angles, as required.
4. Provide continuous rods and outside end bearings on all damper assemblies.
Additionally, provide inside end bearings on internally lined ducts. Mark the
ends of damper rods with a saw cut to indicate blade position.
5. Maximum single blade balancing damper size shall be 12 by 48 inches.

Provide manual opposed-blade balancing dampers in ducts wider than 12
inches. Section damper blades over 48 inches wide horizontally.
6. Provide a specified regulator or locking quadrant for adjustment.

D. Manual Opposed-Blade Volume or Balancing Dampers (2 inches WC Construction)
1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA standards, except as detailed on the

Drawings and as specified.
2. Blade, rod, linkage, frame, and fastener material shall be the same as the
ductwork in which the damper is to be installed.
3. Blades shall be center crimped for stiffness and to receive pins and rods, and
edge crimped to interlock with adjacent blades on full shutoff. Provide
additional stiffening angles, as required.
4. Provide a prime coated or galvanized channel frame for mounting of

bearings, with angle stops on top and bottom.
5. Provide continuous rods on all drive damper assemblies. Mark the ends of
the damper shaft extension with a saw cut to indicate blade position.
6. Linkage and hardware shall be SMACNA accepted as manufactured by

Ventlok, arranged for gang operation and opposed-blade action without
jamming or racking.
7. Bushings for galvanized steel dampers shall be oil impregnated bronze, sized
to match with pins. Bushings for aluminum and stainless steel ductwork shall
be nylon or other suitable thermoset plastic.
8. Blades shall be a minimum of 18-gauge steel or equal strength aluminum.

Maximum blade width shall be 12 inches. Provide multi-section dampers for
dampers over 48 inches wide.
9. Provide specified locking quadrants for ductwork serving non-clean areas.

Provide specified dial regulators for ductwork serving cleanrooms.
E. Regulators and Quadrants:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Ventlok as specified.
b. Duro-Dyne Specline/Quadline equivalent.
2. Concealed Accessible Insulated Ductwork:
a. Ventlok Figure 635 dial regulator.
b. Ventlok Figure 555 locking quadrant.
3. Concealed Accessible Insulated Ductwork:
a. Ventline Figures 637 or 639 dial regulator to match insulation

thickness.
b. Ventline Figure 555 locking quadrant with an elevated standoff of the

same height as the insulation thickness.
4. Concealed Inaccessible Ductwork: Ventlock Figure 677 concealed damper

regulator with plain cover, extended rod, and universal joints and miter gears
as required.

5. Exposed Uninsulated Ductwork in Finished Spaces: Hi-Vel Ventlok Figure

640 dial regulator with 609 end bearing.
6. Insulated Ductwork Serving Cleanrooms:
a. Ventlok Figure 644 dial regulator with Hi-Vel hardware, and Figure
609 end bearings.
b. Locking quadrants as specified for non-cleanroom areas may be

furnished, providing that the damper hardware is airtight at duct
penetrations without the use of additional sealants.
F. Turning Vanes:
a. Elgen All-Tight
b. Duro-Dyne Type VR.
c. Titus
d. Tuttle and Bailey
2. Description: Hat channel or embossed vane side rails with shop-fabricated

double-blade turning vanes of the same material as the ductwork.
3. Provide factory fabricated, double thickness galvanized sheet metal turning

vanes with air foil contour in all 90º square elbows and elsewhere as
indicated on drawings. Shop fabricated turning vanes shall be submitted for
approval prior to fabrication.
4. Acoustical Turning Vanes: Double thickness galvanized sheet steel or

aluminum, non-reflective air foil contour type vane with perforated surface, a
core of sound absorbent material and nailing.
G. Duct Access Doors:
a. Ventlok
b. Duro-Dyne
c. Ruskin
2. Description:
a. Double wall access door with minimum 1-inch thick insulation

between walls, angle or Z-frame, sealing gasket around the
periphery, double layer Plexiglass vision panel with air space
between, hinged with Ventlok No. 100 quick release latches. Access
doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash
locks.

3. Sizes shall be as follows:
Duct Size Frame Size No. of Access Requirements

Hinge
6” through 8” 6x8 2 Hand Hole
10” 10 x 12 2 One hand and sight
12” through 16” 12 x 16 2 Two hands and head sight
Greater than 16 x 24 3 Body entry 16”
a. Provide sufficient Ventlok No. 360 sealant for application between the
door frame and duct for installations in ductwork with seal Class A
and B, and in ductwork serving cleanrooms.
b. Patch plates attached with screw fasteners are prohibited, except in

locations where they are specifically noted.
H. Spin-in Fittings – Description: Straight pattern sheet metal spin-in fitting with 45
degree scoop designed for connection to sheet metal ductwork. Assemble using spot
welds or rivets. Button-punch fabrication is prohibited. Provide a specified balancing
damper in the ductwork immediately downstream of each spin-in fitting.
I. Backdraft Dampers:
a. American Warning and Ventilating.
b. Dowco
c. Ruskin
d. Field
2. Description
a. Commercial quality, multiblade, parralel action, counterbalanced

backdraft dampers of 16-gauge galvanized steel, or extruded
aluminum, with center pivoted blades of maximum 6 inches width
with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free
manner with 90 degree stop, and plated steel pivot pin. Channel
frame.
b. Gravity backdraft dampers smaller than 18 by 18 inches furnished

with air moving equipment, may be the air moving equipment
manufacturers standard construction.
3. Ratings: 3,500 fpm maximum velocity, 1 inch WC backpressure, set to relieve

above 0.02 inch WC differential pressure.
J. Upblast Dampers for Smoke Exhaust:
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ruskin
2. Description: Round upblast damper with two-piece design frame shall be 10-
gauge galvanized steel with 1-1/2 inch flange. Blades shall be 20-gauge
galvanized steel with ¾ inch axle and stainless steel bearing sleeve.
3. Damper shall have an 18-gauge galvanized wind screen to shield blades

from wind pressure.

4. Damper shall be Ruskin UBD100.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with provisions of Section 15050, particularly regarding coordination with

other trades and work in existing buildings.
B. Fabricate, install and test ductwork and accessories in accordance with referenced
SMACNA Standards:
1. Drawings show the general layout of ductwork and accessories but do not
show all required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect ducts
to equipment, boxes, diffusers, grilles, etc., and to coordinate with other
trades. Fabricate ductwork based on field measurements. Provide all
necessary fittings and offsets at no additional cost to the Owner. Coordinate
with other trades for space available and relative location of HVAC equipment
and accessories on ceiling grid. Duct sizes on the drawings are inside
dimensions which shall be altered by Contractor to other dimensions with the
same air handling characteristics where necessary to avoid interferences and
clearance difficulties.
2. Provide duct transitions, offsets and connections to dampers, coils, and other
equipment in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section II. Provide
streamliner, when an obstruction cannot be avoided and must be taken in by
a duct. Repair galvanized areas with galvanizing repair compound.
3. Provide bolted construction and tie-rod reinforcement in accordance with

SMACNA Standards, Section VI.
4. Construct casings, eliminators, and pipe penetrations in accordance with

SMACNA Standards, Section VI. Design casing access doors to swing
against air pressure so that pressure helps to maintain a tight seal.
C. Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section
IV.
D. Install fire dampers in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to conform to

the installation used for the rating test.
E. Seal openings around duct penetrations of floors and fire rated partitions with fire stop
material as required by NFPA 90A.
F. Flexible duct installation: Refer to SMACNA Standards, Section III. Ducts shall be
continuous, single pieces not over 1.5 m (5 feet) long (NFPA 90A), as straight and
short as feasible, adequately supported. Centerline radius of bends shall be not less
than two duct diameters. Make connections with clamps as recommended by
SMACNA. Clamp per SMACNA S3.33 and S3.34 with one clamp on the core duct
and one on the insulation jacket. Flexible ducts shall not penetrate floors, or any
chase or partition designated as a fire or smoke barrier, including corridor partitions
fire rated one hour or two hour. Support ducts SMACNA Standards.
G. Where diffusers, registers and grilles cannot be installed to avoid seeing inside the
duct, paint the inside of the duct with flat black paint to reduce visibility.
H. Control Damper Installation:

1. Provide necessary blank-off plates required to install dampers that are

smaller than duct size. Provide necessary transitions required to install
dampers larger than duct size.
2. Assemble multiple sections dampers with required interconnecting linkage

and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of
damper motors.
3. Provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification and

provide air volumes specified. Locate baffles by experimentation, and affix
and seal permanently in place, only after stratification problem has been
eliminated.
4. Install all damper control/adjustment devices on stand-offs to allow complete

coverage of insulation.
I. Air Flow Measuring Devices (AFMD): Install units with minimum straight run
distances, upstream and downstream as recommended by the manufacturer.
J. Low Pressure Duct Liner: Install in accordance with SMACNA, Duct Liner Application
Standard.
K. Protection and Cleaning: Adequately protect equipment and materials against

physical damage. Place equipment in first class operating condition, or return to
source of supply for repair or replacement, as determined by Consultant. Protect
equipment and ducts during construction against entry of foreign matter to the inside
and clean both inside and outside before operation and painting. When new ducts are
connected to existing ductwork, clean both new and existing ductwork by mopping
and vacuum cleaning inside and outside before operation.
3.2 TESTING
A. Pressure Testing of HVAC Ductwork:
1. Description:
a. Prior to connection to equipment and before applying insulation,

perform a dynamic pressure test on HVAC ductwork systems, using
a high pressure blower with a calibrated orifice and manometer.
Provide all necessary blowers, gauges, connections, and similar
items required to perform the tests.
b. Repair all leaks and retest until stipulated results are achieved.
c. Advise the Contractor and Cypress 48 hours in advance of each test.

Failure to do so will require test to be rescheduled.
B. Testing Requirements:
1. Mains and Risers: 1.25 times fan static pressure.
2. Horizontal Branches: 1.0 times fan static pressure.
3. Allowable Leakage: Total allowable leakage should not exceed 1 percent of

the total system CFM. When partial sections of the duct system are tested,
the summation of the leakage for all sections shall not exceed the total
allowable leakage.
4. Test Failures: Duct systems shall be repaired at contractor’s cost if test

leakage is more than 1%. All audible leaks shall be repaired regardless of
whether the duct leakage test was successful.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Cleaning of General Service Ductwork: Remove debris from general-purpose

ductwork and accessories, and then blow ductwork clean with air movement provided
by the system fan or blower. Supply ductwork shall be blown clean before final
branch connections are made to terminal units, or before terminal grilles, registers, or
diffusers are installed.
B. Cleaning of Ductwork Serving Clean Spaces:
1. All the supply and return ductwork, directly or indirectly serving any
cleanroom space or area from the make-up air handlers or the recirculation
air handlers shall follow this outline.
2. Ductwork, accessories, and hardware serving cleanrooms, exposed to the

room interior, or in the airstream, regardless of size or complexity, shall be
visibly free or oil, grease, particulates, chips, fibers, dust, dirt, etc., prior to
installation.
3. The general cleaning sequence prior to installation for ductwork serving the
cleanrooms shall be:
a. Solvent wipe interior surfaces using the following products:
i. The acceptable cleaning agents for metal surfaces are isopropyl

alcohol (IPA) or 50-50 mixture of IPA and distilled water.
ii. Acceptable low-shedding wipe materials are Texwipe cloths,

Texwipe Company, Hillsdale, New Jersey.
iii. After rubbing with dry cloth leaves negligible material on cloth,
cleanliness is satisfactory.
b. Visually inspect surfaces.
4. For ductwork located in cleanrooms, exterior surfaces to be cleaned following

above procedure.
5. After duct sections have been cleaned and degreased and are ready for
installation, enclose the sections in plastic if located in cleanrooms or seal the
open ends to prevent contamination if located in non-clean areas. Section
shall remain sealed until they are in position for final connection. Remove
plastic as necessary for unconnected ends. Remove all plastic once the
ductwork is completely assembled and the space has achieved Level 2
construction protocol. Promptly seal the ductwork joints airtight after the
plastic is removed.
6. Exterior of ductwork located in clean areas to be cleaned again following

above procedure, after installation.
C. General Cleaning: Clean up and remove refuse material, crates, and rubbish arising
from work of this Section form the premises.
3.4 SCHEDULE
A. Fabricate portions of systems listed in the appendix following the end of this Section,
HVAC ductwork schedule, form sheet metal with gauge and reinforcement in
accordance with SMACNA duct construction tables.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Computer Room Air Conditioning Units
SECTION 15734
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 WORK INCLUDED ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS ............................................................................................................ 1
1.3 SUBMITTAL DATA ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................. 1
1.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................... 2
1.7 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE ............................................................................................................... 2
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ................................................................................................... 2
2.2 PRECISION AC UNIT .................................................................................................................... 2
PART 3 – EXECUTION........................................................................................................................... 7
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRECISION AIR CONDITIONING UNITS ................................................................ 7

Development\Mechanical\15734-Computer Room Air Conditioning Units.doc
SECTION 15734
SECTION 15734
COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment, accessories, services and tests
necessary to complete, make ready, and set to work all fans indicated on the
Drawings and specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Precision-type AC units to be standard products, selected from published literature of

manufacturer.
B. Fan ratings to AMCA for sound and air delivery performance.
C. Fans shall be factory balanced, statically and dynamically to AMCA Standards.
D. Cooling coils shall be ARI certified.
1.3 SUBMITTAL DATA
A. Submit manufacturer’s latest published data for dimensions, materials, accessories

and installation details.
B. Submit full technical rating data (electrical, capacity, etc.). Include piping and
electrical connection drawings.
C. Operational and Maintenance Manual: Manufacturer’s instruction for operation and

maintenance.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to Equipment Schedule and Drawings for sizes, arrangements and capacities.
B. The space shall be maintained at the following environmental condition:
1. Temperature Set Point and Offset 22  1oC
2. Relative Humidity Set Point and Offset 50  5%
3. Filtration Quality 65%

SECTION 15734
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fans of the

types and materials, sizes and capacities specified herein and on the drawings, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years, as
approved by the Engineer.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and the
standards outlined in the General Notes.
A. These specifications describe requirements for a self-contained, factory-assembled

precision-type AC unit (chilled water and direct expansion).
B. The manufacturer shall confirm all equipment to be fully compatible with heat
dissipation requirements of the room.
1.7 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
See attached schedule.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Refer to Section 15007
2.2 PRECISION AC UNIT
A. Cabinet and Frame Construction
The frame shall be constructed of welded tubular steel. It shall be painted for
maximum corrosion protection. The exterior panels shall be insulated with a minimum
1 in. (25.4mm), 1.5 lbs. (.68 kg) density fiber insulation. The main unit color and
accent color shall be per Architect’s requirement. The exterior panels shall be as
powder coated.
B. Filter Chamber
The filter chambers shall be an integral part of the system, located within the cabinet
serviceable from front or either end of the unit. The filters shall be rated not less than
65% efficiency (based on ASHRAE 52-76).
C. Fan Section
The fan shall be the centrifugal type, double width double inlet, and shall be statically
and dynamically balanced as a completed assembly to a maximum vibration level of
two mils in any plane. The shaft shall be heavy duty steel with self-aligning ball
bearings with a minimum life span of 100,000 hours. The fan motor shall be mounted
on an adjustable slide base. The drive package shall be two-belt, constant speed,
sized for 200% of the fan motor horsepower. The fans shall be located to draw air
over the A-frame coil to ensure even air distribution and maximum coil performance.
An option for variable speed drive should be included in the bid.

SECTION 15734
D. Infrared Humidifier
The humidifier shall be of the infrared type consisting of high intensity quartz lamps
mounted above and out of the water supply. The evaporator pan shall be stainless
steel and arranged to be serviceable without disconnecting high voltage electrical
connections. The complete humidifier section shall be pre-piped ready for final
connection. The infrared humidification system shall use bypass air to prevent over
humidification of the space served. The humidifier shall be equipped with an
automatic water supply system. The system has an adjustable water-over-feed to
prevent mineral precipitation.
E. Electric Reheat
The electric reheat coils shall be low watt density, fin tubular construction, protected
by thermal safety switches controlled in three stages minimum.
F. Chilled Water System
Unit shall have a fully modulating 3-way valve with manual override facility. The
chilled water circuit shall include test points for sensing water pressure and
temperature.
G. Advanced Control Processor
The advanced control processor shall be microprocessor based with a front monitor
LCD display panel and control keys for user inputs. The controls shall be menu driven
with on-screen prompts for easy user operation. The system shall allow user review
and programming of temperature and humidity setpoints, alarm parameters, and setup
selections including choice of control type. A password shall be required to make
system changes. For all user selections, the range of acceptable input (temperature,
humidity, or time delay) shall be displayed on the monitor screen. The system shall
provide monitoring of room conditions, operational status in % of each function,
component run times, date and time, and analog and digital inputs and outputs
(depending on manufacturer’s standard) from sensors provided by others.
1. Control
The control system shall allow programming of the following room conditions:
*Temperature Setpoint 65-85oF (18-29oC)

*Temperature Sensitivity + 1o to 5oF (1 to 3 oC) in 0.1oF (.1oC)
increments
*Humidity Setpoint 40-60% R.H.
*Humidity Sensitivity + 1% to 10% R.H.
All setpoints shall be adjustable from the individual unit front monitor panel.
Temperature and humidity sensors shall be capable of being calibrated using
the front monitor panel controls to coordinate with other temperature and
humidity sensors in the room.
2. Predictive Humidity Control
The microprocessor shall calculate the moisture content in the room and
prevent unnecessary humidification and dehumidification cycles by
responding to changes in dewpoint temperature.

SECTION 15734
3. In addition, the system shall provide the following internal controls:
a. System Auto-Restart
For start-up after power failure, the systems shall provide automatic
restart with a programmable time delay. Programming can be
performed either at the unit or from the central site monitoring system.
b. Front Monitor Display Panel
The microprocessor shall provide a front monitor LCD backlit display

panel with 4 rows of 20 characters with adjustable contrast. This
display (along with front mounted control keys) shall be the only
operator interface required to obtain all available system information
such as room conditions, operational status, alarms, control and
alarm set points, and all user selections including alarm delays,
sensor calibration, DIP switch selections, and diagnostics. All
indicators shall in languge form. No symbols or codes shall be
acceptable.
c. Alarms
The microprocessor shall activate an audible and visual alarm in

event of any of the following conditions:
 High Temperature
 Low Temperature
 High Humidity
 Low Humidity
 Change Filters
 Loss of Air Flow
 Main Fan Overload
 Humidifier Problem
 Custom Alarms
Custom alarms are four customer accessible alarm inputs to be

indicated on the front panel. Custom alarm can be identified with
prepared (programmed) labels for the following frequently used
inputs:
 Leak Under Floor
 Smoke Detected
 Standby GC Pump On
 Loss of Water Flow
 Standby Unit On
Each alarm (unit and custom) can be separately enabled or disabled,

selected to activate the common alarm, and programmed for a time
delay.
d. Audible Alarm
The audible alarm shall annunciate any alarm that is enabled by the
operator.
e. Common Alarm
A programmable common alarm shall be provided to interface user

selected alarms with a remote alarm device.

SECTION 15734
f. Remote Monitoring
All alarms shall be communicated to the central site monitoring

system with the following information: date and time of occurrence,
unit number, and present temperature and humidity.
g. Control Type
The user shall be able to select the type of control the advanced
microprocessor will use. Selections available shall be intelligent,
proportional, and tunable PID (proportional, integral, and derivative
gains). The intelligent control shall incorporate control logic that uses
methods to maintain precise, stable control. If tunable PID is
selected, the user shall be able to program each of the three gains.
h. Analog/Digital Inputs/Outputs
The system shall include customer accessible analog/digital

inputs/outputs (depending on manufacturer’s standard) for sensors
provided by others. The analog inputs/outputs shall accept a 4 to 20
mA or 0-10 VDC signal. The gains for each analog/digital
inputs/outputs shall be programmable and shall be able to be
monitored from the front panels.
i. Diagnostics
The control system and electronic circuity shall be provided with self-
diagnostics to aid in troubleshooting. The microcontroller board shall
be diagnosed and reported as pass/not pass. Control inputs shall be
indicated as on or off at the front monitor panel. Control outputs shall
be able to be turned on or off from the front monitor panel without
using jumpers or a service terminal.
j. Data Collection
The control system shall maintain accumulative operating hours of

compressors, reheats, humidifier, and fan motor. The ten most
recent alarms shall also be retained.
k. Communications
The microprocessor shall be compatible with several remote

monitoring and control devices.
H. Accessories
Provide the following components:
1. Disconnect Switch (Locking Type)
The manual disconnect switch shall be mounted in the high voltage section of
the electrical panel. The switch shall be accessible from the outside of the
unit with the door closed, and prevent access to the high voltage electrical
components until switched to the “OFF” position.

SECTION 15734
2. Firestat
The firestat shall immediately shut down the unit when activated. The firestat
shall be mounted in the electrical panel with the sensing element in the return
air.
3. Condensate Pump
The condensate pump shall have a minimum capacity of 100 GPH at 20 ft.
(378 1/hr at 6m) head. It shall be complete with integral float switch, pump
and motor assembly, and reservoir. The precision AC unit is provided with
normal gravity drain. However, in the event of blockage resulting in high
water level, the condensate pump will automatically run and activate the
alarm system.
4. Water Sensors
Provide a minimum of two (2) solid state water sensors under the raised floor.
5. Flow Switch
The flow switch shall activate the alarm system should the chilled water
supply be interrupted. The switch shall be factory mounted and wired.
6. Floor Stand
The floor stand shall be constructed of welded tubular steel frame. The floor
stand shall have adjustable legs with vibration isolation pads. The floor stand
height shall be compatible with raised floor height.
7. Floor Stand Turning Vane
A factory supplied, field mounted turning vane shall be provided.
8. Temperature and Humidity Recorder
Provide a 7-day/24 hour temperature and humidity recorder of the full scope,
two pen, surface mounted type with 100 recording charts, one red and one
blue bottle of recording ink. Recorder shall be a 220 volt, single phase, 60Hz
power supply.
9. Smoke Detector
The smoke detector shall immediately shut down the unit and activate the
alarm system when activated. The smoke detector shall be mounted in the
electrical panel with the sensing element in the return air compartment.
10. Site Monitoring System
The remote site monitoring system shall have the capability to monitor and
change (at the user direction) the temperature and humidity set points and
sensitivities of each unit. The printer shall provide the user with chronological
alarm information. It shall also be capable of being programmed to print out
environmental conditions or operating modes at each unit.

SECTION 15734
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRECISION AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A. General
Install the precision-type air conditioning units in accordance with manufacturer’s

installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations
indicated, and maintain manufacturer’s recommended clearances.
B. Electrical Wiring
Install and connect electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s electrical connection diagram
submittal to electrical contractor.
C. Piping Connections
Install and connect devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory
mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s piping connection diagram submittal to
piping contractor.
D. Field Quality Control
Start up mainframe coolant units in accordance with manufacturer’s start-up

instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Fans & Ventilations SECTION 15836
PART 1 – GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 RELATED WORK ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE.................................................................................................................. 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................... 2
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 FAN SECTION (CABINET FAN) ....................................................................................................... 3
2.2 CENTRIFUGAL FANS & VENTILATIONS .......................................................................................... 3
2.3 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS .................................................................................................... 4
2.4 ROOF OR WALL POWER VENTILATOR ........................................................................................... 5
2.5 PACKAGED HOOD MAKE-UP AIR UNITS ........................................................................................ 5
2.6 CENTRIFUGAL CEILING FANS & VENTILATIONS (SMALL CABINET FAN) ............................................. 5
2.7 PROPELLER FANS & VENTILATIONS.............................................................................................. 5
2.8 TUBE AXIAL FANS ........................................................................................................................ 6
2.9 VANEXIAL FANS .......................................................................................................................... 7
2.10 MIXED-FLOW FANS ..................................................................................................................... 9
2.11 CARPARK JET FANS .................................................................................................................. 11
2.12 AIR CURTAIN UNITS .................................................................................................................. 11
2.13 INITIAL PARTIAL CAPACITY OPERATION ...................................................................................... 11
PART 3 – EXECUTION......................................................................................................................... 11
3.1 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................... 11
3.2 PRE-OPERATION MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................. 12
3.3 START-UP AND INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................... 12

Development\Mechanical\15836-Fans & Ventilations.doc
SECTION 15836
FANS & VENTILATIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. FANS & VENTILATIONS for heating, ventilating and air conditioning.
B. Product Definitions: AMCA Publication 99, Standard l-66.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 – Mechanical General Requirements.
B. Section l5050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
C. Section l5071 – Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls.
D. Section l5725 – Modular Indoor Air Handling Units.
E. Section 15055 - Motor Starters
F. Section 15950 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
A. Refer to paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 15050.
B. FANS & VENTILATIONS and power ventilators shall be listed in the current edition of
AMCA 26l, and shall bear the AMCA performance seal.
C. Operating Limits for Centrifugal FANS & VENTILATIONS: AMCA 99 (Class I, II, and
III).
D. FANS & VENTILATIONS and power ventilators shall comply with the following
standards:
1. Testing and Rating: AMCA 2l0.

2. Sound Rating: AMCA 300.
E. Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls: Section 15071.
F. Performance Criteria:
1. The fan schedule shows cubic liters per second (lps) and design static
pressure. Scheduled fan motors, 0.37 kw (l/2 horsepower) and larger, are
sized for design liters per second (lps) at ll0 percent design static pressure,
but not to exceed 185 Pa (3/4-inch) additional pressure.
2. Provide FANS & VENTILATIONS and motors capable of stable operation at
design conditions and at ll0 percent pressure as stated above.
3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may
allow use of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When
submitted as a deviation a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of
energy conservation.
4. Select fan operating point as follows:
a. Forward curved and axial FANS & VENTILATIONS: Right hand side
of peak pressure point.

b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static efficiency.
G. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and discharge
exposed to operating and maintenance personnel.
H. Corrosion Protection:
1. All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated with minimum

two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint and paint
system shall meet the minimum specifications of: ASTM D1735 water fog;
ASTM B117 salt spray; ASTM D3359 adhesion; and ASTM G23
weathermeter.
I. Tab Procedures and Fan Motor Sizing / Selection:
1. Belt-driven fans: Fan drive and belts shall be factory mounted with final
alignment and belt adjustment to be made by the Contractor after installation.
Drive and belts shall be as specified in Section 15050. Unit manufacturer shall
provide additional drive(s) and / or speed up the blowers if required during
balancing, to achieve desired airflow. Size the fan motor liberally to allow for
speeding up; otherwise, replace the motor and associated electricals at no
additional cost to the owner.
2. Direct-driven fan: Adjust volume dampers or VFD if applicable to attain the
desired air flow.
3. For other TAB procedures and requirements, refer to Section 15950.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Manufacturers Literature and Data:
1. Fan sections, motors and drives.

2. Centrifugal FANS & VENTILATIONS, motors, drives, accessories and
coatings.
a. In-line centrifugal FANS & VENTILATIONS.

b. Up-blast kitchen hood exhaust FANS & VENTILATIONS.
c. Industrial FANS & VENTILATIONS.
d. Utility FANS & VENTILATIONS and vent sets.
3. Prefabricated roof curbs.

4. Roof and wall power ventilators.
5. Centrifugal ceiling FANS & VENTILATIONS.
6. Propeller FANS & VENTILATIONS.
7. Packaged hood make-up air units.
8. Vane axial FANS & VENTILATIONS.
9. Air curtain units.
C. Sound power levels for each fan.
D. Maintenance and operating manuals in accordance with Section 0l0l0.
E. Fan curves for each fan showing liters per second (lps) versus static pressure,
efficiency, and horsepower for design point of operation and at ll0 percent of design
static pressure. Include product application data to indicate the effect of capacity
control devices such as inlet vane dampers on flow, pressure and Kw (horsepower).


A. AFBMA 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
B. Air Moving and Control Association (AMCA):
99 Standards Handbook
2l0 Laboratory Methods of Testing FANS & VENTILATIONS for

Aerodynamic Performance Rating
26l Directory of Products Licensed to use the AMCA Certified

Ratings Seal - Published Annually
300 Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of FANS &

VENTILATIONS
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): B117- Standard Practice for
Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
D1735 Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings

Using Water Fog Apparatus
D3359 Standard Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
G23 Standard Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus

(Carbon-Arc Type) with and without Water for Exposure of
Non-Metallic Materials
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
NFPA 96 Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of

Commercial Cooking Operations.
E. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF):
37 Air Curtains for Entrance Ways in Food and Food Service

Establishments.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 FAN SECTION (CABINET FAN)
Refer to Section 15725, for specifications.
2.2 CENTRIFUGAL FANS & VENTILATIONS
A. Standards and Performance Criteria: Refer to Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE.

Record factory vibration test results on the fan or furnish to the Contractor.
B. Fan arrangement, unless noted or approved otherwise:

1. DWDl FANS & VENTILATIONS: Arrangement 3.

2. SWSl FANS & VENTILATIONS: Arrangement l, 3, 9 or l0, except fume hood
(H7 or Hl3) exhaust FANS & VENTILATIONS shall not be arrangements 3.
C. Construction: Wheel diameters and outlet areas shall be in accordance with AMCA
standards.
1. Housing: Low carbon steel, arc welded throughout, braced and supported by
structural channel or angle iron to prevent vibration or pulsation, flanged
outlet, inlet fully streamlined. Provide lifting clips, and casing drain. Provide
manufacturer's standard access door. Provide 12.5 mm (1/2") wire mesh
screens for fan inlets without duct connections.
2. Wheel: Steel plate with die formed blades welded or riveted in place, factory
balanced statically and dynamically.
3. Shaft: Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of the first critical
speed at the top of the speed range of the FANS & VENTILATIONS class.
4. Bearings: Heavy duty ball or roller type sized to produce a Bl0 life of not less
than 40,000 hours, and an average fatigue life of 200,000 hours. Extend
lubrication tubes for interior bearings or ducted units to outside of housing.
5. Motor, adjustable motor base, drive and guard: Furnish from factory with fan.
Refer to Section 15050, for specifications. Provide protective sheet metal
enclosure for FANS & VENTILATIONS located outdoors.
6. Furnish variable speed fan motor controllers where shown on the drawings.
Refer to Section 16155. Refer to Section 15050, for controller/motor
combination requirements.
D. In-line Centrifugal FANS & VENTILATIONS: In addition to the requirements of

paragraphs A and C, provide inlet and outlet flanges, bolted access door and
arrangement l, 4 or 9 supports as required.
E. Up-Blast Kitchen Hood Exhaust FANS & VENTILATIONS: In-line centrifugal,

arrangement 9, vertical up-blast, mounting bracket and curb cap, sheet metal weather
cover for motor and drive, wind band discharge cap with gravity dampers, and bolted
access door, in addition to requirements of paragraphs A and C.
F. Industrial FANS & VENTILATIONS: Use where scheduled or in lieu of centrifugal

FANS & VENTILATIONS for low volume high static service. Construction
specifications paragraphs A and C for centrifugal FANS & VENTILATIONS shall
apply. Provide air handling type wheel.
G. Utility FANS & VENTILATIONS, Vent Sets and Small Capacity FANS &
VENTILATIONS: Class l design, arc welded housing, spun intake cone. Applicable
construction specifications, paragraphs A and C, for centrifugal FANS &
VENTILATIONS shall apply for wheel diameters 300 mm (l2 inches) and larger.
Requirement for AMCA seal is waived for wheel diameters less than 300 mm (l2
inches) and housings may be cast iron.
2.3 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS
A. Construction: Galvanized steel, with continuous welded corner seams, two inch wall
thickness, treated wood nailer, 38 mm (l-l/2 inch) thick, 48 kg per cubic meter (3
pound) density rigid mineral fiberboard insulation with metal liner, built-in cant strip,
(except for gypsum or tectum decks). For surface insulated roof deck provide raised
cant strip to start at the upper surface of the insulation. Curbs shall be built for pitched
roof or ridge mounting as required to keep top of curb level.
B. Curb Height: 300 mm (l2 inches) overall curb height, except curb height for up-blast
kitchen hood exhaust fan shall be 450 mm (l8 inches) above roof surface or as
required to comply with NFPA 96.

2.4 ROOF OR WALL POWER VENTILATOR
B. Type: Centrifugal fan, backward inclined blades.
C. Construction: Steel or aluminum, completely weatherproof, for curb or wall mounting,

exhaust cowl or entire drive assembly readily removable for servicing, aluminum bird
screen on discharge, UL approved safety disconnect switch, conduit for wiring,
vibration isolators for wheel, motor and drive assembly. Provide self acting back draft
damper.
D. Motor and Drive: Refer to Section 15050. Bearings shall be pillow block with B-l0
average life of 200,000 hours.
E. Prefabricated Roof Curb: As specified in this section.
F. TRV Unit: Top discharge exhauster, motor out of air stream, grease trough on base.
2.5 PACKAGED HOOD MAKE-UP AIR UNITS
A. Curb mounted air supply unit complete with centrifugal blower and filters.
1. Housing: Galvanized steel with baffled air intake for weather protection and
with duct adapter.
2. Blower: Ball bearing utility type with vibration mounts to isolate blower, motor
and drive.
3. Prefabricated roof curb: As specified in this section.
4. Filters: 25 mm (One inch) thick, metal, washable. Provide four 300 mm by 300
mm (12 inches by 12 inches) filters.
5. Prefabricated roof curb: As specified in this section.
B. Provide easy access to motor and drive.
2.6 CENTRIFUGAL CEILING FANS & VENTILATIONS (SMALL CABINET FAN)
B. Steel housing, baked enamel finish, direct connected fan assembly, attached grille.
Provide back draft assembly, aluminum wall cap and insect screen.
C. Acoustical Lining: 12.5 mm (One-half inch) thick mineral fiber, dark finish.
D. Motor: Shaded pole or permanent split capacitor, sleeve bearings, supported by steel
brackets in combination with rubber isolators.
E. Ceiling Grille, (Where indicated): White plastic egg crate design, 80 percent free area.
2.7 PROPELLER FANS & VENTILATIONS
B. Square steel panel, deep drawn venturi, arc welded to support arms and fan/motor
support brackets, baked enamel finish. Provide wall collar for thru-wall installations.
C. Motor, Motor Base and Drive: Refer to Section 15050.
D. Wall Shutter: Fan manufacturer's standard, steel frame, aluminum blades.

E. Wire Safety Guards: Provide on exposed inlet and outlet.
2.8 TUBE AXIAL FANS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to Section 15007

Acceptable Equipment and Suppliers.
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the

product indicated on the Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Greenheck
2. Niagara (The New York Blower Company)
3. Kruger
C. Description: Fan wheel and housing, factory-mounted motor with belt drive or direct
drive, an inlet cone section, and accessories.
D. Housings: Galvanized steel with flanged inlet and outlet connections.
E. Wheel Assemblies: Cast or extruded aluminum with airfoil-shaped blades mounted

on cast-iron wheel plate keyed to shaft with solid-steel key.
F. Wheel Assemblies: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic cured under pressure with airfoil-

shaped blades keyed to stainless steel shaft.
G. Wheel Assemblies: Cast aluminum, machined and fitted to shaft.
H. Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based On Fan Motor Size: 1.15.

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, Ground, And Polished Steel Designed To Operate At No
More Than 70 Percent Of First Critical Speed At Top Of Fan's Speed Range.
3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at
factory.
4. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch
for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle
of adjustment range at fan design conditions.
5. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
6. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.
7. Motor Mount: Adjustable base.
8. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning ball or roller bearings.
a. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 100,000 hours.

b. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, L10 of 100,000 hours.
c. Extend lubrication lines to outside of casing and terminate with
grease fittings.
I. Accessories:
1. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges of same material as housing.

2. Inspection Door: Bolted door allowing limited access to internal parts of fan,
of same material as housing.
3. Propeller Access Section Door: Short duct section bolted to fan outlet
allowing access to internal parts of fan for inspection and cleaning, of same
material as housing.
4. Swingout Construction: Assembly allowing entire fan section to swing out
from duct for cleaning and servicing, of same material as housing.

5. Mounting Clips: Horizontal ceiling clips welded to fan housing, of same

6. Horizontal Support: Pair of supports bolted to fan housing, of same material
as housing.
7. Vertical Support: Short duct section with welded brackets bolted to fan
housing, of same material as housing.
8. Inlet and Outlet Screens: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to
ductwork, of same material as housing.
9. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for bolting to the discharge of fan or outlet
cone, of same material as housing.
10. Shaft Seal: Elastomeric seal and Teflon wear plate, suitable for up to 300
deg F (149 deg C).
11. Motor Cover: Cover with side vents to dissipate motor heat, of same material
as housing.
12. Inlet Vanes: Adjustable; with peripheral control linkage operated from outside
of airstream, bronze sleeve bearings on each end of vane support, and
provision for manual or automatic operation of same material as housing.
13. Inlet Bell: Curved inlet for when fan is not attached to duct, aluminum.
14. Inlet Cones: Round-to-rectangular transition of same material as housing.
15. Outlet Cones: Round-to-rectangular transition of same material as housing.
16. Stack Cap: Vertical discharge assembly with backdraft dampers, of same
J. Motors: Comply with requirements in Section 15055 Motors, Starters, Control Centers
and Wiring.
1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

2. Direct-Driven Units: Encase motor in housing outside of airstream, factory
wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing.
K. Factory Finishes:
1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.

2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
3. Coatings: Powder-baked enamel.
a. Apply to finished housings.

b. Apply to fan wheels.
L. Isolators: Restrained spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm).
2.9 VANEXIAL FANS


product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Greenheck
3. Kruger
C. Description: Fan wheel and housing, straightening vane section, factory-mounted

motor with belt drive or direct drive, an inlet cone section, and accessories.
1. Variable-Pitch Fans: Internally mounted electronic actuator, externally

mounted positive positioner, and mechanical-blade-pitch indicator.

D. Housings: Galvanized steel.
1. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Flanges.

2. Guide Vane Section: Integral guide vanes downstream from fan wheel
designed to straighten airflow.
E. Wheel Assemblies: Cast aluminum with airfoil-shaped blades mounted on cast-iron

wheel plate keyed to shaft with solid-steel key.
F. Wheel Assemblies: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic cured under pressure with airfoil-

shaped blades keyed to stainless steel shaft.
G. Wheel Assemblies: Cast-aluminum hub assembly, machined and fitted with threaded
bearing wells to receive blade-bearing assemblies with replaceable, cast-aluminum
blades; factory mounted and balanced.
H. Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.15.

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no
more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.
factory.
drives.
6. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.

grease fittings.
I. Accessories
1. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges of same material as housing.

2. Inspection Door: Bolted door allowing limited access to internal parts of fan,
of same material as housing.
3. Propeller Access Section Door: Short duct section bolted to fan outlet
allowing access to internal parts of fan for inspection and cleaning, of same
4. Swingout Construction: Assembly allowing entire fan section to swing out
from duct for cleaning and servicing, of same material as housing.
6. Horizontal Support: Pair of supports bolted to fan housing, of same material
as housing.
7. Vertical Support: Short duct section with welded brackets bolted to fan
housing, of same material as housing.
ductwork of same material as housing.
9. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for mounting with flexible connection to
the discharge of fan or direct mounted to the discharge diffuser section of
same material as housing.

10. Stall Alarm Probe: Sensing probe capable of detecting fan operation in stall
and signaling control devices. Control devices and sequence of operation are
specified in Division 15 Sections "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and
"Sequence of Operation."
11. Flow Measurement Port: Pressure measurement taps installed in the inlet of
fan to detect and signal airflow readings to temperature-control systems.
Control devices and sequence of operation are specified in Division 15
Sections "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and "Sequence of Operation."
12. Shaft Seal: Elastomeric seal and Teflon wear plate, suitable for up to 300
deg F (148 deg C).
as housing.
14. Inlet Vanes: Adjustable; with peripheral control linkage operated from outside
of airstream, bronze sleeve bearings on each end of vane support, and
provision for manual or automatic operation of same material as housing.
15. Inlet Bell: Curved inlet for when fan is not attached to duct, of same material
as housing.
J. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors, Starters, Control

Centers and Wiring."

K. Factory Finishes:


2.10 MIXED-FLOW FANS


product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Greenheck
3. Kruger
C. Description: Fan wheel and housing, factory-mounted motor with belt drive, and
accessories.
D. Housings: Galvanized steel.
1. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Outer mounting frame and companion flanges.
2. Guide Vane Section: Integral guide vanes downstream from fan wheel
designed to straighten airflow.

3. Mixed-Flow Outlet Connection: Two flanged discharge(s) perpendicular to

fan inlet.
E. Wheel Assemblies: Cast aluminum with airfoil-shaped blades mounted on cast-iron

wheel plate keyed to shaft with solid-steel key.
F. Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.15.

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no
more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.
factory.
drives.
grease fittings.
G. Accessories:

ductwork of same material as housing.
3. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for mounting with flexible connection to
the discharge of fan or direct mounted to the discharge diffuser section of
same material as housing.
as housing.
5. Inlet Bell: Curved inlet for when fan is not attached to duct, of same material
as housing.
H. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section Motors, Starters, Control

Centers and Wiring.

I. Factory Finishes:



2.11 CARPARK JET FANS
A. Standards and Performance Criteria: Refer to Paragraph, Quality Assurance.
B. Motor, Motor Base and Drive: Refer to Section 15050.
C. Fully certified meeting or Exceeding AMCA 250.
D. Fully comply with the fire regulation fire rating tested by Warrington Fire with clause B,
C, D.
2.12 AIR CURTAIN UNITS
A. Manufacturer's standard, high velocity, non-recirculating type with demonstrated

performance in effectively preventing entry of dust and insects and effectively stopping
inflow of air due to winds of 24 km/h (l5 mph) velocity. AMCA seal is waived. Units for
kitchens or food storage shall comply with NSF 37.
B. Casing: Sheet metal or polycarbonate plastic. Provide, internal or external vibration

isolation to effectively prevent transmission of vibration and noise from units to
building structure. Units shall completely house all parts and have manufacturer's
standard finish coating.
C. FANS & VENTILATIONS: Ruggedly constructed, statically and dynamically balanced.

Noise level shall not exceed 77 dBA measured at 1.5 m (5 feet) distance.
E. Air Discharge Outlet Nozzle: Cover full width of door opening. Fan discharge ducts,
plenum, flow control vanes and nozzles shall provide a uniform distribution of air over
entire length of door. Provide adjustable volume and directional control.
F. Controls: Provide on-off door operated switch. The "on-off" switch circuit shall close to
start fan motors when door starts to open and open when the door reaches closed
position. A local disconnect switch for each fan motor shall be provided and shall be
mounted to be accessible without use of ladder.
G. Motors: Fan motors shall be of type suitable for service conditions, sealed ball
bearings, resilient mounting, automatic thermal overload switch.
2.13 INITIAL PARTIAL CAPACITY OPERATION
Some fans may initially be operated at partial capacity as indicated on the equipment
schedule. In these cases, the pulleys/sheaves shall be sized at the reduced capacity subject
for future replacement, and the fans shall have satisfactory and stable operation at the
specified initial partial capacity although shall be sized at full capacity.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install fan, motor and drive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Align fan and motor sheaves to allow belts to run true and straight.
C. Bolt equipment to curbs with galvanized lag bolts.

3.2 PRE-OPERATION MAINTENANCE
A. Grease bearings.
B. Rotate impeller by hand and check for shifting during shipment and check all bolts,
collars, and other parts for tightness.
3.3 START-UP AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Check vibration and correct as necessary for air balance work.
B. After air balancing is complete and permanent sheaves are in place perform
necessary field mechanical balancing to meet vibration tolerance in Section 15071.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Air Terminal Units SECTION 15840
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 RELATED WORK.......................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.6 GUARANTY ................................................................................................................................. 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 2
2.1 AIR TERMINAL UNITS (BOXES)...................................................................................................... 2
2.2 AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE (AFCV) .............................................................................................. 4
2.3 ROOM FAN COIL UNITS ............................................................................................................... 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................... 5
3.1 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................. 5
3.2 OPERATIONAL TEST .................................................................................................................... 5

Development\Mechanical\15840-Air Terminal Units.DOC
SECTION 15840
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
Air terminal units, air flow control valves, and fan-coil units.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15010 Mechanical General Provisions.
B. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: General

mechanical requirements and items, which are common to
more than one section of Division 15.
C. Section 15071 Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Control: Noise

requirements.
D. Section 15840 Air Terminal Units.
E. Section 15900 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
F. Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: Flow rates adjusting and
balancing
Refer to Paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 15010.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Air Terminal Units: Submit test data.
2. Air flow control valves.
3. Fan Coil units.
C. Samples: Provide one typical air terminal unit for approval by the Consultant. This unit
will be returned to the Contractor after all similar units have been shipped and deemed
acceptable at the job site.
D. Certificates:
1. Compliance with paragraph, QUALITY ASSURANCE.
2. Compliance with specified standards.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit in accordance with paragraph,

INSTRUCTIONS, in Section 0l0l0.


A. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI):
440R Room Fan Coils
880 Air Terminals
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and

Ventilating Systems
181 Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors
883 Fan Coil Units and Room-Fan Heater Units
1.6 GUARANTY
In accordance with Section 01001.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR TERMINAL UNITS (BOXES)
A. General: Factory built, pressure independent units, factory set-field adjustable volume,
suitable for single or dual duct applications, as indicated. Clearly show on each unit
the unit number and factory set air volumes corresponding to the contract drawings.
Section 15950. Testing, adjusting and balancing work assume factory set air volumes.
Coordinate flow controller sequence and damper operation details with the drawings
and Section 15900.
B. Rating and Performance Certification: ARI Industry Standard 880.
1. Maximum pressure drop: As shown on the drawings.
2. Maximum room sound levels: Not to exceed criteria stated in Section 15071.
(Low-pressure duct is usually unlined. The inlet pressure should not be less
than 374 Pa (1-1/2 inches water gage), unless shown otherwise on drawings.
Provide terminal sound attenuators where necessary to comply with the noise
criteria. Sound tests and correction of deficiencies is specified in Section
15950.
C. Casing: Unit casing shall be constructed of galvanized steel not lighter than 0.85 mm
(22 gage) or aluminum sheet not lighter than 1.3 mm (18 gage). Casing of units
serving surgery area (where applicable) shall be of aluminum. Provide hanger
brackets for attachment of supports.
1. Lining material: Suitable to provide required acoustic performance, thermal

insulation and prevent sweating. Meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and
comply with UL 181 for erosion, 13 mm (one-half inch) minimum thickness,
secured to supporting surfaces in such a manner that it will not sag,
delaminate, or settle.

Comply with UL Standard l8l for erosion. Surfaces, including all edges, shall
be faced with perforated metal or coated so that the air stream will not detach
material. No lining material is permitted in the boxes serving surgery areas.
2. Access panels (or doors): Provide panels large enough for inspection,
adjustment and maintenance without disconnecting ducts, and for cleaning
heating coils attached to unit, even if there are no moving parts. Panels shall
be flushed, gasketed airtight, and shall require no tool other than a
screwdriver to remove. Access panels on low-pressure side, i.e., downstream
of volume damper, do not require gasket if tightly fitted.
3. Total leakage from casing: Not to exceed 2 percent of the nominal capacity of
the unit when subjected to a static pressure of 747 pa (3 inch water gage),
with all outlets sealed shut and inlets fully open.
4. Octopus connector: Factory installed, lined air distribution terminal. Provide

where flexible duct connections to terminals are shown on the drawings.
Provide butterfly-balancing damper, with locking means, in connectors with
more than one outlet. No lining material is permitted in the boxes serving
surgery areas.
D. Construct dampers and other internal devices of corrosion resisting materials which
do not require lubrication or other periodic maintenance. The dampers and other
internal or external devices for boxes serving surgery area shall be of stainless steel
or aluminum.
E. Single Duct Terminals: Provide manufacturer's standard catalogue.
1. Variable Air Volume Units (VAV): Externally powered electronic DDC control
capable of BMS interface, variable air volume, with field adjustable maximum
and minimum set points.
a. Volume damper or air valve with actuator and relays.
b. Variable Air volume electronic controller: Provide pressure

independent electronic controls, which can be reset to modulate
airflow between, zero and the maximum cataloged CFM or L/s.
Provide multi-point, center-averaging velocity sensor, with a minimum
of four measuring ports. Provide a minimum differential pressure
signal of 7.5 Pa (0.03 inch water gage) at inlet velocity of 2.6 m/s (500
fpm). Provide control signal accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent with
the same inlet size at any inlet condition. The velocity controller shall
have a constant 2 degrees temperature reset span regardless of the
minimum and maximum airflow limit. Provide 24 volt reversible
actuator, class II 24 volt transformer, and disconnect switch. Actuator
shall be direct connection shaft mount type without linkage, and be
equipped with magnetic clutch. All controls shall be installed in
approved NEMA 1 enclosure.
2. Constant volume single duct. The unit shall contain within the casing, a
mechanical constant volume regulator. Volume regulator shall control air
delivery to within plus or minus 5 percent of specified air flow subjected to
inlet pressure up to 1500 pa (6 inches water gage). Controls will be designed
to provide required sequence of operation.
F. Terminal Sound Attenuators: Construction shall be similar to sound attenuators in

Section 15840.

2.2 AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE (AFCV)
A.. Units shall be normally closed, constant volume, DDC control type with attenuators
and/or lined duct required to meet room NC criteria. Air terminal units (boxes) may be
used for this service.
2.3 ROOM FAN COIL UNITS
A. Capacity Certification: ARI 440.
B. Safety Compliance: NEC and UL 883.
C. Noise Levels: Operating at full cooling capacity, sound power level shall not exceed by
more than 5 dB the numerical value of sound pressure levels associated with noise
criteria specified in Section 15071. Select units at intermediate speed, for compliance
with the noise criteria.
D. Chassis: Galvanized steel, acoustically and thermally insulated to attenuate noise and
prevent condensation.
E. Cabinet Type: Not lighter than 1.3 mm (l8 gage) steel, reinforced and braced. Arrange
components and provide adequate space for installation of piping package and control
valves. Finish shall be factory-baked enamel in manufacturer's standard color as
selected by the architect. Provide synthetic rubber or polyurethane gasket for air-tight
installation to the wall for outside air to vertical units and return air to horizontal units.
l. Vertical Unit: Provide 1.6 mm (l6 gage) steel front panel with 13 mm (l/2-inch)
thick fiberglass insulation and provide screw-type levelers.
a. Air outlet grilles: Adjustable four-way air deflection located in the top
panel.
b. Provide two hinged access doors (one each side) equipped with key
operated cam-lock fasteners in the unit top panel located to provide
access to the unit controls.
2. Horizontal Unit: Hinged bottom access panel with cam-lock fasteners. Provide
stamped integral discharged grilles in front of cabinet.
F. Concealed Units: Enclosed type with inlet and outlet duct collars.
G. Fans: Centrifugal, direct drive, galvanized steel or polyester resin.
l. Motors: 3-speed permanent split capacitor type with integral thermal overload
protection, for operation at not more than l200 RPM.
2. Provide a fan speed selector switch, with off position, mounted in a junction
box in the cabinet of each unit. Switch shall have a set of auxiliary contacts
which are open when the switch is in the "off" position and closed when the
switch in either of the other positions.
H. Cooling and Electric Heating Coils (where applicable):
1. Cooling Coils: Copper tubes, 10 mm (three-eighths inch) minimum inside

diameter, not less than 4.3 mm (0.0l7 inch) thick with copper of aluminum fins.
Coils shall be pressure tested for bursting and strength in accordance with
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., requirements for pressure tested coils, and
shall be designed to provide adequate heat transfer capacity. Provide manual
air vent at high point of coil.

2. Electrical heating coils: Spiral sheath or finned-tube construction with Cal-rod

resistance elements in aluminum tubes. Units shall be UL listed and factory
wired with unit mounted heat switch, magnetic contactors, high temperature
cutout safety control, and fan override thermostat.
I. Piping Package: Furnished with unit by the manufacturer to fit control valves provided
by the controls supplier. Submit manufacturer's detailed drawings of the piping in the
end compartments, for approval, prior to fabrication of the piping packages. Provide
gate valves on the supply and return pipes and balancing fittings on the return pipes.
J. Drain Pan: Galvanized steel or carbon steel bonderized and finished with not less
than two coats of baked enamel or equally durable finish, and of strength to
requirement of function it performs in unit. Inside or outside surfaces of drain pan shall
be coated with mastic type insulation or closed cell polyurethane. Provide a similar
secondary drain pan, which may be steel or PVC, provided with a drain connection to
catch condensation from all piping, coils and primary drain pan.
K. Air Filter: Manufacturer's standard throwaway type, not less than one inch thick,
supported to be concealed from sight and be tight fitting to prevent air by-pass. Filters
shall have slide out frames and be easily replaced without removing enclosure or any
part thereof.
L. Control valves and unit mounted return air thermostats are to be field installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Work shall be installed as shown and according to the manufacturer’s diagrams and
recommendations.
B. Handle and install units in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Support units rigidly so they remain stationary at all times. Cross-bracing or other
means of stiffening shall be provided as necessary. Method of support shall be such
that distortion and malfunction of units cannot occur.
D. Locate air terminal units to provide a straight section of inlet duct for proper
functioning of volume controls.
3.2 OPERATIONAL TEST
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Air Filters SECTION 15861
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 RELATED WORK.......................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................... 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 2
2.1 REPLACEMENT FILTER ELEMENTS TO BE FURNISHED .................................................................... 2
2.2 EXTENDED SURFACE AIR FILTERS ............................................................................................... 2
2.3 HEPA FILTERS ............................................................................................................................. 5
2.4 HEPA FILTER CEILING MODULE ...................................................................................................... 6
PART 3 – EXECUTION........................................................................................................................... 7
3.1 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................. 7
3.2 START-UP AND TEMPORARY USE ................................................................................................. 7

Development\Mechanical\15861-Air Filters.doc
SECTION 15861
AIR FILTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Air filters for heating, ventilating and air conditioning.
B. Definitions: Refer to ASHRAE 52.1 for definitions of face velocity, net effective filtering
area, media velocity, resistance (pressure drop), atmospheric dust spot efficiency and
dust-holding capacity.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15050 -Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B. Section 15725 - Air Handling Units.
A. Air Filter Performance Report for Extended Surface Filters:
1. Submit a test report for each Grade of filter being offered. The report shall be
less than five years old and will have been prepared by an independent
testing laboratory using test equipment, method and duct section as specified
by ASHRAE Standard 52.1 for type filter under test and acceptable to
Consultant, indicating that filters comply with the requirements of this
specification. Test for 150 m/min (500 fpm) will be accepted for lower velocity
rated filters provided the test report of an independent testing laboratory
complies with all the requirements of this specification.
2. Selection procedures: All filters tested shall have been procured by the
independent testing laboratory from the open market independent of
manufacturer of these filters and a statement to this effect must accompany
test report.
3. Owner’s Option: The Owner at its option may take one of the filters for each
different type submitted and run an independent test to determine if the filter
meets the requirements of this specification. When the filter meets the
requirements, the Owner will pay for the test. When the filter does not meet
the specification requirements, the manufacturer will be required to pay for the
test and replace the filters with filters that will perform as required by the
specifications.
B. Filter Supplier Warranty for Extended Surface Filters: Guarantee the filters against
leak, blow-outs, and other deficiencies during their normal useful life. Defective filters
shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner.
C. Nameplates: Each filter shall bear a label or name plate indicating manufacturer's
name, filter size, rated efficiency, UL classification, and file number.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Extended surface filters.
2. Holding frames. Identify locations.

3. Side access housings. Identify locations, verify insulated doors.
4. HEPA filters.
5. Magnehelic gages.
C. Air filter performance reports.
D. Suppliers warranty.

publications are referenced in the text by basic designation only.
A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers, Inc.

(ASHRAE):
52.1.1 Methods of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General

Ventilation For Removing Particulate Matter
B. American national Standards Institute (ANSI):
ANSI N45.2 Quality Assurance Requirements for Nuclear Power Plants
900 UL Standard for Safety Test Performance of Air Filter Units
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REPLACEMENT FILTER ELEMENTS TO BE FURNISHED
A. To allow temporary use of HVAC systems for testing and in accordance with
Paragraph, TEMPORARY USE OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS in
Section 15010, provide one complete set of additional (replacement) filter elements.
B. The Consultant will direct whether these additional filters will either be installed as
replacements for dirty units or turned over to the Owner for future use as
replacements.
2.2 EXTENDED SURFACE AIR FILTERS
A. Use factory assembled air filters of the extended surface type with supported or
non-supported cartridges for removal of particulate matter in air conditioning, heating
and ventilating systems. Filter units shall be of the extended surface type fabricated
for disposal when the dust-load limit is reached as indicated by maximum (final)
pressure drop.
B. Filter Classification: UL approved Class 1 or Class 2 conforming to UL Standard 900.
C. Filter Grades, Percent, Nominal Efficiency and Application:
1. Grade A: 90-95 after-filter.
2. Grade B: 80-85 after-filter.

3. Grade C: 50-60 pre-filter.
4. Grade D: 25-30 pre-filter.
D. Filter Media:
1. Grade A, B and C Non-supported (Bag) Type: Construct media of high density

glass fibers or other suitable fibers. Enclose or pocket each pleat in woven or
non-woven backing material. Seal and fasten (stitch) to maintain pleat shape
in a proper frame to insure no air leakage for life of filter. Staples and stays
are prohibited.
2. Grade A, B and C Supported (Rigid Pleated) Type: Media shall be composed

of high density glass fibers or other suitable fibers. Fastening methods used to
maintain pleat shape, (metal backing or aluminum separators) shall be sealed
in a proper enclosing frame to insure no air leakage for life of filter. Staples
and stays are prohibited.
3. Grade D (Pleated) Type: Media shall be composed of synthetic/natural fibers.

A metal grid backing shall be bonded to the air leaving side of the media to
maintain uniform pleat shape and stability for proper air flow and maximum
dust loading. The media frame shall be constructed of high strength moisture
resistant fiber or beverage board. Bond the pleated media pack on all four
edges to insure no air leakage for the life of the filter. Staples and stays are
prohibited.
E. Filter Efficiency and Arrestance: Efficiency and arrestance of filters shall be

determined in accordance with ASHRAE 52.1-92. Atmospheric dust spot efficiency
and synthetic dust weight arrestance shall not be less than the following:
Percentage of Initial Percentage of Average Percentage of

Efficiency Efficiency Average Arrestance
Grade A 75.4 86.4 99.0
Grade B 58.0 79.0 98.0
Grade C 25.0 53.0 97.0
Grade D Less than 20.0 22.0 89.0
F. Maximum initial and final resistance, Pa (inches of water), for each filter cartridge
when operated at 150 m/min (500 feet per minute) face velocity:
Initial Resistance Final Resistance
Grade A (Bag) 130 (0.52) 250 (1.00)
Grade A (Rigid Pleated) 185 (0.74) 250 (l.00)
Grade B (Bag) 100 (0.40) 250 (l.00)
Grade B (Rigid Pleated) 150 (0.60) 250 (l.00)
Grade C (Bag) 70 (0.28) 200 (0.80)
Grade C (Rigid Pleated) 85 (0.35) 200 (0.80)
Grade D (2-inch deep) 80 (0.32) 175 (0.70)
Grade D (4-inch deep) 65 (0.27) 175 (0.70)

G. Dust Holding Capacity: When tested to 250 Pa (l.00-inch water) at 150 m/min (500
fpm) face velocity, the dust holding capacity for each 600 mm by 600 mm (24 inches
by 24 inches) (face area) filter shall be at least the values listed below. For other filter
sizes the dust holding capacity shall be proportionally higher or lower to the face area.
Grade A (Bag) 300 grams
Grade A (Rigid Pleated) 90 grams
Grade B (Bag) 430 grams
Grade B (Rigid Pleated) 175 grams
Grade C (Bag) 910 grams
Grade C (Rigid Pleated) 250 grams
Grade D (2 inch deep) 150 grams
Grade D (4 inch deep) 300 grams
H. Minimum Media Area: The minimum net effective media area in square meter (square
feet) for each 600 mm by 600 mm (24 inches by 24 inches) (face area) filter at 150
m/min (500 fpm) face velocity shall be at least the values listed below. For other filter
sizes the net effective media area shall be proportionally higher or lower.
Grade A (Bag) 8.5 (9l.0)
Grade A (Rigid Pleated) 5.3 (57.0)
Grade B (Bag) 8.5 (9l.0)
Grade B (Rigid Pleated) 5.3 (57.0)
Grade C (Bag) 8.5 (9l.0)
Grade C (Rigid Pleated) 5.3 (57.0)
Grade D (2-inch deep) 1.4 (l4.8)
Grade D (4-inch deep) 2.1 (23.0)
I. Side Servicing Housings (Where Applicable):
1. Minimum 1.6 mm (l6 gage galvanized steel, or aluminum, completely factory

assembled with upstream and downstream flanges for connection into the
duct system. Furnish housing length sufficient to provide for fully extended
operating filter elements.
2. Access doors: Double skin insulated, at each end of the housing with
continuous gasketing on the perimeter and positive locking devices. Design
doors to withstand a minimum positive/negative 1.0 kPa (four inches of water)
static pressure.
3. Filter slide channels: Channels shall incorporate a positive-sealing gasket

material to seal the top and bottom of the filter cartridge frames to prevent
bypass. Provide factory installed gasketing to prevent leakage between
cartridges, and between cartridges and doors.

J. Holding Frame System (Where Applicable):
1. Minimum 1.6 mm (l6 gage) galvanized steel, 100 mm (4 inches) deep, factory
complete with hardware necessary for field assembly, suitable for either
upstream or downstream filter servicing. All members shall be cut to size and
prepunched for easy assembly into modules of the size and capacity noted in
the schedules.
2. The framing members shall be permanently gasketed to prevent the bypass of

unfiltered air. If required, furnish suitable vertical support members to prevent
deflection of horizontal members. The vertical support members shall not
interfere with either the installation or operation of the filters.
3. The framing system shall incorporate a factory installed positive sealing

device for each row of filters. This device shall allow for easy installation and
removal of cartridges and shall insure the seal between the gasketed filter
elements while the building is in operation.
K. Magnehelic Differential Pressure Filter Gages: Nominal 100 mm (four inch) diameter,
zero to 500 Pa (zero to two inch water gage) range, flush mounted in aluminum panel
board, complete with static tips, copper or aluminum tubing, and accessory items to
provide zero adjustment. Provide one gage for each extended surface filter section.
Provide Petcocks for each gauge.
L. Equipment Identification: Section 15050.
2.3 HEPA FILTERS
A. High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filters shall be individually tested and certified
to be 99.97 percent minimum efficient when handling 0.3 micron particles in
accordance with DOP test method. Filters shall be factory scanned. The DOP
efficiency along with filter serial number and name of manufacturer shall be marked on
the filter. HEPA filter shall have maximum pressure drop of 250 Pa (1” WG) when
clean at rated flow with a final pressure drop of 500 Pa (2” WG).
B. Filter media: Factory constructed by pleating a continuous sheet of media into closely
spaced pleats with kraft or aluminum separators. Sealer shall be self-extinguishing.
C. Enclosing frame shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel. Provide pre-filters in the same
housing with a separate removal assembly that operates independently from the
HEPA filters.
D. Pre-filter: Type D, 2 inches deep. See paragraph 2.2
E. Bag-In/Bag-Out Housing for HEPA Filters:
1. Housing shall be fabricated of 15 gauge type 304 stainless steel.
2. Housing shall be equipped with weather covers, drilled face flanges and
factory mounted Magnehelic gauges with Petcocks housed in stainless steel
brackets.
3. Housing shall be pressure tested in factory for high quality to withstand a

positive or negative pressure of 10” WG. If HEPA filters are specified for TB
Isolation Rooms, perform a quantitative leakage and filter performance DOP
(Dioctyl Phthalate Penetration) field test in addition to factory test at the initial
installation recommended by the Center for Disease Control (CDC).
4. Housing shall incorporate a spring loaded clamping mechanism that is

operated from outside and which is capable of exerting a 5340 N (1,200 lb.)
sealing force across the top and bottom of each filter.

5. Each housing shall have a bagging ring around the access port that is sealed
by a removable, gasketed access door. The bagging ring shall have two (2)
continuous ribs to secure the plastic change-out bag and be hemmed on its
outer edge to prevent the bag from tearing.
6. One 87 mil thick PVC change-out bag shall be supplied for each access door.
The bag shall include approximately 300 mm (12 inches) of transparent PVC
at the open end and three glove sleeves built into the body to assist in filter
change-out. Bag-In/Bag-Out housings shall be manufactured under a quality
assurance program that addresses the requirements of ANSI N45.2, “Quality
Assurance Requirements for Nuclear Power Plants.”
2.4 HEPA FILTER CEILING MODULE
1. Design for optimum filter performance with an individually ducted system for use in
laminar and non-laminar flow cleanroom Class 1000,000 to 10.
2. Hermetically sealed to prevent voids and leaks to meet stringent air quality
requirements of cleanrooms. It is typically installed in a T-Bar grid system suspended
from the ceiling or installed in a modular ceiling grid. Hold-down clamping is not
required.
Its low profile, lightweight, and disposable design makes it deal for use in hospital
operating theatres and laboratories, pharmaceutical, microelectric, film and optical
fiber facilities, food processing plants and other applications where airborne
contaminants must be carefully controlled.
3. Hermetically sealed and tested to prevent leakage between hood inlet and air leaving
side. All metal to metal joints are bonded to eliminate bypass leakage.
4. The standard module comes with a 250mm (10”) diameter inlet, a fixed distribution
plate, an integral round duct connection and a white epoxy coated faceguard on the
downstream side to protect the HEPA mini-pleat pack.
5. Lightweight anodised extruded aluminium. The low profile and lightweight of the
Disposable Ceiling Module helps to reduce handling and installation time.
6. Filter is made of water-resistant and fire retardant glass fiber media, as follows:
H14 HEPA filter – 99.999% minimum efficiency on 0.3 m particles.
7. All HEPA filers are leak tested. ULPA filters are scanned with a laser spectometer with
PSL particles for leaks, and tested for efficiency and air distribution.
8. Standard Specifications:
a. Operating Temperature : 70 ºC (158 ºF)
b. Housing : Anodized aluminium extrusion, standard

profile
c. Gasket : Neoprene
d. Faceguard Location : Air leaving side
e. Media : H14 HEPA Filter (99.999% efficiency on 0.3

m particles)

f. Accessories:
- Flat profile, closed cell neoprene gasket on air leaving side

- Divider and volume control damper
- Adjustable distribution plate with divider.
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install supports, filters and gages in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 START-UP AND TEMPORARY USE
A. Clean and vacuum air handling units and plenums to the satisfaction of the Consultant
prior to starting air handling systems.
B. Install or deliver replacement filter units as directed by the Consultant.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL HVAC Instrumentation and Controls SECTION 15900
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 WORK INCLUDED ....................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 RELATED WORK ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.4 SENSORS .................................................................................................................................. 1
1.5 THERMOSTATS AND HUMIDISTATS .............................................................................................. 6
1.6 FINAL CONTROL ELEMENTS AND OPERATORS ............................................................................. 6
1.7 AIR FLOW CONTROL AND MONITORING ....................................................................................... 9
1.8 ULTRASONIC, THERMAL, THERMAL-ENERGY METERS: ............................................................... 10
1.9 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION / CONTROL SEQUENCE .................................................................... 10
PART 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 15
NOT USED ........................................................................................................................................ 15
PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 15
3.1 INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................................... 15
3.2 IDENTIFICATION ....................................................................................................................... 15
3.3 WIRING ................................................................................................................................... 16
3.4 FACTORY BUILT EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................... 16
3.5 WARNING NOTICES .................................................................................................................. 16

Development\Mechanical\15900-HVAC Instrumentation and Controls.doc
SECTION 15900
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply, install, wire,
calibrate and commission the electronic control and monitoring system
instrumentation as specified in the point schedules, in this Specification and as
required to make a complete and functional system.
C. Coordinate instrumentation provisions with Division 16, Section 16965 Building

Management System (Controller & Software).
A. Instrumentation work shall be performed by one firm specializing in the installation of

control systems for building facilities control.
B. Products referenced under this Section establish the minimum acceptable standards
of product quality, features and performance. Products provided under this Section
shall be coordinated with the supplier of the BMS system.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Where the application of any special software package requires additional

instrumentation to meet the requirements specified, provide the necessary
instrumentation at no additional cost whether or not such instrumentation is identified.
B. Any required additional instrumentation shall meet the requirements of this Section.
Submit details for review prior to installation.
C. Provide actuators and terminal unit controller for all VAV, constant volume controllers,
fan coil units and other terminal devices. Where possible, have actuators and controls
installed in the terminal unit manufacturer’s factory.
1.4 SENSORS
1.4.1 Electronic Sensors: Provide all remote sensors as required for the systems. All
sensors shall be vibration and corrosion resistant for wall, immersion, and/or duct
mounting.
a. Temperature Sensors: Thermistor type for terminal units and Resistance

Temperature Device (RTD) with an integral transmitter for all other sensors.
1. Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging type as shown on drawings.

Averaging sensor shall be a minimum of 1 linear ft of sensing element
for each sq. ft. of cooling coil face area.
2. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable well made of
stainless steel or bronze or monel materials. Pressure rating of well is
to be consistent with the system pressure in which it is to be installed.
3. Space sensors shall be equipped with set-point adjustment, override
switch, display, and/or communication port as shown on the
drawings. Match room thermostats, locking cover.
4. Outdoor air temperature sensors shall have watertight inlet fittings
and shielded from direct sunlight.

5. Room security sensors shall have stainless steel cover plate with
insulated back and security screws.
6. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
7. Output Signal: 4-20 ma.
b. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensing element type.
1. Duct and room sensors shall be a sensing range of 20 to 80 percent

with accuracy of + 2 to + 5 percent RH, including hysteresis, linearity,
and repeatability.
2. Duct and outdoor humidity sensors shall be furnished with element
guard and mounting plate and have a sensing range of 0 to 100
percent RH.
3. 4-20 ma continuous output signal.
c. Static Pressure Sensors: Non-directional, temperature compensated.
1. 4-20 ma output signal.

2. 0 to5 inches wg for duct static pressure range.
3. 0 to 0.25 inch wg for Building static pressure range.
1.4.2 Water Flow Sensors:
a. Sensor shall be insertion turbine type with turbine element, retractor and
preamplifier/transmitter mounted on a two-inch full port isolation valve;
assembly easily removed or installed as a single unit under line pressure
through the isolation valve without interference with process flow; calibrated
scale shall allow precise positioning of the flow element to the required
insertion depth within plus or minus 1 mm (0.05 inch); wetted parts shall be
constructed of stainless steel. Operating power shall be nominal 24 VDC.
Local instantaneous flow indicator shall be LED type in NEMA 4 enclosure
with 3-1/2 digit display, for wall or panel mounting.
b. Performance characteristics:
1. Ambient conditions: - 40 to 60 degrees C (-40 to 140 degrees F, 5 to

100 percent humidity.
2. Operating conditions: 850 kPa (125 psig), 0 to 120 degrees C (30 to
250 degrees F), 0.15 to 12m per second (0.5 to 40 feet per second)
velocity.
3. Nominal range (turn down ratio) L 10 to 1.
4. Overall accuracy plus or minus one percent of reading.
5. Repeatability: plus or minus 0.25 percent of reading.
6. Preamplifier mounted on meter shall provide a 4-20 ma divided pulse
output or switch closure signal for units of volume or mass per a time
base. Signal transmission distance shall be a minimum of 1,800
meters (6,000 feet). Preamplifier for bi-directional contact closure
from a relay mounted in the preamplifier.
7. Pressure Loss: Maximum 1 percent of the line pressure in line sizes
above 100 mm (4 inches).
8. Ambient temperature effects, less than 0.005 percent calibrated span
per degree C (degree F) temperature change.
9. RFI effect – flow meter shall not be affected by RFI.
10. Power supply effect less than 0.02 percent of span for a variation of
plus or minus 10 percent power supply.

1.4.3 Flow switches shall be either paddle or differential pressure type.
a. Paddle-type switches (liquid service only) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-

acting. Adjustable sensitivity with NEMA 4 enclosure.
b. Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed,

SPDT snap acting, NEMA 4 enclosure, with scale range and differential
suitable for specified application.
1.4.4 Current Switches: Current operated switches shall be self-powered, solid state with
adjustable trip current as well as status, power, and relay command status LED
indication. The switches shall be selected to match the current of the application and
output requirements of the DDC systems.
1.4.5 Pressure to Current Transmitters:
A. Provide pressure to current transmitters, Instrument Code C1 having the

following minimum specifications:
1. Internal materials of the transducer suitable for continuous contact

with the applicable media.
2. Output signal of 4-20 mA.
3. Output variation of less than 0.2% full scale for supply voltage
variations of 10%.
4. Combined non-linearity, repeatability and hysteresis effects not to
exceed 0.5% of full scale output over entire range.
5. Integral, accessible zero and span adjustments.
6. Operating temperature range of -10 to 50 deg C with 5% to 90% RH
non-condensing.
7. Temperature effect of 1.5% full scale 50 deg C or less.
8. Over pressure input protection to a minimum of twice maximum
working input pressure.
9. Output short circuit and open circuit protection.
10. Dustproof housing.
11. Shock and vibration protection.
1.4.6 Pressure Electric Switches
A. Provide SPDT snap acting switch rated for 8 amperes at 220V.
B. The pressure range shall be 0 to 130 kPa.
C. Provide adjustable setpoint from 20.6 to 130 kPa and the differential
adjustable between 12.7 and 41.1 kPa.
1.4.7 Motor Control Relays
A. Provide motor start/stop control relays in dustproof housing.
B. Provide pick up rating and time and hold rating as required for individual
applications.
C. Provide motor control relays from one manufacturer.
D. Provide input operating voltage to be compatible with the BMS digital output
(246 DC) equipment.
E. Where hand/off/auto (HOA) switches are provided on the MCC, the BMS
digital output shall control the motor only in the auto position.

F. Do not override other interlocks providing safety control.
G. Provide shock and vibration protection.
H. Provide required wiring interconnections between the motor control relays and
the motor starters.
1.4.8 Current Transformers and Relays
A. Provide current transformers and relays, to indicate motor status.
B. Provide SPDT output relay suitable for sensing by the BMS digital input
subsystem.
C. Provide output relay with trip adjustment, field accessible, over 0-100% of
range. Deadband adjustment shall be to, at maximum, 10% of range.
D. Long term setting drift of current transformer and relay combination not to
exceed 5% full range/6 months.
E. Provide current transformer and relay with over current and over voltage
protection.
F. Operating ambient temperature range of -10 deg C to plus 50 deg C with 5%

to 90% RH non-condensing.
1.4.9 Motor Status Contacts
A. Provide status inputs, for all motors using auxiliary contacts from motor
starters where available or from auxiliary relays wired into the motor starter
circuit.
1.4.10 Differential Pressure Switches
A. Select the differential pressure range of the switch to suit the application.
B. Provide switch with adjustable set point.
C. Provide switch with SPDT contacts rated at 5 amperes at 220V AC.
D. Mount the switch with diaphragm in a vertical plane.
E. Indicate flow for pumps and fans by means of a current sensitive relay which
opens an electrical contact as differential pressure falls below pre-adjusted
pressure range setting.
1.4.11 Damper Status Switch
A. Provide magnetic reed switch type damper status switches activated by

damper blade. Mount securely on damper frames.
B. Provide SPDT switches with contact rating of not less than 5 amperes at
220V AC.
1.4.12 Filter Gauges
A. Filter gauges are provided by Division 15, Air Filters.

1.4.13 Level Switches
A. Float type, tank mounted SPDT switch action, suitable for water up to 100 deg
C.
B. Float type, pit mounted SPDT switch action, suitable for water up to 100 deg
C.
1.4.14 Level Sensor
A. Capacitive level sensor, equal to Magnatrol, complete with sensor rods, water
tight enclosure, continuous 2-10V or 4-20 mA output.
1.4.15 Gas Detectors
A. Provide detectors suitable for carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, refrigerant

and ammonia detection. Instrument Code K6.
B. Provide electronic detectors, with scale range and set points suitable for the
gas being detected and in compliance with legislation for hazardous gasses.
C. Provide digital or continuous 2-10 VDC or 4-20mA input to BMS as

appropriate for detection and control.
D. Carbon Monoxide Detectors: Single or multichannel, dual-level detectors

using solid-state plug-in sensors with a 3-year minimum life; suitable over a
temperature range of 0 to 40 degree C (32 to 104 degree F); with 2 factory-
calibrated alarm levels at 50 and 100 ppm.
E. Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state

infrared sensors; suitable over a temperature range of minus 5 to 55 degree C
(23 to 130 degree F) and calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with continuous or
averaged reading; for wall mounting and duct mounting. Provide one (1)
sensor suitable for outdoor installation located near the fresh air intake of the
FAHU to measure the outdoor air carbon dioxide level. The measured value
here will serve as the base level for comparison with the space carbon dioxide
level. Provide and locate the other Carbon Dioxide sensors as indicated in
the Drawings.
1.4.16 High Level Interface
All independent control/monitoring system for chiller plant, VFD, and other equipment
with electronic interface panels/system shall have Lon Works Protocol
Communications or BACnet capability.
1.4.17 Interface Contacts
A. Snap acting switch, rated for 5 amps at 220 VAC, or digital input.
B. Ensure contacts and signals are compatible with BMS and other systems
being interfaced.
C. Provide 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA output from BMS to air flow volume control
devices.
D. Provide pulse totalizing and conversion from building power meters.
1. Power meter consists of CT’s and PT’s. Provide accuracy equal to

that of the utility meter.

2. Provide time based measurement with intervals of, at minimum 1

minute, for power demand control.
1.5 THERMOSTATS AND HUMIDISTATS
A. Room thermostats controlling heating and cooling devices shall have three modes of
operation (heating – null or dead band – cooling). Wall-mounted thermostats shall
have setpoint and temperature display, and external adjustment:
1. Pneumatic thermostats shall be 2-pipe, non-bleed or relay type design fully

proportional with adjustable throttling range, direct or reverse acting as
required. Factory calibrated at 17.2 kPa per degree C (2.5 psig per degree F0
setpoint dial stops, adjustable sensitivity setting of 7 to 30 kPa per degree C
(1 to 4 psig per degree F), and a test port to measure the output to controlled
devices. Range as required.
2. Electronic Thermostats: Soild-state, microprocessor based, programmable to

daily, weekend, and holiday schedules. Battery replacement without program
loss.
B. Strap-on thermostat shall be enclosed in a dirt-and-moisture proof housing with fixed

temperature switching point and single pole, double throw switch.
C. Freezestat shall have a minimum of 300 mm (one linear foot) of sensing element for
each 0.093 square meter (one square foot) of coil area. A freezing condition at any
increment of 300 mm (one foot) anywhere along the sensing element shall be
sufficient to operate the thermostatic element.
D. Room Humidistats: Provide fully proportioning humidistats with adjustable throttling

range for accuracy of settings and conservation. The humidistats shall have set point
scales shown in percent of relative humidity located on the instrument. Systems
showing moist/dry or high/low are not acceptable.
1.6 FINAL CONTROL ELEMENTS AND OPERATORS
A. Fail Safe Operation: Control valve and dampers shall provide “fail safe” operation in
either the normally open or normally closed position as required for freeze, moisture,
smoke or fire protection.
B. Spring Ranges: Range as required for system sequencing and to provide tight shut-
off.
C. Power Operated Control Dampers (other than VAV Boxes): Factory fabricated,
balanced type dampers. All modulating dampers shall be opposed blade type. Blades
for two-position, duct-mounted dampers shall be parallel, airfoil (streamlined) type for
minimum noise generation and pressure drop.
1. Leakage: Maximum leakage in closed position shall not exceed 7 L/S (15
CFMs) differential pressure for outside air and exhaust dampers and 200 L/S.
1 square meter (40 CFM/sq.ft.) at 50 mm (2 inches) differential pressure for
other dampers.
2. Frame shall be galvanized steel channel with seals as required to meet
leakage criteria.
3. Blades shall be galvanized steel or aluminum, 200mm (8 inch) maximum
width, with edges sealed as required.
4. Bearing shall be nylon, bronze sleeve or ball type.
5. Hardware shall be zinc-plated steel. Connected rods and linkage shall be
non-slip. Working parts of joints shall be brass, bronze, nylon or stainless
steel.

D. Smoke Dampers and Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers: These dampers shall be

classified as a Class II/III leakage rated damper for use in smoke control systems
under the latest version of UL 555S, and shall bear a UL Label attesting to same.
Smoke dampers shall be suitable for 120 degrees c (250 degrees F).
E. Operators shall be electric or pneumatic type operating at 140 kPa (20 psig) as
required for proper operation.
1. Dampers that requires manual reset or link replacement after actuation shall
not be acceptable. See drawings for required control operation.
2. Metal parts shall be aluminum, mill finish galvanized steel, or zinc plated steel
or stainless steel.
3. Maximum air velocity and pressure drop through free area the dampers:
a. Smoke damper in air handling unit; 210 meter per minute (700 fpm).
b. Duct mounted damper; 600 meter per minute (2000 fpm).
F. Control Valves
F1. Control Valves (Standard)
1. Valves shall be rated for a minimum of 150 percent of system operating

pressure at the valve location but not less than 900 kPa (125 psi).
2. Valves 50 mm (2inches) and smaller shall be bronze body with threaded or
flare connections.
3. Valves 60 mm (2 ½ inches) and larger shall be bronze or iron body with
flanged connections.
4. Brass or bronze seats except for valves controlling media above 100 degrees
C (210 degrees F), which shall have stainless steel seats.
5. Flow characteristics:
a. Three way valves shall have a linear relation or equal percentage

relation of flow versus value position.
b. Two-way valves position versus flow relation shall be linear for steam
and equal percentage for water flow control.
6. Maximum pressure drop:
a. Two position steam control, 20 percent of inlet gauge pressure.

b. Modulating Steam Control, 80 percent of inlet gauge pressure
(acoustic velocity limitation).
c. Modulating water flow control, greater of 3 meters (10 feet) of water
or the pressure drop through the apparatus.
d. Two position water valves shall be line size.
F2. Control Valves (Pressure Independent Dynamic Control Valve)
1. General
1.1 Contractor shall install Dynamic Control Valves where indicated in

drawings.
1.2 Valve shall be electronic, dynamic, modulating, 2-way, control device.
1.3 Dynamic control valve shall accurately control flow, independent of
System pressure fluctuation, at minimum 250 points between
maximum flow setting and 0.
1.4 Maximum flow setting shall be adjustable to a minimum 50 different
settings within the range of valve size.

2. Valve Actuator
2.1 Valve actuator housing shall be rated to IP 44 insulation.

2.2 Actuator shall be driven by brushes 24 VDC motor, and shall accept
2-10 VDC, 4-20mA, or 3-point floating electric signal and shall include
resister to facilitate any of these signals.
2.3 Actuator shall be capable of providing 4-20mA or 2-10vDC feedback
signal to the control System.
2.4 Actuator shall be capable of minimum 250 points of control between
maximum and minimum signal.
2.5 Provide fail safe, super capacitor system to power valve to either
open or closed position from any position in case of power failure
shall be available.
2.6 Provide External LED read-out of current valve position and
maximum valve position setting shall be available.
3. Valve Housing
3.1 Housing shall be constructed of forged ASTM (CuZn39Pb2) brass

rated at no less than 25 Bar static pressure and 120oC ( for 15mm-
40mm size) and ductile iron ASTM A536-65T, Class 60-45-18 rated
at no less than 400 KPA static pressure and 120oC ( for 50mm-80mm
size).
3.2 Valve housing shall be double union construction with a range of pipe
connections available for the appropriate pipe size (15mm-40mm).
4. Flow Regulation Unit
4.1 Flow regulation unit shall consist of; Poly-Oxy methaline and
hydrogenated acrylonitrile butadiene rubber (for 15mm-40mm size),
and 316 stainless steel and hydrogenated acrylonitrile butadiene
rubber (for 50mm-80mm size), and both shall be capable of
controlling flow within +/-5% of each rated flow.
4.2 Flow regulation unit shall be accessible, for maintenance.
4.3 Provide dual pressure/temperature test valves for verifying accuracy
of flow performance shall be available for all valve sizes.
5. Accessories
5.1 Digital manometer / thermometer shall be provided as a dual hose

portable kit, shall be capable of measuring pressure in Pascal, Bar,
PSI, Atmospheres, Millimeters of mercury, or Meters of water, shall
have a pressure range of 0 to 20,000 bar in seven scales with
automatic change of scale within +/-0.5% tolerance; and a
temperature range of -200oC to 400oC in two scales with automatic
change of scale within 0.2% tolerance; all kits shall include flow rate
chart for determining flow rate.
G. Dampers and Valve Operators and Relays:
1. Pneumatic operators, spring return type with non-ferrous metal bellows or

diaphragm of neoprene or other elastomer location. Bellows or diaphragm
shall be of sufficient size so that a change in operating pressure of not more
than 2 percent of the total motor operating pressure range will be required to
start the valve or damper moving. Provide positive positioning or sequencing
relays with adjustable operating range and starting point for operators
sequenced with other operators to permit adjustment of control sequences,
except for control valves in confined spaces in terminal units, which may use
springs with range selected to provide necessary sequencing.

2. Electric damper operator shall provide full modulating control of dampers. A

linkage and pushrod shall be furnished for mounting the actuator on the
damper frame internally in the duct or externally on the duct wall, or shall be
furnished with a direct-coupled design.
3. Electronic damper operators: VAV Box actuator shall be mounted on the
damper axle or shall be of the air valve design, and shall provide complete
modulating control of the dampers. The motor shall have a closure torque of
35-inch pounds minimum with full torque applied at close off to attain
minimum leakage.
4. Relays shall be of the following type:
a. Pneumatic: Diverting, selector, proportional, sequencing, ratio,

positive positioning, biasing, repeating.
b. Electrical Interlocking Relays: Electric-pneumatic (EP) or pneumatic-
electric (PE) types.
c. Electrical pilot duty of contactor types. Provide inductive rated
contacts for circuits with coils, motors or other inductive devices.
1.7 AIR FLOW CONTROL AND MONITORING
A. Airflow and static pressure shall be controlled via digital controller (CUs) with inputs
from airflow control measuring stations and static pressure inputs as specified.
Controller outputs shall be true analog output signals to pneumatic positioners or
variable frequency drives. Pulse width modulation outputs are not acceptable. The
CUs shall include the capability to control via simple proportional (P) control,
proportional plus integral (PI), proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID), and on-
off. The airflow control programs shall be factory-tested programs that are
documented in the literature of the control manufacturer.
B. Air Flow Measuring Station
1. Airflow measuring stations shall measure airflow by the Pitot tube traverse
method. Each unit shall consist of a network of static and total pressure
sensors, factory positioned and connected in parallel, to produce and
equalized velocity pressure. The measured velocity pressure converted to
airflow (cfm) shall have accuracy within 2 percent of the full scale throughout
the velocity range from 200 to 1,200 meter per minute (700 to 4,000 fpm).
2. Airflow measuring stations shall consist of 16-gauge sheet metal casing, an
aluminium air velocity treatment and air straightening section with an open
face area not less than 97 percent and a total and static pressure sensing
manifold made of copper. Each station shall contain non-combustible
sensors, which shall be incapable of producing toxic gases of fumes in the
event of elevated duct temperatures. All interconnecting tubing shall be
internal to the unit with the exception of one total pressure and one static
pressure meter connection.
3. Each airflow measuring station shall be installed to meet at least the
manufacturer’s minimum installation conditions and shall not amplify the
sound level within the duct. The maximum resistance to airflow shall not
exceed 0.3 times the velocity head for the duct stations and 0.6 time the
velocity head for the fan stations. The unit shall be suitable for continuous
operation up to a temperature of 120 degree C (250 degrees F).
4. Differential pressure transducers shall measure and transmit pressure signals
to the direct digital controller CU. The differential pressure transducers shall
operate in one of four ranges of the total span.

1.8 ULTRASONIC, THERMAL, THERMAL-ENERGY METERS:
1. Basis-of-Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

Honeywell or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Dynasonics
b. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc.
c. Tangshan Huizhong Instrumentation Co., Ltd.
2. Description: Meter with flow sensor, temperature sensors, transmitter,

indicator, and connecting wiring.
3. Flow Sensor: Transit-time ultrasonic type with transmitter.
4. Temperature Sensors: Insertion-type or strap-on transducer.
5. Indicator: Solid-state, integrating-type meter with integral battery pack.
a. Data Output: Six-digit electromechanical counter with readout in
kilowatts per hour or British thermal units (joules)
b. Battery Pack: Five-year lithium battery.
6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent.
7. Display: Visually indicates total fluid volume in gallons (liters) and thermal-
energy flow in kilowatts per hour or British thermal units (joules).
8. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each thermal-
energy meter system.
9. Mount thermal-energy meters on wall if accessible; if not provide brackets to
support meters.
1.9 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION / CONTROL SEQUENCE
I. Chiller Plant Control System
General System Capabilities
1. The chiller plant control software shall have the ability to control a
maximum of 3 chillers of any type running on Lon Works Protocol
Communication or BACnet.
2. The software shall be able to control both constant and variable flow
systems as well as parallel, series and decoupled piping
configurations.
3. This program shall have the ability to sequence the multiple chillers to
minimize energy consumption. The program shall provide sequence
of operation as described on the drawings and include the following
as a minimum:
a. Automatic start/stop of chillers and auxiliaries in accordance

with the sequence of operation shown on the drawings, while
incorporating requirements and restraints, such as starting
frequency of the equipment imposed by equipment
manufacturers.
b. Generate chilled water plant load profiles for different
seasons for use in forecasting efficient operating schedule.
II. AHU (CAV)
A. Normal Mode
1. The system shall be provided with Manual-Off Auto (H-0-A) selector

switch. In the Manual mode, each individual component can be
operated manually while automatic operation is disabled. In system
off mode, neither manual nor automatic operation is possible.
2. In the auto mode, the system is started or stopped remotely thru the
BMS or the local motor control panel at the AHU Room.

3. Upon start of the AHU, AC control system is energized, fresh/outdoor

air damper opens to its pre-set position, control valve opens and
modulates based on the average return air temperature (or room
temperature for zones with single space) being sensed.
4. The fresh/outdoor air damper throttles based on the CO2 level
difference between the outdoor air and as sensed by the CO2 sensor
located at the return of the AHU and/or at the space/room. A 700 ppm
difference is maintained by the System. The minimum quantity of
fresh/outdoor air supplied by the FAHU to each floor should be
enough to maintain building pressurization at all times.
5. Dirty filter status and alarm for each of the filters shown shall be
indicated in the BMS.
6. Alarm is indicated in the BMS when the preset CO2 differential is
exceeded by more than 10% ppm when the motorized damper is fully
open.
7. The other parameters monitored by the BMS are as shown in the
BMS points list and control schematic diagrams.
B. Emergency Mode
1. On fire mode as sensed by the smoke detector located in the return

duct/return of the AHU or upon receipt of fire signal from Fire Alarm
Panel, the AC system shall shutdown automatically.
2. The fresh/outdoor air damper opens to a preset level to admit
supply/make-up air from the FAHU supply fan.
3. Visual and Audible Alarm mode shall be indicated in the BMS and the
MCP at the AHU Room. Mute switch shall be provided to silence the
alarm
4. After the emergency condition is over, the system shall be restored to
normal mode thru a “System Restore” switch.
III. AHU (VAV)
A. Normal Mode
1. The system shall be provided with Manual-Off Auto (H-0-A) selector switch. In
the Manual mode, each individual component can be operated manually while
automatic operation is disabled. In system off mode, neither manual nor
automatic operation is possible.
2. In the auto mode, the system is started or stopped remotely thru the BMS or
the local motor control panel at the AHU Room.
3. Upon start of the AHU, AC control system is energized, fresh/outdoor air
damper opens to its pre-set position, control valve opens and modulates in
response to discharge air temperature as sensed by say by the thermostat
which is resettable thru the BMS.
4. Variable air volume (VAV) terminals throttle to maintain the desired room
temperatures. Based on the resulting increase in duct static pressure as
sensed by the static pressure transmitter, the variable speed drive (VSD)
slows down the AHU fan to maintain the desired static pressure setting. Upon
increase in demand for cooling, the VAV terminals modulates to open
position, thereby decreasing the duct static pressure and causes the VSD to
speed up the AHU fan.
5. The fresh/outdoor air damper throttles based on the CO2 level difference
between the outdoor air and as sensed by the CO2 sensor located at the
return of the AHU and/or at the space/room. A 700 ppm difference is
maintained by the System. The minimum quantity of fresh/outdoor air supplied
by the FAHU to each floor should be enough to maintain building
pressurization at all times.
6. Dirty filter status and alarm for each of the filters shown shall be indicated in
the BMS.

7. Alarm is indicated in the BMS when the preset CO2 differential is exceeded
by more than 10% ppm when the motorized damper is fully open.
8. The other parameters monitored by the BMS are as shown in the BMS points
list and control schematic diagrams.
B. Emergency Mode
1. On fire mode as sensed by the smoke detector located in the return

duct/return of the AHU or upon receipt of fire signal from Fire Alarm Panel, the
AC system shall shutdown automatically.
2. The fresh/outdoor air damper opens to a preset level to admit supply/make-up
air from the FAHU supply fan.
3. Visual and Audible Alarm mode shall be indicated in the BMS and the MCP at
the AHU Room. Mute switch shall be provided to silence the alarm.
4. After the emergency condition is over, the system shall be restored to normal
mode thru a “System Restore” switch.
IV. Pressurization Fans
A. Normal Mode
1. The system shall be provided with the Manual-Off Auto (H-0-A) selector
switch. In the Manual mode, each individual component can be operated
manually while automatic operation is disabled. In system off mode, neither
manual nor automatic operation is possible.
B. Fire Mode
1. The H-0-A is set in the auto mode, the system is started or stopped remotely
thru the BMS.
2. Upon receipt of Fire Signal from Fire Alarm Panel, the control program will
energize the variable frequency drive.
3. The variable frequency drive will vary the fan motor speed thru its space
differential pressure sensor/transmitter to maintain a pressure differential of
25 Pa to 50 Pa between the stairway and adjacent corridor.
4. On/off status and trip alarm points shall be indicated in the BMS for
monitoring.
C. Other Monitoring Points
1. The other points monitored by the BMS are shown in the BMS points list.
V. Exhaust Fans
A. Normal Mode
1. The system shall be provided with Manual-Off Auto (H-0-A) selector switch. In
the Manual mode, each individual component can be operated manually while
automatic operation is disabled. In system off mode, neither manual nor
automatic operation is possible.
B. Auto Mode
1. The H-0-A is set in the auto mode, the system is started or stopped remotely
thru the BMS.
2. When the fan is running, indication is monitored thru its air flow by means of
air flow sensor/transmitter.
monitoring.

VI. Supply Fans
A. Normal Mode
1. The system shall be provided with Manual –Off Auto (H-O-A) selector switch.
In the Manual mode, each individual component can be operated manually
while automatic operation is disabled. In the system off mode, neither manual
nor automatic operation is possible.
B. Auto Mode
1. The H-O-A is set in the auto mode, the system is started or stopped remotely
thru the BMS.
2. When the fan is running, indication is monitored thru its flow by means of air
flow sensor transmitter.
monitoring.
VII. Carpark Supply and Exhaust Fans
A. Normal Mode
1. The system shall be provided with Manual-Off Auto (H-O-A) selector switch.
B. Auto Mode (Supply)
thru the BMS.
2. The control program will start fans and/or cycle between high & low speed
based on control matrix to be specified later.
3. Confirmation of the air flow will be determined by air flow switch mounted at
the supply duct and will indicate in the BMS that the system is running.
monitoring.
C. Auto Mode (Exhaust Fan)
1. The H-O-A is set in the auto mode, the system is started (and/or cycle
between high & low speed) and stopped remotely thru the BMS.
2. The control program will start when either the space temperature sensor or
the carbon monoxide sensor value has reached its preset value, which is user
adjustable in the BMS, the control will start the exhaust fan or fans and
induction fans per zoning as shown on the drawings based on control matrix
to be specified later. This control will complement the supply fans to have
continuous flow of clean air in the carpark
monitoring.
D. Emergency Mode (Exhaust)
1. On fire mode, upon receipt of fire signal from the fire alarm panel, the exhaust
fans of the floor on fire are energized and operated on high speed. Supply
fans on this floor shall shutdown automatically.
2. Fans on all other parking floors shall also shutdown automatically.
3. After emergency condition is over, the system shall be restored to normal
mode thru a “system restore” switch.

VIII. Fan Coil Unit
A. Normal Mode
1. The system shall be provided with Manual-Off Auto (H-O-A) selector switch.
B. Auto Mode
thru the BMS. Time schedule and user input will start the auto mode.
2. The temperature control will be determined by the temperature sensor
mounted inside the room. The control program will maintain the room
temperature by modulating the cooling valve.
monitoring.
4. For fan coil units serving common areas, fan shall automatically switch to low
speed when rooms are unoccupied.
IX. Fresh Air Handling Unit (FAHU) With Integrated Heat Recovery Wheel
A. Normal Mode
1. The system shall be provided with the Manual-Off Auto (H-0-A) selector
switch. In the Manual mode, each individual component can be operated
manually while automatic operation is disabled. In system off mode, neither
manual nor automatic operation is possible.
2. In the auto mode, the system is started or stopped remotely thru the BMS or
the local motor control panel at the AHU Room.
3. The system is composed of air handling unit, one exhaust fan for toilet
exhaust and electrical exhaust, one exhaust fan for general exhaust, and the
integrated Heat Recovery Wheel.
4. The FAHU pre-cools the fresh air supplied to AHUs located at each floor.
Exhaust air from toilets, and electrical/communication rooms, and building
general exhaust pass through one side of the Heat Recovery Wheel (HRW)
before being discharged outside of the building. Fresh air from the outside
pass through the other side of HRW. As the HRW rotates, the ambient fresh
air is pre-cooled by the exhaust air before passing through the coil.
5. The motorized dampers at the fresh/outdoor air ducts of the AHU at every
floor throttle depending on the required fresh/outdoor air as dictated through
the BMS and as sensed by the CO2 sensor. Based on the resulting increase
in duct static pressure as sensed by the Static Pressure Transmitter (SPT),
the Variable Speed Drive (VSD) slows down the supply fan of the FAHU. This
VSD is interlocked with the VSD of the General Exhaust Fan to maintain
building pressurization. The VSD slows down the General Exhaust Fan.
6. Dirty filter status and alarm for each of the filters shown shall be indicated in
the BMS.
7. The other parameters monitored by the BMS are as shown in the BMS points
list and control schematic diagrams.
B. Emergency Mode
1. On fire mode, upon receipt of fire signal from the fire alarm panel, the AC
system shall shutdown automatically.
2. The Normally Open (N.O.) motorized damper at the general exhaust duct of
the floor on fire remains open while the normally closed (N.C.) motorized

damper automatically opens. All motorized dampers at other floors

automatically close.
3. The general exhaust fan is energized and extracts smoke from the floor on
fire. The N.O. motorized damper located at the discharge duct of the fan
closes, the N.C. motorized damper opens, and the smoke/extracted air is
discharged outside of the building without passing through the HRW. The
other exhaust fan remains off.
4. The supply fan at the FAHU is energized and supplies make-up air/supply air
to the building.
5. Visual and audible alarm mode shall be indicated in the BMS and the MCP at
the AHU room. Mute switch shall be provided to silence the alarm.
6. After the emergency condition is over, the system shall be restored to normal
mode thru a “system restore” switch.
Note: Refer to AHU (CAV) / AHU (VAV) sequence of operations for interfacing with
FAHU.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Meet applicable codes, each manufacturer's recommended installation procedures

and Division 16 requirements.
B. Install all equipment so as to be mechanically stable and to allow easy access. Fix as
necessary to wall or floor. Provide anti-vibration mounting where required to properly
isolate the equipment.
C. Install all equipment in locations providing adequate ambient conditions for its
specified functioning, allowing for adequate ventilation.
D. Provide complete shop drawings for review.
E. Review proposed location of any equipment with Owner prior to its installation.
F. Where the point schedules indicate auxiliary contact provision, provide all
instrumentation, wiring, conduit, power supplies and services as required to integrate
these points into the BMS.
G. Provide interposing and motor control relays at the local item of equipment or at the
associated MCC as applicable. Provide all relays, wiring, conduit, power supplies and
services as required to integrate these points into the BMS.
H. Wire all equipment which is part of the same control loop to the same field panel.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide for each piece of instrumentation and end device, a 50 mm x 75 mm plastic

nameplate embossed to indicate the following:
1. Mnemonic for point

2. Remote field panel and termination

3. English language description

4. Field panel
B. Affix the nameplate to the equipment with self-tapping screws or bead chain or similar
device.
C. Submit specimen nameplate and a complete list of descriptive titles for approval prior
to installation.
3.3 WIRING
A. Provide all wiring required for Instrumentation. Install in IMC conduit, and otherwise
comply with Division 16 requirements. Approved plenum cable wire may be used
where allowed by code.
B. Provide power wiring from nearest emergency powered panel to each field device as
required.
C. Provide necessary relays required to interconnect equipment.
D. Install wiring parallel and perpendicular to building planes.
3.4 FACTORY BUILT EQUIPMENT
A. Factory built equipment such as roof top air conditioners, gas fired make up air units,
VAV terminals, water source heat pumps, etc., require control devices supplied by this
section, refer to individual Specification Sections for exact requirements.
B. Provide all required components to completely interface items with the BMS, including
relays, actuators, thermostats, terminal control units and other devices to make a
complete and operational system.
C. Install thermostats and control wiring for equipment where thermostats are factory
supplied.
3.5 WARNING NOTICES
A. Place warning notices at the MCC Panel, local starter and on or close to all motors
under BMS control.
B. Make the notices conspicuous with bold lettering to advise that the motor is under
BMS control and may start at any time without warning. Submit sample notice for
review prior to installation.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Testing, Adjusting and Balancing SECTION 15950
PART 1 - GENERAL............................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 RELATED WORK ........................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................. 2
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS ........................................................................................................... 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 3
2.1 PLUGS ......................................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 INSULATION REPAIR MATERIAL ...................................................................................................... 3
2.3 AIR BALANCE SYSTEM KIT SIMILAR TO “FLOWHOOD” BY SHORTRIDGE INSTRUMENTS INC. OR
APPROVED EQUAL ........................................................................................................................ 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 4
3.2 INSPECTING EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION FOR CONFORMANCE WITH DESIGN ............................. 4
3.3 TAB PROCEDURES........................................................................................................................ 4
3.4 VIBRATION TESTING...................................................................................................................... 5
3.5 SOUND TESTING ........................................................................................................................... 5
3.6 DUCT AIR LEAKAGE TESTING ........................................................................................................ 6

Development\Mechanical\15950-Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.doc
SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of heating, ventilating and air conditioning
(HVAC) systems. TAB includes the following:
1. Planning systematic TAB procedures.
2. Inspecting equipment and installations for conformance with design.
3. Balancing air systems; adjustment of total system to provide design

performance; and testing performance of equipment and automatic controls.
4. Vibration and sound measurements.
5. Recording and reporting results.
B. Definitions:
1. Basic TAB used in this Section: Chapter 34, "Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing" of ASHRAE Handbook, "HVAC Applications".
2. TAB: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. The process of checking and

adjusting HVAC systems to meet design objectives.
3. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
4. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
5. Air Systems: Includes all outside air, supply air, return air, exhaust air and
relief air systems.
6. Flow rate tolerance: The allowable percentage variation, minus to plus, of

actual flow rate from values (design) in the contract documents.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15050, Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
B. Section 15011, Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls
C. Section l5080, Mechanical Insulation.
D. Section 15815, Metal Ducts And Accessories
A. Refer to Articles, Quality Assurance and Submittals, in Section 15050, Basic

Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B. TAB Agency Qualification: Current membership in AABC or certification by NEBB.
C. Test Equipment Criteria: The basic instrumentation requirements and

accuracy/calibration required by AABC, National Standards or by NEBB Procedural
Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems.

D. TAB Criteria:
1. One or more of the applicable AABC, NEBB or SMACNA publications,

supplemented by ASHRAE Handbook "HVAC Applications" Chapter 34, shall
be the basis for planning, procedures, and reports.
2. Flow rate tolerance: Values are based on discussion in ASHRAE Handbook

"HVAC Applications", Chapter 34. Air Filter resistance during tests, artificially
imposed if necessary, shall be at least 80 percent of final values for pre-filters
and after filters.
a. Air handling unit cubic meters/min (cubic feet per minute): Minus 0
percent to plus l0 percent.
b. All other fans: Minus 0 percent to plus l0 percent.
c. Air terminal units (Max): Minus 5 percent to plus l0 percent.
d. Exhaust hoods/cabinets: Minus 0 percent to plus l0 percent.
e. Minimum outside air: Minus 0 percent to plus 10 percent.
f. Individual room air outlets and inlets, and air flow rates not
mentioned above: Minus l0 percent to plus l0 percent.
3. Systems shall be adjusted for energy efficient operation as described in

PART 3.
4. Typical TAB procedures and results shall be demonstrated to the Consultant

for one air distribution system (including all fans, three terminal units, three
rooms) and one hydronic system (pumps and three coils) as follows:
a. When field TAB work begins.
b. During each partial final inspection and the final inspection for the
project if requested by the Consultant.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals.
B. TAB Agency qualifications: Submit names and qualifications of company officers and
job supervisor. Submit information on three recently completed projects. Submit list of
proposed test equipment.
C. For use by the Consultant staff, submit one complete set of applicable AABC or
NEBB publications that will be the basis of TAB work.
D. TAB Reports to be submitted for review:
1. Inspection reports covering equipment and systems installation. These

reports are to be submitted during early stages of the project in order to allow
timely correction of deficiencies.
2. TAB reports covering flow balance and adjustments, performance tests,

vibration tests, and sound tests. These reports shall be submitted prior to or
at the time of requesting final inspection, or partial final inspections of
contract work.

a. Include in final reports uncorrected installation deficiencies noted

during TAB and applicable explanatory comments on test results that
differ from design requirements.
A. The following publications form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by
the reference thereto. In text the publications are referenced to by the initials of the
organization.
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.

(ASHRAE):
- ASHRAE Handbook, 1995 HVAC Applications, Chapter 34, Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing; Chapter 43, Sound and Vibration Control.
C. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC):
- AABC National Standards MN-l, 5th Edition, 1989.
D. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB):
- Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental

Systems, 5th Edition, September l991.
- Procedural Standards for the Measurement and Assessment of Sound and

Vibration, 1994 Edition.
E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):

- HVAC SYSTEMS-Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, 2nd Edition, l993.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLUGS
Provide plastic plugs to seal holes drilled in ductwork for test purposes.
2.2 INSULATION REPAIR MATERIAL

Section, INSULATION. Provide for repair of insulation removed or damaged for TAB work.
2.3 AIR BALANCE SYSTEM KIT SIMILAR TO “FLOWHOOD” BY SHORTRIDGE INSTRUMENTS INC. OR
APPROVED EQUAL
A. Air Data Multimeter model ADM-850 complete with Airflow Measuring base
assembly, battery charger, carrying case.
B. Five top Kit (2” x 2, 2” x 4’, 1” x 5”, 3” x 3”)
C. Pilot tube 18” long
D. Temprobe (ADT 442)
E. Temperature netractile cord. 6’ long (TRC-16)

F. Temperature extension wand, 19” long (TRC-16)
G. Two A-303 static pressure tips.
H. Neoprene tubing set, two 5” long and one 10’ long.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Refer to TAB Criteria in Article, Quality Assurance.
B. Obtain applicable contract documents and copies of approved submittals for HVAC
equipment and automatic control systems.
C. Coordinate TAB procedures with any phased construction completion requirements

for the project. Systems serving completed phases of the project will require TAB for
such phases prior to partial final inspections and for final phase inspection.
D. Allow sufficient time in construction schedule for TAB and submission of reports prior
to partial final inspections and for final phase.
3.2 INSPECTING EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION FOR CONFORMANCE WITH DESIGN
A. GENERAL: The inspection and report is to be done after air distribution equipment is
on site and duct installation has begun, but well in advance of performance testing
and balancing work. The purpose of the inspection is to identify and report deviations
from design and ensure that systems will be ready for TAB at the appropriate time.
B. Reports: Follow check list format developed by AABC, NEBB or SMACNA,

supplemented by narrative comments, with emphasis on air handling units and fans.
Check for conformance with submittals. Verify that diffuser and register sizes are
correct. Check air terminal unit installation including flexible duct sizes and routing.
3.3 TAB PROCEDURES
A. General: During TAB all related system components shall be in full operation. Fan
and pump rotation, motor loads and equipment vibration shall be checked and
corrected as necessary before proceeding with TAB. Set controls and/or block off
parts of distribution systems to simulate design operation of variable volume air or
water systems for test and balance work.
B. Air Balance and Equipment Test: Include air handling units, fans, terminal units, room
diffusers/outlets/inlets, and laboratory hoods and cabinets.
1. Artificially load air filters by partial blanking to produce air pressure drop of at
least 80 percent of the design final pressure drop, or as prescribed under
Pressurization Commissioning (Item 3.3 C).
2. Adjust fan speeds to provide design air flow. V-belt drives, including fixed
pitch pulley requirements, are specified in Section 15050, BASIC
MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS. Replace fan motors and
associated electricals if necessary without additional cost to the owner.
(Refer to Sections 15725 and 15836)
3. Test and balance systems in all specified modes of operation, including fire
emergency modes. Verify that dampers and other controls function properly.

a. Coordinate TAB, including system volumetric controls, with Section

15950, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING.
4. Record final measurements for air handling equipment performance data

sheets.
C. Space Pressurization Commissioning.
3.4 VIBRATION TESTING
A. Furnish instruments and perform vibration measurements as specified in Section

15071, Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls. Field vibration balancing is
specified in Section 15050, Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. Provide
measurements for all rotating HVAC equipment 373 watts (1/2 horsepower) and
larger, including centrifugal/screw compressors, pumps, fans and motors.
B. Record initial and final measurements for each unit of equipment on test forms.
Where vibration readings exceed the allowable tolerance and efforts to make
corrections have proved unsuccessful, forward a separate report to the Consultant.
3.5 SOUND TESTING
A. Perform and record required sound measurements in accordance with Paragraph,

QUALITY ASSURANCE in Section 15071 Mechanical Vibration and Seismic
Controls.
1. Take readings in rooms, approximately /three/five/ten or percent of total

rooms, designated by the Consultant.
B. Take measurements with a calibrated sound level meter and octave band analyzer of
the accuracy required by AABC or NEBB.
C. Sound reference levels, formulae and coefficients shall be according to ASHRAE

Handbook, "HVAC Applications", Chapter 43, SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL.
D. Determine compliance with specifications as follows:
1. Where sound pressure levels are specified, including the NC Criteria in

Section 15071, Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls.
a. Reduce the background noise as much as possible by shutting off

unrelated audible equipment.
b. Measure octave band sound pressure levels with specified

equipment "off."
c. Measure octave band pressure levels with specified equipment "on."
d. Use the DIFFERENCE in corresponding readings to determine the

sound pressure due to equipment.
DIFFERENCE: 0 1 2 3 4 5-9 10 or More
FACTOR: 10 7 4 3 2 1 0
Sound pressure level due to equipment equals sound pressure level

with equipment "on" minus FACTOR.

e. Plot octave bands of sound pressure level due to equipment for

typical rooms on a graph which also shows noise criteria (NC)
curves.
2. When sound power levels are specified:
a. Perform steps 1.a. thru 1.d., as above.
b. For indoor equipment: Determine room attenuating effect, i.e.,

difference between sound power level and sound pressure level.
Determined sound power level will be the sum of sound pressure
level due to equipment plus the room attenuating effect.
c. For outdoor equipment: Use directivity factor and distance from noise
source to determine distance factor, i.e., difference between sound
power level and sound pressure level. Measured sound power level
will be the sum of sound pressure level due to equipment plus the
distance factor.
E. Where measure sound levels exceed specified level, the installing contractor or
equipment manufacturer shall take remedial action approved by the Consultant and
the necessary sound tests shall be repeated.
3.6 DUCT AIR LEAKAGE TESTING
A. Refer Article, Quality Assurance, in Section 15815 - Metal Ducts and Accessories, for
TAB agency’s role and responsibilities.
END OF SECTION


Spec - HVAC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Spec - HVAC

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Spec - HVAC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MACTAN CEBU INTERNATIONAL

Prepared by : MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC.

Reg. No. : 2886

100% DESIGN DEVELOPMENT

1. Section 01815 - ACMV Commissioning Requirements

2. Section 07841 - Through Penetration Firestopping Systems

3. Section 15007 - Alternative Equipment and Suppliers

4. Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions

5. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

6. Section 15055 - Motors, Starters, Control Centers & Wiring

7. Section 15071 - Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls

8. Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation

9. Section 15181 - Hydronic Piping

10. Section 15725 - Air Handling Units

11. Section 15734 - Computer Room Air Conditioning Units

12. Section 15815 - Metal Ducts and Accessories

13. Section 15836 - Fans & Ventilations

14. Section 15840 - Air Terminal Units

15. Section 15861 - Air Filters

16. Section 15900 - HVAC Instrumentation and Controls

17. Section 15950 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC.

PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC.

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Meet the requirements of the General Instructions.

C. Appoint a single person as Commissioning Coordinator who shall be responsible for

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15010 – Mechanical General Provisions.

B. Section 15950 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

B. The “Employers Representative” may elect to source start-up and handover by a

1. Principle representative and qualifications

2. Proposed personnel and relevant project experience

3. Previous similar assignments and references

4. Scope of work to be undertaken

5. Company resources and equipment

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 1 of 7

C. Use of a commissioning specialist shall not relieve Division 15 of the obligation to

Note: All works to be undertaken by the Contractor.

D. Supply the name, qualifications and experience of the proposed Commissioning

2.1 SCHEDULES AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS

A. Submit to the Consultant, 60 days prior to the scheduled Substantial Performance, a

1. Installation and testing of Refrigerant Piping systems. Very strict compliance

2. Installation, leak testing and cleaning of duct systems.

3. Control system wiring

5. Electrical service connections

6. Equipment suppliers pre-start checkout of the equipment installations,

7. Start up of various pieces of equipment and systems.

8. Operational testing of system components.

9. Performance testing of equipment and systems.

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 2 of 7

10. Acceptance testing of equipment installations and system, by authorities

12. Calibration of controls and point checkout

14. Emergency system checkout

15. Fire alarm and control system interfacing

16. Submittal of completed equipment and system checkout sheets

17. Demonstration of systems and equipment

18. Maintenance manual preparation and submittal